Home

User Manual

1. Click and hold the Open host file button Shortcut Menu on Document Workspace A shortcut menu is also available if you right click in the document workspace area The list of commands in the menu varies with the current conditions fe Vancouver MPE COBOL4 PUB DEMO Copy sp Delete s or Find previous spell status area sp Find next spellstatus area sp Open spellstatus area a Save position of selected text sp Go to previous saved position r ME Copy pathname to clipboard sp PRU ODDO B WNE piil Run selection as host command EFA L6 12 28 len17 Shortcut menu for text manipulation and to access file properties Qedit for Windows User Manual A Windows Primer e 45 These options are not available if the selected text spans more than one line In the example above the commands in the top part of the shortcut menu Cut Copy Paste and Delete are available if you have selected some text They provide easy access to common editing and Clipboard functions The Paste command is only available if there is something in the Clipboard If there is something in the Clipboard but you have not selected anything you might also get a Paste command The commands in the middle part of the menu Find previous Find next and Open are available if the insertion point is immediately in front of or anywhere on a word or if you have selected some text You do not have to select a word Qedit will automatically i
2. 1 Select a contiguous block of text by highlighting it This could be as small as one character or as large as the entire file For example use the Select All command of the Edit menu to select the entire file 2 Select the Edit menu and click Copy to copy the selected text to the Clipboard The previous contents of the Clipboard are replaced with your new selection The text in your document is still selected Pasting Text If you cut copy and paste in the same host document or another host document open on the same connection Qedit issues a special command to the server to have the Paste operation done on the host The only lines transferred to Qedit on the PC are the updated lines visible on the screen If you are working with lines of the same length there is no problem If you are copying lines that might exceed the record length of the target file Qedit then has to make some decisions Because local files MPE host files and UNIX host files work differently the result of a paste might be different MPE host files and to some degree UNIX files typically have a maximum record length as defined in the File options dialog box If you are copying lines between two 2 files on the same connection the operation is done by the server Because the server knows the characteristics of the source and target files it can fold lines before inserting them in the target file Folding means Qedit puts as many characters as it can on a line a
3. 70 e Creating amp Opening Files The Last Modified date and time is based on the local time on your PC Qedit assumes the clocks on all your computers are correct and takes care of adjusting the time across different time zones See Time Zones on page 221 The Size column represents the number of records for MPE files and the number of bytes for UNIX files If you want to make sure you have the latest information in the directory listing click the Refresh button This forces the server to discard the current list and bring in the latest set of files Note that the wildcard selection is ignored on a Refresh operation i e Qedit displays a complete list of files in the current working directory or group Sorting the Directory Listing By default Qedit sorts files in ascending order You can reverse the sort order by clicking the Order Selection button located on the right side of the heading line When the arrow on this button points up the sort order is ascending when the arrow points down the order is descending To change the default sort order select the Sort order command in the View menu You can sort the list on any of the headings Name File Type Last Modified and Size by clicking the column heading The heading for the currently selected sort item appears on a darker background as if the button was pressed down Searching for a File These are some of the ways you can search for files on host directories e Sc
4. I Read only Length l Open a copy I Force unnumbered Directory Help Cancel Open Host File dialog box e Connection Select a connection from the Connection list If you need a new connection to a host or you need to use a new login name click the Create button You can also use the Create button to set up a temporary connection If a host file is the active window when you access this dialog box Qedit opens the file on the same connection as the active file If no document is open or if the active window is a local file Qedit uses the connection name that was used to open the last host file e File name Enter the file name or choose a file from the most recently used MRU list This list includes files that have not been opened successfully starting with the most recent name at the top of the list The list is preserved from one Qedit session to the next The file names are recorded as you originally entered them even misspelled files Qedit does not keep track of the connection associated with a file name in the list If the file you want is not in your home directory on HP UX or logon group on MPE you can type the path name in the File name text box NOTE Files opened via the Directory dialog box the Open selection command CTRL D of the File menu or a shortcut menu right click are not added to the MRU list The list also does not include files saved by the Save as command However all typed file names
5. Optional character Matches zero or more of the preceding character Matches one or more of the preceding character Start a character class End a character class If 1st character in character class negates class Appendix C Regular Expressions e 243 Subpattern start Subpattern end Anchor Characters In general a regexp can find a match anywhere in the text as long as they do not span multiples lines There are 2 exceptions to this rule The start of line and the end of line anchors They are called anchors for very good reasons These actually indicate that the match must occur at fixed positions within the line The start of line anchor forces the string to be at the very beginning If you enter abc the line will be selected only if the string abc is the first thing on the line Thus abcdefghij Will be selected xyzabc Will not be selected Similarly the end of line anchor specifies that the string must appear as the last thing on the line abc In this example the lines must end with the string abc There must not be anything else even spaces after it abcdef Will not be selected xyzabc Will be selected You can combine the anchors to verify that lines contain only a certain string and nothing else Simply use abc Each line has a start and an end of line So if you search for or Qedit finds a match on the previous or next line The
6. Session Environment When a connection is established a new session is started and the server program is run This is a normal session It runs under a user within a group and account It has access to files in the permanent and temporary domains Temporary files are only Interacting with Hosts e 167 KJ Stop button 168 e Interacting with Hosts accessible from this connection and nowhere else Generic files such as OLDPASS are also available You can very well compile and link a COBOL program by entering the following commands in the host command dialog box or in a host file cob85xl cobol4 src link Soldpass run Soldpass Process dependent Settings Most changes made to the session environment are available to other processes in the process tree There are certain commands however that only affect the current process For example if you use the CHDIR command the current working directory is changed only for the application it is issued from As soon as you exit from that application the CWD returns to its previous value This has serious implications for host commands entered in Qedit If you are using the host command dialog box each command is executed by itself in its own CI process If you execute commands straight from a document a single CI process handles all the commands in the document In the CHDIR example the command is executed and forgotten immediately The next command you enter might fail if it assumes the
7. BZ X Line 71 Col 1 Invisible formatting characters displayed In the example you can see the lines in the Set up the terminal section are aligned The first three use TAB characters and the last three use SPACE characters The color in which these invisible formatting characters appear is defined in the color scheme applicable to the document Matching Opening and Closing Characters 118 e Text Formatting Features In most programming languages syntax requires the use of opening and closing characters to delimit operations or expressions Most common character pair is probably parentheses Another example is the left and right square brackets and in Qedit Scripting Language To complicate things further often times the character pairs can be nested making it hard to find matching sets Qedit offers a simple feature in which the opening character is momentarily highlighted as you type a matching closing character This feature helps identify the text enclosed by the pairs The opening character is briefly highlighted with a square using the Attention highlight color defined in the color scheme for this file This feature can be disabled by removing the check from the Balance Punctuation parentheses brackets while typing option on the General page of the Preferences dialog box Also if you type a closing character for which Qedit cannot find a matching opening character Qedit emits a sound You can disab
8. Save As Used to rename a file or change the file name type directory or path Save All Saves changes to all open files on Qedit Properties Prompts the file Properties dialog box The dialog box provides tabbed pages to set general file Options display and set COBX tags display file related Information change Tabs and Guides settings Print Prompts the Print dialog box in which you choose print settings Page Setup Prompts the Page Setup dialog box in which you choose layout options Print on Host Prompts the Print on Host dialog box in which you select the print destination This command is not available for local files Qedit for Windows User Manual Qedit for Windows User Manual Exit Quits the program closes all files and disconnects from all hosts Edit Menu The Edit menu on the toolbar contains the following commands Undo Can t Undo Redo Can t Redo Cut Copy Paste Copy Special Clear Select all Find Find again Find again reverse Find previous Find next Find selection Find previous selection Replace and Column Undo Can t Undo Reverses the last action unless the action cannot be undone Redo Can t Redo Lets you re apply the last undone operation unless it cannot be redone Cut Removes a highlighted selection to the Clipboard so that it can be moved The Clipboard can only retain one cut or copied selection at a time See Copy Copy Lets you copy a highlighted
9. You have to make sure the Qedit server name in the Configure Server Settings dialog box is the same as the one used to start the main server This ensures you are running the same version of the server If the connection is established the file is opened and data is transferred between the server and the client Troubleshooting e 215 Server debugging mode can be enabled in the Debug Controls dialog box 216 e Troubleshooting HP UX Host Connections In order to open a file on an HP 9000 host Qedit for Windows must go through a number of steps 1 You have to start the Qedit for HP UX server on the host For detailed instructions refer to the Qedit for HP UX User Manual e Log in as root e Ifyou have installed Qedit in a directory other than the default usr robelle you have to set the ROBELLE environment variable with the actual install directory ROBELLE users apps You also need to export the variable export ROBELLE e Start the server program with the d argument opt robelle bin qedit d The server then initializes its environment One of the first things it does is open the log files If it cannot open them it prints a message on the console and terminates These log files are used to keep track of the server activities and optionally record additional events for debugging purposes By default on HP UX hosts the log files are created in a directory called log qedit which
10. h1618 HPDESK MS WORD3 01 Macintosh 1619 h1619 HPDESK MSWORD PC Document 1620 h1620 HPDESK MSWORD WINDOWS Document Appendix B File Types e 239 1621 h1621 HPDESK SAMNA WORD Document 1622 h1622 HPDESK AMIPRO Document 1626 HPDESK MS EXCEL Spreadsheet HPDESK MACBINARY 1647 HPDESK MS POWERPOINT STARTREK SUPRTREK save game HPDESK FREELANCE 1729 HPDESK DELTAGRAPH HPDESK EXPRESSIONIST 1734 HPDESK MS MAIL MSG DATA HPDESK MS WRITE Document HPDESK MS VIDEO 1746 h1746 HPDESK MS WINDOWS BITMAP 1850 HPDESK PICT 1851 HPDESK PICT FILE Macintosh HPDESK TIFF FILE Macintosh 1853 HPDESK EPSF HPDESK MACWRITE HPDESK MACWRITE Macintosh HPDESK MACWRITE II HPDESK MACWRITE II Macintosh HPDESK MACPAINT 240 e Appendix B File Types Qedit for Windows User Manual Qedit for Windows User Manual 1879 h1879 HPDESK MS EXCEL WORK 1880 h1880 HPDESK MS EXCEL WORK Macintosh 1881 h1881 HPDESK MS EXCEL CHART 1882 h1882 HPDESK MS EXCEL CHART Macintosh 1883 h1883 HPDESK MS EXCEL MACRO HPDESK MS EXCEL MACRO Macintosh 1886 HPDESK SUPERPAINT 2 x Macintosh 1891 h1891 HPDESK WORDPERFECT Macintosh Document 1893 HPDESK LOTUS 1 2 3 Macintosh 1909 HPDESK DELTAGRAPH Macintosh Appendix B File Types e 241 242 e Appendix B File Types Qedit for Windows User Manual Appendix C Regular Expressions What Are Regular Expressions Server version 4 8 or higher i
11. s own version number and build timestamp but also information related to the Qedit license your Windows environment Windows socket TCP IP stack used memory usage and display resolution You can select Copy to send this information to the Clipboard You will then be able to paste it back into another application such as electronic mail software If you prefer you can get a hard copy by selecting Print If you are able to connect to a host but are having difficulty editing host files you can get more information by using the Properties command in the File menu and displaying the Information tab If the problem cannot be resolved easily technical support might request you to get trace information from Qedit This can be done by using the Debug command in the Options menu This command displays the Debug Controls dialog box Qedit for Windows User Manual AN Warning Qedit for Windows User Manual Debug Controls M M M M M M M M c obelle quin tre M E Trace to IDE window Debug Controls dialog box The trace options on the dialog box can be divided into two categories local trace options and server trace options The first option simply enables the trace feature on the server The second option forces the server to write trace records to the host c onsole as well as the trace file on disk In most cases when you have to use trace it is better to enable all the options available for the local trace Mes
12. Creating amp Opening Files e 65 66 e Creating amp Opening Files By default Qedit preserves trailing spaces that have been entered If you try to insert new text on these lines the trailing spaces will eventually reach the right margin and you won t be able to insert any more characters When this happens you have to go to the end of the line and remove some spaces to make room for the extra character s Although this process is awkward Qedit uses it as a default because it presumes that anything you enter is valuable and should be kept intact Unfortunately you cannot tell whether or not a line has trailing spaces If trailing spaces are really not important you can disable this feature Once disabled Qedit removes the necessary trailing spaces as you enter new text Note that if you delete characters from a line Qedit does not return the trailing spaces that were removed This setting only affects editing while the file is opened As you modify the file and add trailing blanks Qedit recognizes them However trailing blanks are not written to the file when you save it Next time you open the file trailing blanks are gone That s because the server never transmits them to the Qedit client e Auto indent Auto indent is a great feature because it allows you to follow the indent of the last line when you press the RETURN or ENTER key Instead of moving the cursor to the first position in the line it goes to the column that ma
13. Opening Files e 61 is valid in a word in COBOL but not in Pascal and it defines the maximum Record length for your file Qedit for HP e3000 is able to recognize the Language setting and select the appropriate compiler based on that At the moment you need to run host based Qedit from a terminal or terminal emulator to take advantage of this feature Many PC editors set the maximum line length to 32 000 or 64 000 characters so the concept of Record length doesn t really apply Qedit is designed for editing host files which often have a maximum length for each line For example COBOL has a fixed format in which the first 6 columns contain a sequence number the next 66 contain the program code and the last eight are comments By default Qedit opens a Data type file with a Record length of 256 characters but you can increase or decrease that value Qedit s maximum record length is currently 8 172 characters for a host file 3 Click the New button Qedit will create a connection to that host if you do not have one already and attempt to create a new file in your login directory Until this file is given a permanent name you will see the connection name followed by Untitled1 in the window title bar Once you have entered some information into your new file use the Save command of the File menu to save the file This automatically gives you the Host Save As dialog box in which you can assign a new name to the file Otherwise the
14. Select the Connections command of the Options menu 52 e Connecting to a Host or Network Qedit for Windows User Manual Qedit for Windows User Manual Connection List Ea Connection Name fo Host name PO Type M Character Set HP Romans M Use firewall protocol Default colors Default he Hello T Login at startup Session password I Prompt User password poo Prompt Account password lf J Prompt Group password I Prompt Add Remove Help Cancel Connection List dialog box for MPE hosts When the Connection List dialog box appears enter a Connection Name We recommend that you choose something meaningful to you or anybody else who works on your PC Examples are e the name of your system e g sylvia e the system plus your user name e g sylvia fred e the function e g purchase orders e something totally irrelevant e g the sky is blue The Connection Name can contain any combination of letters and numbers except these characters the colon parentheses and nonprinting characters Enter the Host Name or IP address You will need the name of your host system in Internet format e g Sylvia Xyzzy Com or the host s exact IP address e g 128 11 200 77 NOTE Do not enter leading zeros in any part of an IP address A leading zero indicates that the value is specified in octal notation In the example above if you had entered 128 011 200 077 the IP address would have been
15. Shortcut CTRL A Shortcut CTRL C Shortcut CTRL V 2 Copy its contents with the Select All command in the Edit menu 3 Create a new file on another host 4 Paste the contents of the original host file into the new host file Copying a Host File to a Local File There is no single command that allows you to create a local copy of a host file You have to use the Copy and Paste commands 1 Select the File menu point to Open and click Host to open the host file 2 Select the text you want to copy If you want to copy everything you can use the Select all command in the Edit menu 3 Copy the text to the Clipboard by using the Copy command in the Edit menu 4 Create or open the local file into which you want to copy the text Paste the contents of the Clipboard by using the Paste command in the Edit menu As Qedit pastes it displays the Paste progress dialog box Pasting 13993 lines from Yancouver MPE to Untitled Paste progress dialog box Converting a File to Qedit Format 150 e Copying amp Printing Files A Qedit workfile is a host file with a special format that is valid only in a Qedit work environment When you edit a Qedit workfile all changes are posted to the host disc drives as soon as you enter them NOTE Ordinary programs cannot read Qedit workfiles directly without modifications While an MPE host has tools available that allow easy access to Qedit workfiles an HP UX host does not For this r
16. The installation program asks for the name of a Program Folder where the Qedit shortcuts should be created You can use the default location or enter your own 8 When the setup program asks you to validate your copy of Qedit enter the Serial Number Verification codes received from Robelle Workstation Installation Make sure you are connected to the file server on which you performed the Network installation To perform a Workstation installation on each PC 1 If you have copied the installation files on the Network server e Click the Start button on the taskbar and select Run e Type in the full program path For example lt drive gt robelle qedit qinstall exe 2 Follow the instructions on the screen 3 When the procedure asks for the type of installation select Workstation A Workstation installation does not copy any files to the local PC It simply adds the necessary program group and icons for the Qedit program on the server Qedit for Windows User Manual Qedit for Windows User Manual 4 When asked specify the directory in which the Network version of Qedit has been installed on the server You do not have to enter the Serial Number Verification codes To start Qedit right after it has been installed simply select would like to launch Qedit for Windows in the last step of the installation Installing the Qedit for Windows Server The Qedit for Windows server is also available for download from Robelle s
17. This means you can select a file by combining the ALT key with corresponding character as in ALT 3 or ALT B The first are numbered from to 9 The next 26 are labeled from A to Z Files 36 through 50 do not have a shortcut character Removing from the Favorites To remove a file from the favorites list 1 Open the file 2 Click on the right mouse button to display the shortcut menu 3 Select Remove from favorites You don t have to find it in the list Since it can appear only once Qedit is able to identify it unambiguously and remove it Qedit for Windows User Manual Qedit Vancouver MPE COBOL4 PUB DEMO Bl File Edit Text Mark View Script Options Window Help peja ala 20 20 20 E 4 0i spell line pic x 1000 re 01i spell linelen pic 3s9 4 comp value 1000 spell word pic x 24 2 X Line 37 Col 7 For help press F1 spell wordlen pic s39 4 comp value 24 Save position of insertion point move to 3 call speLL Properties Copy pathname to clipboard Remove from favorites Run file as host command if not spell stat o perform 98 spell error then call SPELLEND using spell workspace spell model C Nw fg Removing a file from the Favorites Viewing the List of Open Files Shortcut ALT W If you have opened more than one file you can view your list of open files by selecting the Window menu The opened files and
18. example above the cursor is currently in the first column of line number 42 If you select some characters on a single line the coordinates appear as the starting line the column numbers and the number of characters selected AZ K L 23 C26 30 len5 Cursor position with selected text on a single line If you select a block of text that spans multiple lines the coordinates appear as the starting line and column and the ending line and column Starting position B BA X L23 C26 L24 C26 Ending position Cursor position with selected text on multiple lines In this example the selection starts in column 24 of line 33 and ends in column 57 of line 36 If the selection appears on a single line the status bar shows the number of characters selected besides the coordinates Operation in Progress Indicators Depending on the operation in progress Qedit displays progress indicators e g the transmission icon and spinning arrows when appropriate Transmission AA Line 42 Col 1 Spinning arrows Other optional indicators Qedit for Windows User Manual The split box appears as a red tab at the top of vertical scroll bars and on the left of horizontal scroll bars For example the transmission icon indicates the client is waiting for an answer from the server The icon disappears as soon as the information is received Normally you can continue to work while the arrows are yellow Red arrows indicate ther
19. files on HP UX or in the POSIX name space on MPE hosts the name is displayed in the UNIX format starting from the root directory Next Qedit displays the number of lines currently in the file Troubleshooting e 207 Then Qedit displays the maximum line width allowed in the file This corresponds to the Record length parameter in the File Options dialog box Syntax coloring is the name of the language assigned to this file according to the corresponding language template If the file is not associated with a template Qedit displays Unknown For host files only Qedit displays the name of the scratch file used e Local file Document C Robelle Qedit roman8 txt Lines 8 Maximum Width 2045 e MPE host file Document TEST1 PUB DEMO Lines 10 Maximum Width 80 Scratch file QED77264 PUB D CJ MO e HP UX host file Document users demo testl Lines 10 Maximum Width 1000 Scratch file usr tmp qscr CAAa22757 Connection Information The Connection information section is only applicable to host files Qedit displays the same pieces of information whether you are connected to an MPE or HP UX host Qedit displays the Connection details used when you created this connection the connection name the name of the host computer and the login information Next it displays some information about the server It shows the version of the Qedit server program in use followed by the type and version of the operat
20. that points to the file s current location Qedit server will execute commands in the file Qeditmgr Pub Sys which it does for everyone connecting to the host It might be a good idea to use an If command to select your personal preferences This example checks the session name and issues the file equate if the name contains the string george Of course you have to put your session s name in the logon string for that connection If hpsession george then file copylib mylib srcinc acct endif To open a Copylib module specify the name in parentheses For example you can open the vmisc module by specifying it as the file name in the Open Host File dialog box You can get a list of all the modules in the Copylib by entering an at sign in parentheses as the file name Member names are listed in a new document window User Labels on Files The MPE file system stores file characteristics in a special area called file labels These labels are not part of the data and are maintained by the operating system To 186 e Power Tips for Developers Qedit for Windows User Manual extend this feature MPE allows the creation of user labels An application can store additional information about the file or its contents Because user labels are under application control they can be erased or modified The MPE server is able to detect user labels but by default does not preserve them For example if you open such a file a
21. the selection might not be what you want To make this easier the Sortlines script provides the Select columns command All you have to do is 1 Select the columns you want to sort on a single line or make a small rectangular selection with 2 or more lines 2 Select the command on the Script menu The script automatically selects the same columns on all the lines in the file Listing Lines The search feature in Qedit can only find one occurrence at a time That is you can request Qedit to jump to the previous or next occurrence There is no built in function to list all the lines that contain a particular string This feature is implemented using a series of QSL scripts e ListAll qsc Scans only the active document e ListInclude qsc Scans the active document and files referenced in include include include and include statements e ListUse qsc Scans the active document and files referenced in Use statements e ListCopy qsc Scans the active document and files referenced in COBOL Copy statements These scripts are automatically loaded as commands on the Robelle submenu of the Script menu File View Options p MAAE Manage scripts Control panel ListInclude gt Sortlines Regexp in Include Pattern in Include About ListInclude script commands All these scripts offer a number of options You can search for e a simple string e g abcproducts html e a regular
22. you should not rely on the output because it might be incomplete The output log window is not cleared with each command Instead output from successive commands is simply appended at the end If you wish to get rid of previous output text click on the Clear Log Window button Similarly if you wish to capture the contents of the output window click on the Copy button Everything in the log window is then copied to the local clipboard The Progress field displays information on the execution process This is an indication on the amount of CPU resources used on the host The Step field displays information on the progress in a multi step execution such as a command file or script It shows the command that is currently being executed The host command output is displayed in the result window By default the result window only shows one line at a time That s the last line received from the host If there is more than one output line you can expand the result window by clicking on the expansion control which is the red arrowhead to the left of the result window Yancouver MPE x e a Command showjob jab j Progress Step showjob job j JOBNUM STATE IPRI JIN JLIST INTRODUCED JOB NAME J6577 EXEC 105 ARCHIVE WED 6 054 KBLOAD M 76579 EXEC 10S ARCHIVE WED 4 00A MAILJOB 76589 EXEC QUIET 10S LP WED 1 424 dJHTTPD M 76590 EXEC 10R LP WED 1 41A BACKG MA 76597 EXEC 108 ARCHIVE WED 1 42A BACKTRAN 76599 EXEC
23. 1000 spel I inelen s9 4 spel uord x 24 spel I uordl en s9 4 spel hyphen spel uorkspace spel node1 spel status area spel hyphen spel dunny arg spel stat ok 98 spell error spel uorkspace AZ Line 40 Col 7 For help press F1 NUM Sample Cobol source file with syntax coloring Changing an Existing Color Scheme To change an existing color scheme 1 Select Preferences from the Options menu 2 Select Color schemes on the General page 3 Select a color scheme in the list or type its name 4 Select the color box of the corresponding element 5 Select the new color from the color palette 6 Click OK 7 Click Update on the Color customization dialog box 8 Click Cancel to close the dialog box Adding a Color Scheme To create a new color scheme 1 Select Preferences from the Options menu Select Color schemes on the General page If you want to use an existing scheme as the base select it from the list a a Type in the new name replace the existing name if needed Color scheme names can only contain letters numeric digits spaces underscores asterisks pound signs exclamation point dots slashes and commas Select the color box of the element you want to change Select the new color from the color palette Click OK Gen eat oy a Change the necessary elements 124 e Text Formatting Features Qedit for Windows User Manual Qedit for Windows
24. 10s LP WED 6 00A4 KCOXMGR 76612 EXEC 10s LP WED 1 48A JINETD M oil Host command dialog box with expanded result window Interacting with Hosts e 165 166 e Interacting with Hosts The result window turns into a workspace with scroll bars The expansion control changes to a downward pointing arrow You can change the window size at any time You don t have to do it before executing a command To return to a single line window click the expansion control again The result window can hold approximately the last 500 lines Multi Line Execution If you are working on a file that contains host commands you can execute them using the Run as host command command of the Script menu Qedit Vancouver MPE HOSTCMD PUB DEMO lof x Bl File Edit Text Mark View eisg Options Window Help lej x Difco i 4 3 ajej compile un stream jJobl clerk payal build extfile rec 80 run suprtool pub robel Load script Save compiled script extfile Run as host command Host command Manage scripts Control panel Robelle 4 P B X Line 2 Col 1 Run file or selection as host command NUM Run as host command from the Script menu If there is no active selection the whole file is used as a series of host commands If there is an active selection only the selected text is used The host command output is automatically sent to the correspon
25. 30 40 lt lt EIT NOTES FIX NEXT LINE CONTROL NOLIST SCONTROL LIST M SCONTROL NOLIST SCONTROL SUBPROGRAM MAIN ROUTINES ERRORS 5 BEGIN lt lt QLIB SUBROUTINES Purpose This source file contains some of thy a 4 L X Line 7 Col 9 Default tab stops Before you can set a tab stop the ruler bar must be visible To add new tab stops drag the marker to a position on the ruler Click and hold the marker until the mouse pointer becomes an arrowhead Then drag the tab marker to a position on the ruler bar Tab stops apply to the whole file Text Formatting Features e 111 112 e Text Formatting Features Moving or Clearing Tab Stops on the Ruler Before you can move or clear a tab stop the ruler bar must be visible To move a tab stop drag the marker to the new position on the ruler bar To remove a tab stop drag it off the ruler bar NOTE If the Use spaces for tabs document option is enabled changing tab stops does not affect existing lines Because the text does not contain TAB characters anymore the alignment remains the same However if the document option is disabled and there are TAB characters in the text the text will shift as you modify the tab stops Setting Tab Stops in the Properties Dialog Box The other method for setting tab stops is through the Properties dialog box on the Tabs tab You can easily set an individual tab stop or a series of tab stops Properties Ed Options COBX Info
26. CTRL SHIFT along with HOME or END respectively For these combinations to work the current selection must be rectangular already i e selected with CTRL LEFT BUTTON The CTRL SHIFT combination actually extends the selection in the requested direction Undoing and Redoing ola Undo and Redo tools Qedit for Windows User Manual The Redo and Undo commands which are available on the Edit menu repeat or cancel the last modification You cannot undo or redo changes out of order If you have performed a number of operations the Redo and Undo commands apply only to the last one When you have multiple files open Qedit maintains a separate undo transaction log for each file If you cut and paste from one edit window to another these are treated as independent transactions That is canceling the paste command into window A does not ensure that the corresponding cut command from window B is undone As a result the cut text could be lost Typing Selecting amp Editing Text e 103 The descriptions in the Undo and Redo commands on the Edit menu change according to the last transaction At the start of a session the Undo and Redo commands are not available menu shows Can t undo and Can t redo because there have been no previous transactions As you change the file the description of the last operation is posted to the menu For example if you enter text in a couple of different places then undo the last operation the Edit menu will
27. Formatting Features on page 120 To change the Directory font see Changing the Directory Font on page 108 Length of Recent Files or Favorites lists see Opening MRU Most Recently Used Files on page 74 and Maintaining and Using a List of Favorites on page 81 Load local files smaller than K into memory see Customizing Opening a File on page 85 Mousewheel Acceleration slider see Using the Intelligent Mouse on page 136 Move caret when navigating see Controlling the Insertion Point Movements on page 88 Use live scrolling for server files see Scrolling Method for Host Files on page 144 User Script Directory see Script Libraries on page 172 User Language Directory see Language Templates on page 11 Word selection includes trailing spaces on double click see Selecting Text with a Mouse on page 40 Qedit for Windows User Manual The Searching Tab Qedit Preferences TT lt 1 lt 1 51 Search settings in the Qedit Preferences dialog box For a description of the options on the Searching tab go to the following sections e To set Searching preferences Search entire file Ignore case and Smart search see Customizing Your Search Options on page 143 e To set Automatically save position on search see Customizing Your Search Options on page 143 Qedit for Windows User Manual Getting Started e 15 The Defaults Tab Qedit Preferences Defaults settings
28. Formatting Features e 107 Bold Italics and 108 e Text Formaiting Features Font HES Font style Size ES Js Courier New 12 Cancel DigitMed 15 DigitSmall DigtalF ont Fixedsys F Lucida Console H a Sample AaBbYyZz Script Westem v Font selection dialog box For information on setting the default font for files see Setting the Default Font for Document Windows on page 121 Changing the Directory Font Qedit allows you to change the font in which the host directory list is displayed To change the directory font 1 Select Preferences from the Options menu 2 When the Qedit Preferences dialog box appears click Directory Font 3 When the Font dialog box appears select the Font the Font style and the Size If you want to apply a font size that is not available in the list you can type a custom size in the text box Underline Qedit for Windows cannot apply bold italic or underline to a document because it is a programmer s editor not a word processor Programming tools do not understand enhanced text with bold and fonts They work only with plain ASCII files The directory listings in Qedit however can be set to bold italic and underline These attributes can be changed in the Font dialog box See Changing the Directory Font above Qedit for Windows User Manual Ruler Bar The ruler bar is a line at the top of a document window that is used to set tab stops Tab
29. HP UX keystrokes burned into them As much as possible a local file looks and acts like an MPE file which looks and acts like a UNIX file There are however a couple of areas where the flavor of the host based Qedit slips into Qedit for Windows Internet Friendly The client server design works equally well on Internet connections People working at home can connect their PCs to the Internet through a public Internet Service Provider and from the Internet to the company LANs However it might be necessary to reprogram a firewall to allow the Qedit for Windows connections from the external Internet to the internal LAN The design of the Qedit for Windows protocol makes fast response editing possible even over very slow network connections Host Based Qedit vs Qedit for Windows There are features of regular host based Qedit which are not yet available in Qedit for Windows Although we are implementing the most popular features as fast as possible the dedicated Qedit host user will still occasionally need to switch to a terminal window and run regular Qedit Qedit for Windows User Manual Welcome to Qedit for Windows e 3 Getting Help This user manual is also available in Windows Help format You can display Help information by using the Contents command of the Help menu or by pressing F1 All dialog boxes include a Help button which can display context sensitive information i e it takes you directly to the section that discusse
30. If you want to include comments in COBOL select COBX in the Language list Local files can have a length between one and 8 172 characters per line e Language The Language list allows you to choose from a number of different programming languages and their file types Each language has different characteristics with the Record length being the most evident The Language setting also affects the way Qedit searches with the Smart Search option and what gets selected when you double click a word Qedit supports the host defined rules for searching e Set Font To access the font settings click Set Font When the Font dialog box appears select the Font the Font style and the Size from the list boxes If you want a font size that is not available in the list you can type a custom size in the text box e Set Color To change the color settings click Set Color When the Color customization dialog box appears select the color scheme and if you like change individual color elements For detailed instruction see Setting the Default Color Scheme on page 121 e Use spaces for tabs Qedit for Windows User Manual Qedit for Windows User Manual When enabled Qedit for Windows replaces horizontal tab characters in the file with the appropriate number of spaces For HP e3000 host files the Use spaces for tabs option is enabled as the default For HP UX hosts and local PC files this option is disabled as the default Display detabb
31. Insert column 102 Insert mode 90 Insertion point 31 141 148 prevent sliding 148 undefined area 148 Install 7 HP UX server 220 Network 8 Server 9 Typical 7 Workstation 8 Intelligent mouse 140 International characters 51 94 Internet Explorer 79 Internet resources 4 Invisible characters 121 default 125 IP address 55 193 215 20 222 232 ISO8859 56 268 e Index K Keepalive transaction 194 Keyboard 90 96 141 204 non english 94 L Language 64 66 location 12 Language code syntax coloring 123 length exceeded 82 LF terminator 68 Line length 64 66 maximum 137 Line number 67 145 46 host 131 line number out of 83 Line termination 68 default 137 LineFeed terminator 68 List include 180 List all lines 180 Listfile 73 Load scripts 177 Local clipboard 98 Local file 154 closing 164 creating 31 64 opening 77 operation 225 saving 163 Local trace 208 Log file server 212 217 218 220 231 270 Login dialog 222 Logon UDC 20 172 Long file name 49 52 Macintosh files 68 Manage Scripts dialog 177 Manuals 11 Mark a position 141 Maximum length 81 Menu 45 application control 23 Edit 52 65 98 100 108 146 154 File 33 54 59 61 63 64 80 108 152 155 164 188 210 232 Mark 145 146 Options 13 54 58 60 61 216 218 219 221 Qedit for Windows User Manual shortcut 46 View 26 30 49 50 Window 87 185 window control 32 40 Menu bar 24 45 Messages 31 Metacharacter 251 Most recent file
32. J Shift listing four columns Help Cancel Print on Host dialog box When the Print on Host dialog box appears you can specify the print options for the host printer e Host Device Name Choose the destination host printer in this text box The syntax for the device name is specific to the host you are connected to Look at Changing the Default Printer in MPE below for other ways to print to a host printer e All or Selection By default Qedit prints the complete file However if you have highlighted some text Qedit will print only the selected lines You can override this by enabling the All option e Print host line numbers You can print the host line numbers along with the text by selecting this option e Shift listing four columns You can change the amount of room in the left margin by using this option to shift four columns to the right Changing the Default Printer in MPE Qedit allows you to send output to a printer connected to the host computer On MPE the default device class is LP If you want to send your output to a different device you need to enter a file equation in the server configuration file if Qedservmode lt gt 0 then file lp dev serverlp endif Qedit for Windows User Manual Copying amp Printing Files e 155 Printing on a Host Printer Instead of using the Print command in the File menu you can click and hold the Print button to display a shortcut menu from which you can s
33. MMM appears as a 3 letter abbreviation all uppercase In the formats with the 2 character month MM the information is all numeric CC represents the century YY represents the year MM represents the month and DD represents the date To control whether Qedit will show or hide the new tag in your document window simply enable or disable the Display tags option This option only controls the display It does not affect the way lines are updated Basically if a tag value is defined in Date Prefix or Suffix modified lines are tagged even if you don t see the results on the screen To save the new settings and close the dialog box click OK To save the new settings without closing the dialog box click Apply The Apply button is useful when you want to continue working in the Properties dialog box Qedit for Windows User Manual Line Length Line Termination Qedit for Windows User Manual If the new tag exceeds the maximum length 8 characters Qedit will display an error message when you select Apply or OK COBOL Tags Automatic vs Manual COBOL tags can be updated automatically or entered manually but these options are mutually exclusive The rules are fairly simple If you have defined a tag value Qedit assumes you want to use the automatic update feature Whether tags are displayed or hidden does not have any effect If you have not defined a tag value Qedit assumes you want to be able to manually modify lines Of cour
34. On Change or OZMODIFY commands in host based Qedit Qedit for Windows User Manual When you change to overwrite mode the cursor becomes a blinking rectangle or block In this mode the text you type overwrites the existing text This is equivalent to deleting the existing text and replacing it with new text In overwrite mode the BACKSPACE key does not remove characters as it moves to the left it becomes equivalent to using the LEFT ARROW key For overwrite mode OVR appears in the status bar of the application window For Help press F1 CAP NUM SCRL OVR 4 Overwrite mode Toggle keys status while in overwrite mode Inserting Special Characters Qedit for Window s flexibility with typing text and inserting special characters gives you the ability to address an international audience insert control characters and add regular text all in the same file Typing Text If you open a new document you can start typing at the top of the file If you want to insert text into an existing document you can select the insertion point for the new text To type text into an existing document 1 If you do not want to overwrite the existing text make sure you are in insert mode See Insert Mode vs Overwrite Mode on page 88 2 Position the insertion point where you want to begin typing 3 Enter the text you want to add In a new document use Save as to assign it a file name Otherwise use the Save command to sav
35. Qedit for Windows can access several files at once In fact the maximum number is only limited by the amount of Windows resources you have available These can be a mix of local files and remote files new files and existing files text files data files and Qedit workfiles Each host connection is also capable of opening several files on that host Speed Speed and More Speed Do you work over a slow modem Is your local area network clogged with Web traffic Don t worry about Qedit for Windows it makes minimal demands on your network When editing a host file searches are actually done on the server not the client You can quickly search through enormous files because Qedit does not download the entire file to your PC only the portions in which a match is found Speed is one of Qedit s main advantages Faster access and faster processing means that you can accomplish more every day Highly Scaleable No matter what grows your file size the number of users the traffic on a network or the geographical area of users Qedit s performance does not deteriorate It has the flexibility to adjust to any situation With Qedit the tasks you do today do not limit your future capabilities Whether your procedures are simple or complex you can count on Qedit s ability to adapt to your needs 2 e Welcome to Qedit for Windows Qedit for Windows User Manual Fully Integrated with Windows Qedit for Windows is a true Windows product that
36. RPM returns a generic error message It does not provide any hints as to the cause If the login information is complete RPM initiates a new programmatic session on the HP e3000 These sessions however are not identical to interactive sessions initiated on terminals RPM sessions do not count against the system s user license and logon UDCs are not executed If you are using Security 3000 from VESOFT and you want to implement the same level of security for network logons you need to run a job called Backg at all times Please refer to Security 3000 s documentation for more details Qedit for Windows works with Security 3000 as long as you are using passwords for job names users accounts and or groups Dynamic password prompting is not supported You cannot send messages using MPE s Tell command either FTP s implementation on MPE also uses RPM as a login mechanism If you have difficulty connecting with Qedit for Windows you should try to establish an ftp connection If the same problem occurs with ftp you should focus your attention on the HP3000 security settings If ftp works the problem lies between the Qedit client and server Qedit tries to determine the PC s IP address The method used is the same as the standard method on UNIX It relies on calling routines named gethostname and gethostbyname in order to translate the PC node name to a number Troubleshooting e 211 If you are using a trial version the MPE Server
37. Robelle Web Robelle Web Robelle Web Site Robelle Web What s New Robelle Web Scripting Robelle Web E Mail Technical Support and About Qedit Tip of the Day Prompts the Tip of the Day dialog box Contents Accesses the application on line help though the Help Topics dialog box Using Help Accesses information about using on line help Reference e 199 200 e Reference Robelle Web Provides easy access to Robelle resources over the Internet Robelle Web Robelle Web Site Invokes the default Web browser and connects to Robelle s main page Robelle Web What s New Invokes the default Web browser and connects to the Qedit for Windows What s New page Robelle Web Scripting Invokes the default Web browser and connects to the Qedit for Windows Scripting page Robelle Web E mail Technical Support Allows you send an e mail message to Robelle s technical support staff support robelle com About Qedit Prompts the About Qedit for Windows dialog box Key Combinations and Functions Control Combination Keys To Move Up in a file in the same line and column line by line Down in a file in the same line and column line by line To the preceding start of word To the next following start of word To the first column of the first line in a file To the last character in the last line of a file One page up in a document window less one line One page down in a
38. Simply enter the desired number of files in the Length of Recent Files or Favorites lists You can enter a value between 5 and 50 When the filelists are displayed a shortcut character is assigned to the first 35 files This means you can select a file by combining the ALT key with corresponding character as in ALT 3 or ALT B The first are numbered from 1 to 9 The next 26 are labeled from A to Z Files 36 through 50 do not have a shortcut character When you open a file Qedit always applies the saved document specific attributes from its document database no matter how the file is opened You do not have to use the Recent files command to take advantage of this feature Opening a Local File Qedit can open local files including text and HTML files To open a local file on your PC or on a networked drive 1 Select the File menu point to Local and click Open 2 When the Open dialog box appears it provides the following options e File name e Files of type By default Qedit displays all files and folders available in the current directory You can reduce the number of files by selecting one of the filters available in the Files of type list box The default is All files Click the list box to display available filters and select one Note that the filters do not apply to folders in the directory Only files are filtered Creating amp Opening Files e 75 76 e Creating amp Opening Files Look in A Windows g f
39. There are no pre release versions at this point Qedit for Windows User Manual Appendix A Earlier Highlights e 229 Appendix B File Types File Codes and Mnemonics The Directory dialog box can display a file type when working with an MPE host The file types are short mnemonics that are somewhat easier to understand than numbers The following table shows the MPE file codes the mnemonic associated with each code and a short description of the type The information in the table is based on a list of known codes graciously provided by Stan Sieler of Allegro Consultants Inc MPE already uses mnemonics to identify file types These standard mnemonics appear in uppercase in the table MPE allows user defined file codes Different mnemonics have been assigned to these codes These mnemonics appear with mixed case or all lowercase characters Fie code wnemonte Jusa S S S S Y 599 oar ori nackape dike 91 fave DBCORE dts emiro Qedit for Windows User Manual Appendix B File Types e 231 232 e Appendix B File Types TurboIMAGE TPU data file TurboIMAGE TPI root file aise S o 99 ii eose 432 dx432 DataExpress reserved Qedit for Windows User Manual Qedit for Windows User Manual ognos i i 643 C QTP compiled run file 645 Cognos 3 02 or 4 00 QKGO execution time parameters file 647 Cognos portable subfile minidictionary 648 Cognos portable subfile datafile 649 Cognos interim minidiction
40. Tiles To tile documents horizontally use ALT W followed by H Currently opened windows will be arranged to use the width of the application workspace The windows will then appear one on top of the other To tile documents vertically use ALT W followed by V Currently opened windows will be arranged to use the height of the application workspace The windows will then appear side by side You can quickly switch between files by moving your mouse to another document See also Tiling Document Windows on page 182 Closing a Window This is a standard Windows 95 function In the upper right corner of most windows there is an X button which closes the window With earlier versions of Windows you click the window control button with the straight line bar in the upper left corner then select Close from the resulting menu Mouse Operations 38 e A Windows Primer Almost all computers have a graphical pointing device which can be a pen a mouse a trackball or a stylus Pointing devices normally have buttons on or close to them If a device has multiple buttons usually one is identified as the primary button Qedit for Windows User Manual Qedit for Windows User Manual The pointing device for Qedit for Windows is a mouse which mostly behaves the same as mouse devices in other Windows applications Qedit does however have two special mouse operations dragging the split box on the scroll bar to split a window see Splitting
41. TimeZone S i ee ae e ade seas ees aeaa aa E t aoe ee eeoa es aed Eae es 221 Document Database Recovery oo aeee aaar aee a EE REN e a e NE S ip Sea E sion 225 Err r Messa S e aae pee ee EEE E E EE EEEE EE NEE E OE EEES 226 Appendix A Earlier Highlights 229 COVELVICW E E EE TE 229 Appendix B File Types 231 File Codes and Mnemonics ccesccssesssssecseesscsecseceecueeeesseeeessecseesecneeseesaeeeesaecaeesesnestenaeenss 231 Appendix C Regular Expressions 243 What Are Regular Expressions csssesssecssesecseesecssececsecseesecneeeecsaeceessecaeeseesecaeeseeneeseeeas 243 Metacharacte ts acesi esensi i euii e ts cuxeuses EE EE VEe DEEE E E DEERE NEEN RSN 243 Anchor Characters vii sieeve ty svt ote E E E e ae E a ces 244 Match Any Character soiscscsccvsstssssvcssiastesssocssvissiessessteassyestiisvesssasveusssevssbessoveeusisbectaces 244 Optional Character ss sce icelies cepted ea na e a ep aee pee aap epee 245 Repeating Characters ns terne cscs oee aeaea ieee ees eaei E EESE ESE en 245 Character Clas Sai aeree acing E E E E E o E E EEE TEASEE ON 245 Negated Character Class irren cali R E E RIS 246 Repeating Character Classis iiien a o a TE EEE E Ea 246 Bscape Characters asninn tonis e a EEE E E a EE EE du deel a E E SSS 246 Escaped Sequences in Regular Expressions csssecssesseesecseesecseeeceaeceeeseceecaeesecneeeenaeeees 247 viii e Contents Qedit for Windows User Manual Backreferences in Regular Expression
42. Trace When trying to establish a connection Qedit for Windows needs to resolve the host name or IP address you entered in the Connection List dialog box If there is a Domain Name Server DNS configured on your PC a host name is automatically converted to its corresponding IP address Most PCs come with a program called ping which can test connections to other machines on the network You can use it to make sure the DNS is configured correctly and the host name can be reached from your location If you cannot use the host name you can also try the exact IP address if you know it When you start a new Qedit for Windows session there is no connection unless one or more connections are configured with the Login at startup option Upon opening the first file Qedit for Windows must establish a link to the host It tries to open a connection on port number 7395 The main server program should be listening on that port whose number has been reserved for Qedit s sole use You can check the configured value by using the Server command in the Options menu Remember that the port number must match the number used by the server process on the host Configure Server Settings x m MPE Server Settings MPE Server Name PUB Qeditmgr Hep V Group Geditmar Cancel HP UX Port Number 7395 Connection Template c windows conntmpl dat Configure Server Settings dialog box You can use the telnet command with the host name
43. UX Host Connection If you select the UNIX option your HP 9000 host must run the HP UX operating system a flavor of UNIX Connection List x Connection Name Host name TY Type ia Character Set HP Romans Default colors Default z Login T Login at startup Password Prompt Initial Directory int Emaye Help Cancel Connection List dialog box for UNIX hosts e Login This is a single user name It determines your home directory and which files you have permission to browse and edit on the host system Remember that both UNIX user names and passwords are case sensitive Connecting to a Host or Network e 55 Password You can enter only one password because Qedit does not support multilevel passwords If your UNIX system uses multilevel passwords contact Robelle for assistance Initial Directory This text box defines the non home directory that Qedit will open when you start the program The directory you specify in this box will continue to be associated with your user name until you change it If you leave this text box blank Qedit will put you in your home directory when you start the program Although the user ID is used to log on Qedit changes to the initial directory as soon as the connection is established by performing a cd command relative to the root directory not to the user s home directory For example if you want to automatically go to users demo public_html you can
44. User Manual 9 If the name did not exist the Update button on the Color customization dialog box becomes Add Click it to finalize the new scheme 10 Click Cancel to close the dialog box Removing a Color Scheme To remove an existing color scheme 1 A gs Select Preferences from the Options menu Select Color schemes on the General page Select the color scheme from the list or type it Click Delete to remove it Click Cancel to close the dialog box Default Colors Hierarchy Default colors can be set at different levels 1 3 4 Global default Defined from the General page of the Preferences dialog box Host type defaults Defined from the UNIX MPE and Local pages of the Preferences dialog box Connection default Defined from the Connection List dialog box File colors Defined from the Options page of the Properties dialog box Colors defined at lower levels always override colors defined at previous levels For example if you have defined host type defaults these will be used even if a global default has been set Similarly file colors are always used no matter what has been defined for the corresponding connection host type or globally Text Formatting Features e 125 Line Features Overview Qedit s many line features can be applied to an array of situations Using line numbers and record numbers you can quickly navigate through files Display COBOL tags when you need to see them defi
45. You can also select multiple files and open them all at once Qedit uses Windows standard way to select multiple items There is a limit to the number of files that can be opened in a single operation The limit is not the number of files but rather the number of characters that make up all these file names plus the drive letter the current working directory and name delimiters All these cannot add up to more than 2 048 characters If you exceed this limit Qedit displays an error message after you press the Open button Qedit for Windows User Manual a Internet Explorer Edit tool Shortcut CTRL SHIFT O Toolbar kail Qedit for Windows User Manual Opening an HTML File In recent versions of Microsoft Internet Explorer you can edit the Web document that you are currently viewing By default when Internet Explorer opens an HTML file it runs Notepad or Wordpad depending on the size of the document To change the default editor for an HTML file to Qedit 1 Start Windows Explorer not Internet Explorer 2 Select the Options command in the View menu 3 Select the File Types tab 4 Find Internet Document HTML or Microsoft HTML Document 4 0 in the Registered file types list The actual wording can be a little bit different Just make sure the file extensions are HTM and HTML 5 Select Edit in the Actions list If it is not there select New 6 Inthe Application used to perform action text box enter the fully qualif
46. a String To replace all occurrences of a string in a file select the Replace command in the Edit menu When the Replace dialog box appears enable the Entire File option in the Range box In this case Qedit finds all occurrences of the Search for string defined by the terms of your search and replace them with the new string in the Replace with text box Replacing a String Based on Pattern Matching You can use the Match Pattern option to search for generic strings Although this can be powerful it can also be dangerous Let s say there is a file with the following sentence Start walking and you will get home in the end You can enter Start end in the Search for text box and Wrong Way in the Replace with text box enable Match Pattern and select Replace Qedit will search for a line that has the words Start and End anywhere with any number of characters before in between or after Qedit then puts the replacement string starting on the position of the S in Start all the way to the d in End In this example the whole sentence gets replaced with Wrong Way Replacing a String Using Regular Expressions Just as a pattern match can be used in a Replace operation you can also use regular expressions Qedit replaces the whole string matching the regular expression Regular expressions offer additional functionality in the replacement string The feature is known as backreference substitution T
47. a string and replaces it Column Provides access to column edit commands Column Delete Removes text from one or more columns Optionally replace the text with spaces Column Insert Inserts text in a specific column Column Shift Shifts text in certain columns left or right Text Menu Detab Replaces tab characters with appropriate number of spaces Entab Replaces spaces with tab characters where appropriate Shift left Shifts the line left to the previous tab stop Qedit for Windows User Manual Qedit for Windows User Manual Shift right Shifts the line right to the next tab stop Mark Menu The Mark menu on the toolbar contains the following commands Save position Go to previous position Exchange position and Goto line Save position Marks up to ten positions in a file so that you can return to each of them Go to previous position Returns to markers in Last In First Out order Exchange position Switches your current position with your last marked position You can then return to the original position Goto line Move to a line in a file View Menu The View menu on the toolbar contains the following commands Ruler bar Record numbers Toolbar Status bar and Show invisibles Ruler bar Displays a horizontal ruler for tabs and guidelines Record numbers Displays record numbers in a file Toolbar Displays the Qedit toolbar Status Bar Displays the status
48. access it quickly To open a saved connection 1 Select the File menu point to New and click Host You will see this dialog box New Host File Ed Connection Aaa Create prodmpe Record length 256 Language Text x usp conc _ New Host File dialog box 2 Select a connection from the Connection list which is sorted alphabetically That means MPE and UNIX connections are interspersed If you want to create new connections once you start opening a file use the Create button 3 Click the New button to open a new empty scratch file on the designated connection 4 If you have configured this connection to prompt for a password Qedit displays a dialog box with the Login or Hello string and the Host name as well as the number of text boxes required to enter all the passwords you requested Enter all the passwords and click OK Enter Passwords Ed clerk user payables on prodsys Session password woo ceo Password prompting dialog box Once you have entered the passwords you will see a series of progress messages followed by a new document window labeled Untitled 1 If there are problems with the connection first check your spelling and punctuation It is also possible that the problem is at the host end the wrong version of Qedit networking not enabled backup in progress etc See the section on troubleshooting Qedit for Windows User Manual Connecting to a Host or Network e 57 MPE
49. all lines will have the same length except for the last one which might shorter This would happen if the total size of the file is not evenly divisible by the specified length You can specify a maximum line length on a file that contains Newline delimiters In this case lines that are shorter than the specified length will remain the same Lines that are longer than the specified length will be Creating amp Opening Files e 79 80 e Creating amp Opening Files broken up in pieces If the existing line is not evenly divisible by the specified length the last part of the line might create a line shorter than the specified length The file is going to be saved with the Do not write Newline delimiters option enabled whether the original file contained Newline delimiters or not 3 Click the Open button to open the file on the host Qedit will use your existing connection if you have one Otherwise it will establish a new connection Opening Files with Binary Data Qedit can edit files that contain text information It can also edit a binary file although Qedit will likely corrupt these files so badly that you might not be able to touch them with the application that created them That is the case for documents created by word processing applications such as Microsoft Word Qedit can open these files and display their contents as best it can The document window however will probably contain all kinds of garbage characters that wil
50. and is normally available on the host via the command interpreter CI on MPE or the shell on UNIX You will not be able to do anything else in Qedit for Windows until Qedit for Windows User Manual Clear log window Eg Eo log window Qedit for Windows User Manual the command has terminated The Command list box keeps track of the last five commands If you want to interrupt a command click the Stop control button The button is red only when a host command is currently being executed If there is no command the button is grey You might want to interrupt a command if it is taking too long to execute if it transmits too much information back or if the command is interactive i e prompts the user for information In the latter case Qedit s behavior is unpredictable Typically Qedit simply waits for more command output If the Stop button does not seem to work the only other option is to close the connection using the Disconnect command of the File menu Although an interrupt signal is sent to the host new output lines might still be added to the result window That s because the server has to interpret the signal and then try to stop the executing command Although this is fairly fast the host command still has enough time to generate more output In addition to this output lines might already be in transmission buffers Qedit has to empty these buffers even though the host command has already terminated If you interrupt a command
51. and port number to make sure the main server is running Just type telnet hostname 7395 If you get the following message the server is not running at all or is using a different port number Trying telnet Unable to connect to remote host Connection refused Qedit for Windows User Manual If you are using a trial version the MPE Server Name should be Qedit Pubtri Robelle Qedit for Windows User Manual 10 However if you get a dialog box similar to this and you press the carriage return key a few times there is a very good chance the main server is active Trying Connected to prodmpe robelle com Escape character is lt cr gt lt cr gt 07B lt cr gt lt cr gt A lt cr gt Connection closed by foreign host The local node name must be configured correctly on the host The node name must appear in the Local HP 3000 Node Name field on the Config entry screen and also in the Local Domain Name field on the NS Configuration screen You must be able to run the NMMGR network configuration program on the HP e3000 to check and modify these values Qedit sends the login information Jobname User Account Group and passwords if any The client socket number is also passed in the transaction The main server gathers the connection information and invokes RPM RPM takes over from that point RPM validates this information and returns a confirmation message If there is an error RPM returns a generic
52. are added to the MRU list which is available through the Recent files command in the File menu e Wildcards Because the File name and Wildcards text boxes are also in the Directory dialog box read Host Directories on page 68 for general information For more host specific details read Notation in Host Operating Systems on page 67 for the corresponding host UNIX MPE with POSIX and MPE These sections describe how to use the text boxes Qedit for Windows User Manual Qedit for Windows User Manual along with the Directory button to quickly switch to other directories and groups and to select only the files that you want Directory If you don t want to type or you can t remember the spelling of the directory or file there is another way to find a file Just click the Directory button This will give you a list of files in the current directory and access to other directories on the host For more details see Host Directories on page 68 If you find the file through the Directory dialog box you can open it from there Read only Sometimes you know that you just want to look at a file but you don t want to modify it In this case it is better to enable Read only ALT Y before you open it which will protect you from making any accidental changes This option is also useful if someone else is editing the file you want to view The Read only option is available in the Open Host File and Directory dialog b
53. are at GMT 1 and Athens is at GMT 2 For a map showing the whole thing go to this Web site http wwwcerasys anu edu au reference world timezones html If all network timestamps are in GMT how does your computer tell you the actual local time when something happened Qedit for Windows User Manual Troubleshooting e 221 222 e Troubleshooting Does each computer have to know what time zone it is in This is done by setting a TZ variable on the host computer UNIX does this automatically when it boots up although it can still be wrong while MPE must do it manually for each user Consider this recent case and try to figure out what went wrong A file called Quality in a home group on an MPE system in Western Canada looked like this listf quality 3 NUM LABELS 2 CREATED FRI AUG 6 1993 9 26 AM MAX LABELS 2 MODIFIED SAT SEP 20 1997 8 08 AM DISC DEV 1 ACCESSED SAT SEP 20 1997 8 08 AM But in Anguilla in the Caribbean which is 3 hours ahead of Vancouver at this time of year the modification time in a Qedit directory box should have been 11 08 A M When the modify time was checked by running Qedit and opening the group listing it showed 4 08 P M on the same day The difference was four hours The value of the TZ variable was checked on the Vancouver machine showvar TZ TZ PST8 PST means Pacific Standard Time GMT 8 which can be checked in the main pag
54. are not going to use a selected string after a Find operation Selecting with a Find Operation Just as in other Windows editors Qedit also highlights text when it performs a successful Find operation This not only makes it easy to see where the text was found but it makes it easy to change or delete the selected text Perhaps too easy If you type a character or press the DELETE or BACKSPACE key after a successful Find operation you can accidentally delete or modify the selected text Copying Moving and Pasting Text The Clipboard The Clipboard is a conceptual entity that can be used for temporary storage a place where you can save lines of text a picture or some sound then use it again later Just as in other Windows program you cannot append to Qedit s Clipboard That means the contents of the Clipboard are erased as soon you copy something new to it You can use the Clipboard to copy text to a Qedit document or to another application The Clipboard is closed when you shut down your system You can cut or copy to and paste from the Clipboard If you have already used Cut Copy or Paste in Notepad or Microsoft Word you will not have any trouble with the Qedit Clipboard It works the same way except for only one difference the Clipboard might not actually reside on your PC when you edit a file on a host system When you cut or copy from a host file to the Clipboard Qedit does not transfer this data to the PC unless you pa
55. as move or copy them across platforms see Copying amp Printing Files on page 147 Switching and Tiling Files Qedit for Windows User Manual With access to multiple document windows you can easily switch between different Qedit files or you can switch to another application See Switching Between Applications on page 37 For example you can have source code in one window and its data in another Or compare the shell script that is working properly on one host with the same script that is failing on another host Qedit lets you work and maneuver through all your files uninterrupted Compare different parts of the same file by splitting a document window into multiple views See Splitting a Document into Independent Views on page 35 And if you want to look at different files side by side simply tile all your open files or only those you need Switching Between Files To switch between files use CTRL TAB Every time you press TAB as you hold the CTRL key you will switch to the next open file Or switch to the file you want by choosing one from the Window menu where all open files are listed in numbered order e g ALT W 1 takes you to the first file Power Tips for Developers e 181 182 e Power Tips for Developers Tiling Document Windows Tile two documents horizontally by typing ALT W H This will put currently opened windows one on top of the other You will now see something like the picture below Qedit
56. at which you want the text to appear The specified string is inserted and text to the right of the column is shifted If there is not enough room on the line to accommodate the new string an error is reported and the operation is stopped If you do not have an active selection the modification is applied to the whole file as indicated by the Entire file option If you have selected some text the Selection only option is enabled and the operation is applied only to the selected text Shifting Text in Columns Shortcut ALT E O S If you want to shift text left or right use the Shift command of the Column submenu When shifting lines to the right assuming the Use spaces for tabs option is disabled a tab character is inserted at the tab stop to the left of the first nonblank character on the line This is to preserve the tab stop relative alignment of lines that do not start on a tab boundary If Use spaces for tabs is enabled spaces instead of a tab character are inserted at this location Shift Columns x Number of columns Left C Right Selection only Entire file Help Cancel Shift Columns dialog box In the Number of columns text box specify the number of columns by which you want to shift the text Select Left if you want to shift the text in that direction which is similar to deleting a number of spaces at the beginning of a line Select Right to 100 o Typing Selecting amp Editing Text Qedit for Windows Us
57. can be used as a range indicator It is a character class metacharacter Simply specify the first and last characters in the range Numeric digits could then be coded as 0 9 Lowercase letters could be coded as a z You can also combine ranges with single values as in abc 0 9a z The hyphen is interpreted as a range indicator only if it is between two other characters If it is the first or last character in the class it is used as a literal Negated Character Class The caret takes on a different meaning inside a character class It used as a literal anywhere in the class except if it is listed first When entered immediately after the left square bracket it negates the whole class This means a match is found if the text does not contain any of the characters in the class p 246 Je Matches p2e p e and so on pl 246 e Matches pae p3e and others In the last example the caret negates the 2 4 and 6 The regexp is true if the text starts with the letter p and ends with the letter e and there is a single character between them that is not 2 4 and 6 Repeating Character Class Because a character class is interpreted as a single character you can use the optional metacharacter question mark and quantifier metacharacters asterisk and plus sign to further qualify a character class For example if we wanted to allow one or more numeric digits after the abc string we could use the following regexp abc 0 9 Esca
58. caret returned you have to use the Save position command again Exchanging Current Position with Last Marker To return to the last marker without losing your current position you can use the Exchange position command in the Mark menu This switches your insertion point with the last saved marker as if you had used Save position and Go to previous position simultaneously Searching amp Replacing Features e 137 Using the Last Marker to Select Text Shortcut Shift F12 Use the Select to Saved Position command to quickly select text between the insertion point and the position of the last marker Find the start of the block and save the position with the Save Position F11 command Find the end of the block anyway you like scroll jump search and use Select to Saved Position Qedit automatically selects the text between the insertion point and the last marker Defining the Terms of a Search Qedit for Windows provides you with a range of terms to search within a file pattern matching with substitution characters case sensitive matching searching whole or partial words The search functions are as consistent with Windows as possible but there are some which derive from the experience of Qedit on the host e g pattern matching If you don t have access to the host based programs Qedit for HP e3000 or Qedit for HP UX review the corresponding documentation for more details You can change the default settings of the search opt
59. columns With this setting you can move the insertion point to the tag area and start typing If the cursor is in the tag area Qedit automatically switches to overwrite mode On the other hand if you want Qedit to put a tag on all modified and new lines use Qedit for Windows User Manual Qedit for Windows User Manual set x lt string gt lt date gt There are many different ways to define the tag value You can use a character string the host system date in various formats or combine a character string with the system date Please refer to the Set X command in the host based Qedit user manual for details If you have defined a tag value Qedit automatically inserts it on modified lines whether you see the tag area or not In the example used previously the tag would contain the letters ME followed by the host system date in YYMMDD format For example on December 31 1977 the value would have been ME771231 The tag area is then under Qedit s total control and you will not be able to manually change anything in it If you try to modify a tag you will get an error message Qedit IN The COBOL tag area for this file may not be changed COBOL tag modification error COBOL Tags in the Client If you want to customize your COBOL file you can also change the settings of the COBOL tags in the client These settings override the tag settings in the server configuration files Setting COBOL Tags in the Client
60. created You can use the default location or enter your own 6 To validate your copy of Qedit enter the Serial Number Verification codes received from Robelle 7 To start Qedit right after it has been installed simply select would like to launch Qedit for Windows in the last step of the installation Installing Qedit on Networked PCs On PCs connected to a file server you need to perform a two part installation process First you have to perform a Network installation on the file server Then on each PC connected to the network you have to perform a Workstation installation To upgrade to a new version of Qedit however you only need to repeat the Network installation PCs connected to the network will automatically run the new version Although this two part process is a little more time consuming when Qedit is first installed it saves much more time with subsequent upgrades Network Installation To perform a Network installation on the file server 1 Log on to the file server either directly or through a PC with proper access Copy the self extracting executable to the file server Start the installation program qinstall exe Follow the instructions on the screen When you are asked for the type of installation select Network DAA FR wh Next specify the destination drive and directory on which you want to install Qedit on the Network server Make sure this directory is on a path accessible to other Qedit users 7
61. document window This area should be empty Qedit for Windows User Manual Qedit for Windows User Manual e Caret Blinking insertion point vertical or horizontal when there is no text selected e Attention highlight Brief visual signal to get the user s attention For example the corresponding opening parenthesis when typing a closing parenthesis e Comments Various types of comments defined for the file s language see Appendix D Language Templates on page 251 e Quotes Text enclosed in quote characters defined for the file s language see Appendix D Language Templates on page 251 e Keywords Language reserved words see Appendix D Language Templates on page 251 To select a new color click the corresponding color box You will see another dialog box with a color palette Color Basic colors Custom colors ii i i i i gg Hue 160 Red 0 Be eee m e Define Custom Eolas gt gt Color Lum fi 20 Blue 255 Cancel Add to Custom Colors Color palette dialog box Select the color that you want and click OK The color palette shown above could be different on your system because color is based on your current display settings Here is how a sample Cobol source program is displayed with syntax coloring Text Formatting Features e 123 Qedit Vancouver MPE COBOL4 PUB DEMO of x Bl File Edit Text Mark View Script Options Window Help e x spel l l ine x
62. document window less one line Searching Shortcuts To Find A new string in a file from your current cursor position Use CTRL CTRL CTRL lt CTRL CTRL HOME CTRL END CTRL PAGE UP CTRL PAGE DOWN Use CTRL F Qedit for Windows User Manual Qedit for Windows User Manual The next occurrence of a string with the same options as the last search The next occurrence of a string in the opposite direction of the last search The next occurrence of a string towards the end of the file The next occurrence of highlighted text from the current cursor position The previous occurrence of the highlighted text from the position of the last selection found The previous occurrence of a string towards the beginning of a file from the last cursor position A string and replace it with a another string A specific line or record number in the current file Editing Shortcuts Copy selected text to the Clipboard Paste text from the Clipboard to the current cursor position Cut selected text to the Clipboard Select all text in a file Undo last operation Save changes made to file Other Shortcuts Create a new local file Create a new host file Open an existing local file Open an existing host file Open the file name highlighted in a file Print the current file on a local printer Switch between document windows Switch to the previous document window Switch between all active applicati
63. every 8 columns tab stops will be set at columns 9 17 25 etc 4 Ifthe new tab stops do not overlap with any current tab stops the button next to the Every text box will be called Set Click it to acknowledge the new tab stops If the new tab stops overlap with any current tab stops the button next to the Every text box will be called Clear To avoid setting tabs in overlapping positions click Clear To allow overlapping tabs click the Clear button to change it to Set then click the button again 5 To save the new tabs and close the dialog box click OK To set the new tabs without closing the dialog box click Apply The Apply button is useful when you want to continue working in the Properties dialog box If you have the ruler bar enabled the markers for these new tab stops are automatically displayed in the document window Moving Tab Stops in the Properties Dialog Box To move a tab stop in the Properties dialog box you need to add a tab at each new location see Setting Tab Stops in the Properties Dialog Box above and clear each old tab stop see Clearing Tab Stops in the Properties Dialog Box below Clearing Tab Stops in the Properties Dialog Box You can clear overlapping tab stops when you set new ones see Setting Tab Stops in the Properties Dialog Box above After tabs have been set however you can also clear one tab a series of tabs at regular intervals or all the tab stops in the file To c
64. every time you run Qedit the toolbar returns to the top of the application window Retrieving a Hidden Toolbar If your toolbar disappears on Windows 95 there are two ways to retrieve it e Move the taskbar somewhere else on the screen and move the toolbar back up This works only if you have configured the Windows 95 taskbar to Always be on top which lets you move Qedit s toolbar all the way to the bottom of the window and hide it behind the taskbar e Shut Qedit and start it again Toolbar Buttons The application toolbar contains the following groups of buttons Local files Print Cut and paste Search Disk alaj lea Save Host files Undo Redo Toolbar buttons and groups Local Files Tools The Local files group includes two buttons the New button creates a new file and the Open button opens an existing file Getting Started e 27 i Save tool Save All tool 5 Print tool 2 20 20 Manage connections Create and Open host file tools 28 e Getting Started New and Open local files tools Save Tools The Save tool which appears by itself can be used for both local and host files The Save button appears dimmed if you have not made any changes to the current file The button becomes available as soon as you edit the file If you are editing a Qedit workfile on a host the Save button is never available because changes to these files are posted immediately The Save All tool wor
65. expression e g a z0 9 html e a pattern e g abc htm 176 e Script Based Features Qedit for Windows User Manual Qedit for Windows User Manual All lines containing at least one occurrence of the search string are displayed in a new local file No matter which option you use the scripts always perform caseless searches i e IgnoreCase is TRUE The script also displays informative messages in the log window of the Script Control dialog box Here is a sample output searching for a string with the List Include command Searching Vancouver MPE COBOL4 PUB DEMO for STRING error SInclude files are searched Actual line numbers are displayed Started at 07 28 2000 11 15 40 AM Vancouver MPE COBOL4 PUB DEMO 1 line s found 2 915 Common errors include file Vancouver MPE ERRMSG PUB DEMO 4 line s found 4 88 database error value i ME000728 88 input error value ME000728 88 output error value ME000728 88 unknown error value A ME000728 MPE COBOL4 PUB DEMO 10 line s k perform 98 spell error perform 98 spell error perform 98 spell error perform 98 spell error 9 perform 98 spell error 8 perform 98 spell error He 8 perform 98 spell error PO lt 3 perform 98 spell error 9 5 98 spell error section 98 spell error exit goback Completed at 07 28 2000 11 15 40 AM Searching Only the Active Document The List All command searches only the active document Searching Referen
66. file will be lost if the connection terminates for any reason Creating a New Local File Shortcut CTRL N Creating a new local file on your PC is very similar to creating a new host file Just select the Local submenu on the New command in the File menu Qedit for Toolbar oO Windows creates a new document window on your PC with these defaults Data as the Language and a maximum Record length of 8 172 characters Creating Local Directories The method for creating a directory on your PC depends on your version of Windows For Windows 95 and Windows NT 4 0 follow these steps to create a new directory for a newly created file 1 On the File menu point to New and then click Local 2 Type the information in the file 3 On the File menu select the Save command 4 When the Save As dialog box appears click Create New Folder its icon looks like a folder with a star A new folder will be created within the current folder which is the directory in the Save in text box The folder is assigned a default name such as New Folder and is highlighted so that you can rename it to something meaningful This option is also available on other Windows dialog boxes 62 e Creating amp Opening Files Qedit for Windows User Manual Save As Save in 9 My Documents gt 2A Shortcut to Northwind ccoscececcoccecoecoececcecscoscosecsesceseccecseese Create New Folder File name fu ntitled1 Save as type All Files ia
67. following commands New New Host New Local Open Open Host Open Local Open Open Selection Recent Files Favorites Revert Close Disconnect Save Save As Save All Properties Print Page Setup Print on Host and Exit New Choosing New creates a new file The submenu appears offering two choices create anew Host file or a new Local file New Host Choosing New Host prompts the New Host File dialog box This is where you establish the Connection Record Length and Language of the file New Local Selecting New Local creates a new local file automatically Open Selecting Open prompts the Open Host and Open Local file submenu If a file name is highlighted it also prompts for the Open Open Selection submenu Open Host Choosing Open Host prompts the Open Host dialog box Open Local Choosing Open Local prompts the Open dialog box Reference e 193 194 e Reference Open Open Selection If a file is already opened Open Selection also appears in the Open submenu This command allows you to open another file whose highlighted name appears within the open file Recent Files Lists the most recently used files Favorites Lists the user s favorites files and subfolders Revert Prompts the Confirm Revert dialog box Close Closes the current open file Disconnect Closes a connection between the client and host Save Saves any changes since the last save operation
68. for Windows can work on hosts with MPE POSIX and HP UX To move through directories in each of these operating systems you must be familiar with their file structures and notation conventions UNIX Notation The directory structure in UNIX is hierarchical The slash at the beginning of a path name represents the root directory There are two ways to specify a path name absolute or relative An absolute path name is the path relative to the root directory A relative path name is a path relative to your current working directory Each file name or directory name follows its parent directory and is separated from it by a slash UNIX names which can be in either case are case sensitive These are some examples of valid path names test scrptl users bev chk txt src abc c Creating amp Opening Files e 67 MPE Notation Names in the MPE namespace are always shown as uppercase MPE file names are not case sensitive e g p is the same as P An MPE file called Cobol4 can be entered in either case These are examples of MPE files file file group file group account To access a file by its hierarchical name on MPE you must precede the name by a dot dot to go to the parent directory or one level up in the hierarchy use dot slash to go to the current directory or use slash to start at the root directory group file file Account Group File POSIX Notation on MPE With MPE AX 4 5 HP introdu
69. in the Qedit Preferences dialog box For a description of the options on the Defaults tab go to the following sections e Open files with invisibles shown see Customizing Text Formatting Features on page 120 e Open files with a ruler bar see Customizing Text Formatting Features on page 120 e Enable auto indentation see Customizing Text Formatting Features on page 120 e To set the Display font see Customizing Text Formatting Features on page 120 16 e Getting Started Qedit for Windows User Manual The UNIX Tab Qedit Preferences Default UNIX file characteristics in the Qedit Preferences dialog box e Fora description of the options on the UNIX tab go to Setting Default Options for New Files on page 85 Qedit for Windows User Manual Getting Started e 17 The MPE Tab Qedit Preferences Default MPE file characteristics in the Qedit Preferences dialog box e Fora description of the options on the MPE tab go to Setting Default Options for New Files on page 85 18 e Getting Started Qedit for Windows User Manual The Local Tab Qedit Preferences Ea General Searching Defaults UNIX MPE Local l I Use spaces for tabs I Display detabbed column Record length J Preserve trailing blanks Line termination Dos er lf Default colors z Cancel Help Default local file characteristics in the Qedit Preferences dialog box e Fora descriptio
70. line Execution 3 act eren e a R 166 Disabling Host Command Execution s sseseeseeseessseeierseertrreresstsrserrerersesrereererseese 167 MPE Commands Exec onse n nierien eae e e aiai E EE a aasa Ea 167 User Defined Commands UDC ssssssseesesesesesreerereesrsrsrereerstsserrsterrsessrsesrerrereseese 167 SLO A EN VITONMENt TREET AERA 167 Process dependent Settings ssee esesseereeeeteersstsestrrerserstserteretserstststsrstsrsrreresre 168 Session Initiation and Termination ceceesesseecsseceeeseceeseecaeeeceseceeesecneeeenaeeees 168 vi e Contents Qedit for Windows User Manual Duplicate Output LMES sinisi menie ien inea iS aE e A o REA e E es 168 UNIX Commands Execution cese e en eiaa a E iea ana a ara ei 169 Script Based Features 171 OV EL VIEW aiieieo N 171 Script Librari s 4 sch aa ih alees cea ale Asdoisnaiied E aka Maes 172 Managing Scripts vt sciscate ips ardeinia Qh alsieio hi deinia kad ednislanstete adhe 173 Monitoring and Controlling Scripts ceeeesesceseceesecseeeceeeecsaeeecsaecseeseceeeseesecsesseenaeeeeas 173 Robelle Script Library ranea e eaa a eN e EA EEE A SeA EE AASE A OEE VAR Rat 174 Sorting PINES eeir ae orea sist hee Meese eek dete Aaa ete 175 Listing Tines cosh cee ache ba ieeiae ies east la ee 176 Compiling MPE Source Files ces ecsssessessecseeeeceseeeceseeeeesecseesecsaseecaeeeeeaeeaeeetens 178 Power Tips for Developers 181 OVEIVIEW AEE N EE Ment ened atin bonnie aba naa anes Aaa aes 181 Spann
71. ll i if not spell stat ok then 14 Insta restor perform 98 spell error 15 Doc See COL 16 call SPELLFIND using spe 7 Contents spe 18 spe 19 COPYCOL copy spa 4 X AZ K For help press F1 NUM Ui Vertically tiled windows with two documents You can switch between documents quickly by just moving your mouse to another document What if you have four open documents and the auto tiling format isn t what you want i e you want to look at two at a time but in pairs You can easily adjust the windows manually Minimize the two you don t need to look at for the moment Now tile the remaining two documents with ALT W H Suppose you want the upper window to occupy more space Drag the top border of the lower window down to make the lower window smaller Now just drag the bottom edge of the upper window down and make it larger What if you want both windows to be larger leaving a bit of the other window visible when they are active That s easy because windows can overlap Use ALT W H to tile the windows minimize those you don t want then use ALT W H again Now drag the bottom edge of the lower window as far down as it will go and drag the top edge up leaving just a portion of the other window visible Finally click the upper window and drag the bottom edge down leaving just a portion of the lower window visible Now when you switch windows the newly active window will always expand while still leaving part
72. menu However there are times when you need additional control over their execution A lot of scripts apply predefined edit operations and can do so without user intervention Other scripts are designed to Script Based Features e 173 display information back to the user You can control and monitor script execution from the Script Control dialog box Execution control Log window Script Control lei E gt Mt ej v Expansion control Source code window Script Control dialog box The execution control buttons allow you to run pause stop and step through a script The dialog box has two smaller windows which can be expanded or collapsed using the expansion control buttons red arrowheads on the left Scripts can write messages to the log window These messages can be informative for debugging purposes or simply to return the execution results For more details on the Script Control dialog box refer to the QSL User Manual Robelle Script Library 174 e Script Based Features Robelle provides a script library with each version of Qedit These scripts are stored in the System subdirectory of the directory where Qedit has been installed Other scripts can be downloaded from Robelle s Web site This section documents Robelle provided scripts Some of these scripts are automatically loaded Others need to be loaded manually using the Manage Scripts dialog box In both cases script based commands are ava
73. not enabled e Qwinddb dat This is the document database It contains a number of document specific attributes For recovery purposes Qedit for Windows makes a copy of the document database in QWINDDB bkp e Qwintips txt The Qedit tips file provides helpful suggestions on how to make the best use of Qedit This file is created in the same directory as the main program file Manuals The Qedit for Windows User Manual Qedit Scripting Language User Manual and the Quick Start Guide are available in Adobe PDF files They are called qwin pdf qsidoc pdf and qstart pdf respectively These files are in the Manuals subdirectory under the directory where Qedit has been installed During installation a shortcut to the Manuals subdirectory is created in the Robelle program group of the Windows Start menu You can view these files with Adobe Acrobat Reader Acrobat Reader is available for free and can be downloaded from numerous Web sites such as http www adobe com You can use Acrobat Reader to print your own copies of the manuals Language Templates The syntax coloring feature requires language template files Template files are formatted according to XML specifications They must have a XML extension Getting Started e 11 These files are stored in Language subdirectories in different locations Robelle provides language templates in robelle qedit system language These templates should not be modified as they might be overwritten
74. on how you use the scroll bar or how far you move the scroll box If you click a scroll arrow you will move one line at a time If you drag the scroll box you can move multiple pages If you click the scroll bar itself between the scroll box and either of the arrows you move up or down by one page The status bar always indicates the line number of your current position If your file is wider than your document window you can scroll left or right by using the horizontal scroll bar located at the bottom of the window It works the same way as the vertical scroll bar except it moves left and right Using the Intelligent Mouse If your mouse has a wheel as well as the usual buttons you have an intelligent mouse The wheel provides an easy way to scroll through a file without moving your pointer to one of the scroll bars Simply rotate the wheel to move the displayed text Qedit recognizes this scrolling method You can adjust the speed of the scroll by setting the Mousewheel Acceleration slider in the Preferences dialog box If you bring the slider all the way to the left Qedit scrolls slowly for each turn of the wheel If you bring the slider to the right Qedit scrolls quickly 136 e Searching amp Replacing Features Qedit for Windows User Manual Using Cursor Movement Keys Another way to move through a file is to use cursor movement keys Your PC keyboard has the following eight cursor movement keys To move Press this key
75. only difference is the cursor position A successful match with a start of line anchor places the cursor at the beginning of the line A match with the end of line anchor places the cursor after the last character on the line Also note that since these do not represent actual characters the result of a search is an empty selection If the anchor characters are used anywhere else they lose their metacharacter status and become ordinary characters Remember that COBOL tags when displayed are part of the text Thus if you are trying to search for a regexp at the end of the line you have to code the regexp accordingly or hide the tags while doing the search Match Any Character The period or dot is used to match any character The character can be of any type As long as there is something in that position there will be a match For example abc xyz selects any line that contains the strings abc and xyz separated by a single character That character can be anything e g 1 w etc 244 e Appendix C Regular Expressions Qedit for Windows User Manual Character Class Qedit for Windows User Manual Optional Character You can check the absence or presence of a character by suffixing it with a question mark In a regexp this indicates that the preceding character might not be there If it is present it must be there only once ab c Matches ac or abc only Repeating Characters There are different ways you can check
76. port number must match the number used by the server process on the host Qedit for Windows User Manual Qedit for Windows User Manual 10 Configure Server Settings x MPE Server Settings MPE Server Name OK IV PUB Qeditmgr Help V Group Qeditmgr Cancel ERE HP UX Port Number 7395 Connection Template Jc windows conntmpl dat Configure Server Settings dialog box You can use the telnet command with the host name and port number to make sure the main server is running Just type telnet hostname 7395 If you get the following message the server is not running at all or is using a different port number TLYinG lt lt telnet Unable to connect to remote host Connection refused However if you get a dialog box similar to this and you press the carriage return key a few times there is a very good chance the main server is active Trying Connected to produx robelle com Escape character is lt cr gt lt cr gt 07B lt cr gt lt cr gt A lt cr gt Connection closed by foreign host The main Qedit for HP UX server then uses fork to create another Qedit for HP UX child process Once a connection is made between the Qedit client and the Qedit server program the client sends a login transaction to the host This information is validated against the host etc passwd file If there is an error a message is sent to the client and written to the log files The child process th
77. selection to the Clipboard so that it can be moved The Clipboard can only retain one cut or copied selection at a time See Cut Paste Retrieves the cut or copied selection from the Clipboard Copy Special Prompts the Copy Special dialog box which allows control over special Copy operations to the local Clipboard Clear Removes a highlighted selection and does not post it to the Clipboard This is equivalent to pressing the DELETE key If the selection is rectangular Qedit replaces the contents of the selection with spaces Select all Highlights the contents of the entire file Find Prompts the Find String dialog box to search for a string starting from the current cursor position Find again Repeats a search for a string in a document starting from the last string found Reference e 195 196 e Reference Find again reverse Reverses the direction of the search for the same string starting from the current cursor position Find previous Searches for the previous occurrence of the string starting from the current cursor position Find next Searches for the next occurrence of the string starting from the current cursor position Find selection Searches for a selection highlighted in the file starting from the highlighted text position Find previous selection Searches for the previous occurrence of the highlighted selection starting from the highlighted text position Replace Searches for
78. stop tool and guide lines Qedit for Windows can either show or hide the ruler bar When it is enabled the ruler bar as well as the tab stop and guide line markers appear at the top Lt Guide line tool of the window The ruler bar has marks that indicate column positions It shows numbers at regular intervals to make it easier to determine the cursor position It also shows all the active tab stops and guide lines For most files the ruler starts in column one 1 The start column depends on the Language option selected Capa 1 10 20 30 ri Tr VI Viti Vii lY f Vii lt lt ROUTINES QLIB DEV NOTES FIX NEXT LINE SCONTROL NOLIST SCONTROL LIST M SCONTROL NOLIST SCONTROL SUBPROGRAM MAIN ROUTINES ERRORS 5 BEGIN lt lt QLIB SUBROUTINES Line 7 Col 9 Purpose This source file contains some of th Ruler with a text file The ruler adjusts its column numbers according to the type of file you are editing In the following example when Qedit opens a COBOL source file which starts in column seven 7 the first column on the ruler bar is number 7 Qedit for Windows User Manual Text Formatting Features e 109 fj Vancouver MPE COBOL4 PUB DEMO of x iv m Ce eee EN oot pata r rt terrae teria Peres Pee Pa Pa daana dana 01 spell workspace 05 spell version no pic s9 4 com 05 filler pic s9 4 com occurs 570 ti spell status area 05 spell cond word 68 spell stat ok pic s9 4 comp value zero
79. the barber pole moves slowly If the server sends matched lines to the client the barber pole moves faster If you want to interrupt the search click Cancel Script Based Features e 177 178 e Script Based Features Find All on Vancouver MPE FILEL Eg Scanning file servint List Include Find All progress dialog box Simple Search String If there is no active selection the script prompts you for one If there is an active selection the script uses it as a search string and starts the search immediately Regular Expression or Pattern Search String If you want to search for a regular expression or a pattern it s very unlikely that you will want to use the selection For this reason the script is always going to prompt you for a search string If there is an active selection it is going to be used as the default value but you will be able to change it before the search operation starts Compiling MPE Source Files If you are writing programs on an MPE host you often need to compile them You can use the host command dialog box to invoke the compiler of your choice However this is sometimes tedious to move back and forth between the dialog box and the source document In the Robelle script library we provide a simple script that gives easy access to most compilers available on MPE This script can be loaded from the Scripts subdirectory of the System directory using the Manage Scripts command of the Script menu Loading
80. the cursor and becomes the current insertion point If you start typing the selected text is replaced with the first character you type If you continue typing the new text either pushes the existing text to the right or overwrites it depending on whether you are in insert or overwrite mode fej Untitled4 of x The insertion point is now EB Av K L2 28 40 len 13 Selected text is the insertion point If you use the scroll bar to move to another part of the document the selected text continues to stay selected even though it might not be visible on your screen The selection is lost only when you move the cursor to a new location If you forget that you selected text and start typing in another location you will return to the selected text because that is the current position of the cursor Multiple Ways to Select Text Qedit for Windows gives you numerous ways to select text You can use your mouse to select characters words paragraphs or complete sections You can also use the Find operation or the SHIFT key in combination with cursor movement keys to make your selection Qedit s flexibility lets you choose the method that serves you best Selecting with the Mouse A common method to highlight text is to use the mouse As in many other applications this method is a standard feature of Windows See Mouse Operations on page 38 Selecting with the Shift Key Many times you are busy editing text and realize you w
81. the insertion point stays in the same position relative to the screen even though its actual line number changes If you disable Move caret when navigating when text is not selected the cursor stays in the same line and column position even if you go to another part of the file As a result the insertion point can scroll off the screen if you move too far away from it To quickly return to the insertion point just press a cursor movement key For more information see Using Cursor Movement Keys on page 137 If you select a block of text the behavior of the Move caret when navigating option does not change Enabled or disabled the insertion point stays in the same line and column position and can scroll off the screen if you move too far away from it Insert Mode vs Overwrite Mode Qedit has two modes of behavior when you add text insert mode and overwrite mode The active mode is shown on the status bar of the main window You can change the mode by pressing the INSERT key When you start Qedit for Windows it is in insert mode When you add text at the insertion point which appears as a blinking vertical bar Qedit moves existing text to the right For insert mode there is no indicator in the status bar of the application window For Help press F1 E YA Insert mode Toggle keys status while in insert mode 88 e Typing Selecting amp Editing Text Qedit for Windows User Manual Typing Text and Check Set Decimal
82. this script adds commands to the Robelle submenu of the Script menu Qedit for Windows User Manual O Qedit File View Options JE BEE ralSl MaE EAT Control panel QWTLoadGlobals MPE Compile gt Sortlines Trancomp Help MPECompile script commands The script invokes the appropriate compiler on the active document It supports the Cob85XL and Cob74XL commands for COBOL programs the Fortran command the PasXL command for Pascal programs and the Trancomp command for TRANSACT programs The script simply invokes the compiler with the source file name and redirects the output to a temporary file called QSLCOMPO For example a COBOL compile for COBPRG1 would be Cob85x1l COBPRG1 SRC DEVACCT QSLCOMPO The compiler output file is then opened in a new document window Qedit for Windows User Manual Script Based Features e 179 Power Tips for Developers Overview If you re looking for ways to use Qedit as efficiently as possible in a programming environment here are some tips for you Spanning Hosts and Operating Systems Whether you need to access files on MPE UNIX or Windows Qedit lets you work on all of these operating systems from a single application What s even better is that you can work on any of these hosts or any of your local files all at the same time That means you can conveniently and seamlessly edit files see Typing Selecting amp Editing Text on page 87 as well
83. towards the end of the file or Search Reverse to search from the specified starting point towards the beginning of the file e Click Don t Search to save the search options but not perform the search e Click Cancel to return to the previous search options and not perform the search Common Search Operations Finding Consecutive Occurrences of a String To search for a text string Qedit for Windows User Manual Searching amp Replacing Features e 139 Shortcut CTRL F Toolbar Al mala Find Previous is on the left and Find Next is on the right Shortcut CTRL F Toolbar A 1 Select the Find command in the Edit menu 2 When the Find String dialog box appears define the terms of your search See Defining the Terms of a Search above for a list of terms 3 Click Search Reverse or Search Forward to perform the search operation If Qedit finds a match it highlights the first occurrence of the string and displays the page around it To repeat the same search for the next occurrence of the string use the Find Again command in the Edit menu or use the CTRL G shortcut To find the next occurrence use the Find Next tool To find the previous occurrence use the Find Previous command of the Edit menu use the Find previous tool or type the CTRL R shortcut Finding the First and Last Occurrence of a String To find the first or last occurrence of a string in a file 1 Select the Find command in the Edit m
84. type with the file names in its list Power Tips for Developers e 185 By carefully choosing unique and meaningful file and connection names file selection becomes faster and more efficient Expanding the Workspace If you want Qedit to display a few extra lines you can turn the application toolbar into a floating toolbox and move it to another part of the window This will give you more lines per screen and a larger working area For more information see Turning the Toolbar into a Floating Toolbox on page 27 Quick Access to Directories If you re not sure of a file s name and you want to browse through a host directory to find it here s a quick way to get a directory listing of your current working directory or group click and hold the Manage Connections button on the toolbar When a shortcut menu appears select the saved connection for which you want to get the directory listing As soon as you choose a connection the Directory dialog box will appear and you can browse through the listing Working with MPE Hosts This section contains information that pertains strictly to MPE hosts Working with Copylibs On HP e3000 computers COBOL Copy modules are stored in KSAM files These library files are called Copylibs Qedit for Windows can open modules that reside in the file with the same name as your logon group If the Copylib you use is not in your logon group you can have a file equation in the Qeditmgr Pub Sys file
85. used for each part of the address In this example the IP address would be 26 43 60 77 1A 26 2B 43 3C 60 4D 77 The port number is assigned by Winsock from the pool of available ports on the PC and changes from session to session The port number is represented by the last four characters of the argument In this example it is 5E6F 24175 Depending on options selected in the Debug Controls dialog box of the Options menu other parameters will be passed to the CI process At this point Qedit for Windows turns itself into a daemon and waits for confirmation from the server Qedit for Windows User Manual Server debugging mode can be enabled in the Debug Controls dialog box If you are using a trial version the server name is Qedit Pubtri Robelle thus the log files will be in Qlogtri Robelle On the host the server initializes its environment One of the first things it does is open the log files If it cannot open them it prints a message on the console and terminates These log files are used for keeping track of the server activities and optionally recording additional events for debugging purposes On MPE hosts the log files are created in a group called Qlog which is in the same account as the server program For example if the MPE Server Name in the Configure Server Settings dialog box is Qedit Pub Robelle the log files will be in the group Qlog Robelle The log files are called Error Access a
86. when a new version is installed If you wish to create your own templates or customize one of the Robelle templates you should create them in robelle qedit user Typically the user subdirectory contains files that have been customized and should be shared by all Qedit users The system and user directories are always scanned If you have templates that are only useful to you you can store them in the directory of your choice Enter the location in the User Language Directory field on the General tab of the Preferences dialog box Upgrading Qedit for Windows If you already have Qedit for Windows and are upgrading to a more recent version all your support files are preserved This means you do not have to create all your connections again all your preferences and default settings are still active and document attributes are still applied Up to version 5 8 10 Qedit support files were installed in the Windows sytem root directory windows or winnt Starting with version 5 8 11 the support files are stored in a subdirectory called Qedit under the Windows user s application data directory This is usually Documents and Settings loginUsername application data Qedit The directory name is based on the APPDATA system variable If the variable does not exist the support files remain in the system root directory For a new install the subdirectory is created the first time Qedit is launched For an upgrade the install script copies the
87. 1 MPE vs POSIX 74 print 74 saving from 74 select files 74 sorting 72 wildcards 72 Directory dialog 1 81 Disable host command 171 Disconnect 53 61 164 DNS 215 218 220 22 220 22 Document attributes 75 font 111 information 211 Document database 75 recovery 229 Document type 33 DOS files 68 Drag and drop open 50 51 E Embedded file 189 Embedded files 76 end of line characters 121 End of line characters 43 Entab 104 Environment MPE 171 173 Error log file 217 218 220 messages 231 Escape character regexp 255 Escaped sequence regexp 255 Qedit for Windows User Manual European currency 56 Exchange position 141 Executing host command 167 Expiring version 21 Expiry message dialog 21 F Favorites 83 add 83 add to folder 85 new folder 84 remove 86 File 152 223 autosave 166 closing 40 164 165 colors 66 converting 154 copying 151 creating 28 31 63 64 defaults 87 DOS terminator 68 drag and drop open 50 51 embedded 76 189 filters 78 font 66 fully qualified name 189 host 63 79 152 164 193 host printing 158 Information 210 line termination 68 local 28 31 64 77 163 164 225 local printing 155 Macintosh terminator 68 Most recently used 80 Most Recently Used 77 MRU 80 multiple local 79 names 32 opening 28 77 152 Options 65 quick open 95 recovery 223 224 registering QSL 50 registering type 49 rename 153 saving 28 161 163 support 11 timestamp 166 types 33 237 Unix
88. 2000 15 11 21 Help This copy of Qedit for Windows will expire in 10 days Expiry Message dialog box You can see the details about the version you are running e 32 bit edition Windows 95 and NT e the version number and build timestamp e the number of days before it expires At the end of the trial period you will not be able to use Qedit at all You will get the following message indicating that the program has expired You can call our office if you think your version should not be expiring Getting Started e 21 22 e Getting Started Expiry Message Ea Qedit 32 bit Edition With Scripting 4 9 11 Jul 24 2000 15 11 21 Help This copy of Qedit for Windows has expired Expiry Message dialog box Tip of the Day Qedit offers a number of useful tips These tips are stored in a file called Qwintips txt By default Qedit displays a new tip every time you start the program Tip of the Day x seb OA Did you know Vv If you press and hold the Manage Connection toolbar button you can go straight to the Directory dialog for a connection Tip of the Day dialog box Select Close to return to Qedit and proceed with editing files If you want to continue to browse through the tips select Next Tip If you do not want to see a new tip every time you start Qedit disable the Show Tips on StartUp option You can also browse through the tips by using the Tip of the Day command in the Help menu This co
89. 32 seconds Server Settings Some server settings can be customized using the configuration files residing on the host On an MPE host there is Qeditmgr Pub Sys and Qeditmgr Pub Robelle plus any other optional configuration file enabled in the Configure Server Settings dialog box On HP UX the system configuration file is called opt robelle qeditmgr and the user configuration file is Qedit for Windows User Manual Troubleshooting e 209 qeditmgr in the user s home directory This section describes the settings for this particular connection Server settings Tabs Every 10 columns COBOL Tag ME970924 Show tags Yes Fixed length Cobol No Cache Statistics Qedit for Windows uses a memory cache to store lines from host files The goal is to have enough lines readily available on the PC so that the response time is not severely affected by slow connections Similar to host files local files are not fully loaded into memory Qedit just reads the records as they are needed This section can have two parts Cache Statistics and Cache Requests The statistics show both types of files The Cache Requests subsection only applies to host files The Cache Statistics subsection shows the number of bytes that are actually data from the file i e text that you can see on your document window and that can be edited Of course Qedit needs to manage all this information and must keep some information on the structure of the cac
90. 6 Notation in Host Operating Systems 0 0 ec cescssssscseeeeceseeeeeecsseeeceaecatesecneesecsaeeeeaecateseeneeats 67 UNIX Notation e238 ie Aen asian E Ea E nnashea denies 67 MPE Notation Senee a aa e a E AEE E E 68 POSIX Notation n MPE ssueson nrnna e e e E E T r e E E 68 Host Directories vets aciche cae nieta eae Aan Aaa a eae BEA A Maas 68 Accessing Host Directories inasa ea e ao aea ani aieia ioaea enea eea 69 The Directory Listing seeen a a sind aon piaia itea 69 Sorting the Directory Listing i c s ceeossssdectascsepscelevonssvasoapdonsexenstensesysocdeninavdendontesenss 70 Searching fora File poss iesst ee pesecestpese teed sees eet ees dee eee eee 70 Using Wald ards 04 te 0 i aavieee caisd aieia baa E Gate eee itis 70 Changing Directories ireren iia sieeteg ied aint Guth toni di hien ites eek 71 Selecting Files sic aentn a ERE AREE Ea ier atime R EA o 71 Opening Selected Files miete esr e eaae a aE EE a eE aa AEE S E 72 Printing a Directory ListUng areata a E Ea e E AEE E EE TEET 72 Savine Host FES teil hie Rte eee ar EA TEE ete ane 72 Opening Files 5 isos tit eaa eaae a EE ia PoV A OE NEE E EE i es aioa 72 Document Attributes Saved by Qedit seseeeesseeesesssrsiserrererssrstsrtrrerssssesrsrerrererses 72 Opening a File from a Command Lite ee eeeseeseseceseeeeeseceeeecseeeeceaeeeesaeeaeeseenees 73 Openi g Embedded Files seii sera terne ae aeaa tesan rae etorra ree taa reines 74 Opening MRU Most Recently Used
91. 68 spell found value 0 4 a BA tine t 7 Ruler with a COBOL source file Displaying and Hiding the Ruler Bar Before you can set tab stops or guide lines you have to show the ruler bar To display the ruler bar in the file you are viewing select Ruler from the View menu To hide the ruler bar simply repeat this step Tab Stops For complete syntax refer to the user manual for host based Qedit Qedit allows you to set any number of tab stops in a document to help align the text in specific positions If you press the TAB key the cursor moves to the next tab stop relative to the cursor position If there are no tab stops a tab character only takes up one column just any other character You can set the tab stops either on the Qedit server or client Tab Stops on the Server For host files you can define tab stops right on the server To do this you need to add a Set Tabs command in one of the configuration files When you open a new connection the server passes the tab information to Qedit The new tab stops are then used for all files opened on that connection For example to set tab stops on columns 8 12 16 and 24 you would have the following lines in one of the Qeditmgr files if Qedservmode lt gt 0 then set tabs 8 12 16 24 endif You have to be careful where you place the Set Tabs command in the configuration file The tab values are relative to the first column of the file which is defined by the L
92. 95 46 e A Windows Primer In Windows 95 when you right click a file name in Windows Explorer or in a file list such as an Open dialog box you will see a list of context sensitive options available for that file One of the options is Send To which permits you to send the file to a diskette a folder a program etc You can add more destinations to the list of Send To targets including Qedit for Windows When you send a file to Qedit in this way Qedit automatically starts and opens the file Adding Qedit as a Send To Target This procedure is usually included when Windows 95 is installed On your PC however the drive letter and the SendTo directory location can be different Qedit for Windows User Manual Qedit for Windows shortcut icon 1 In Windows Explorer go to the C Windows Start Menu Programs Robelle directory 2 Select the Qedit for Windows shortcut icon 3 Copy the shortcut to the Clipboard by using CTRL R or the Edit menu 4 Go to the C Windows SendTo directory and paste the shortcut into it by using CTRL V or the Edit menu Note that Qedit has difficulty handling long file names passed via the SendTo feature If you do pass a long file name it is converted to a short DOS name 8 characters a period and a 3 character extension For example Diary19980811 html would be passed as Diaryl l1l htm If you edit this file and save it Qedit deletes the file with the long file name and replaces it with
93. Bar ic c cesscccsceseicssaiet ected cacdueavacesvesdepsnserededdbcacdeenastececandabenensenens ave 24 Application Tod DaT e ar a a Eao a E a aa aa aa E a aa Ep aE Soia 25 Toolbar Buttons OAE EAE E EE E EESE E EA EE 27 Application Workspaces sessa neien neei n eae En a r n eae nEn VOE aeri 30 Application Status Bafe eino ona nae a A anea eat eae e rap nes SeSe EE Ea tahoe 30 Th Document Windows seein ara a EE A O ee E E NR ETE ee 31 Document Title Bary eritgan aas a AE E AE RE EEE 32 Document Workspale senie E a E a a a 33 Document Status Barsccccrs cuisstvtiesee ntieae etree r E E eee EON 33 Splitting a Document into Independent Views ceeeeeeeeceeeeceeceteeceeeeeeeeeesaees 35 Collapsing Multiple Views into One eeceesccsseeseeeececeeeceeeecaeeeessecseesecnerseeaeeees 36 A Windows Primer 37 Windows Standard Functions eene a eA a Ere a E EE A 37 Switching Between Applications eeseesessessessesesressseseerestsssserestenestreeseresteetsensssesterestseseresee 37 Controlling the Size and Position of Windows eseesesseeseeeesesesrsrsreerereesrsrsrerreretesesrerrererseee 37 Moving a Window Around on the Screen s eseseeeseseeeiesesrseserrerrerersesrsrrerersersesreee 37 R s izing WNdOM eaea ea a a a r aara aae a aa EE E EOE EAEL EES 37 Minimizing a Window sedek eeaeee ea i n 38 Maximizing a Window seu innear ren anson aena Tanina oa ENE peT E dena deo ES aE ehe 38 Arranging Windows into Tiles sesesess
94. By default Qedit does not set up a connection or log in to a host at startup If you want Qedit to automatically log in at startup you can change your default 1 Select the Connections command in the Options menu 2 Select the connection to which you want Qedit to log in at startup 3 Select Login at startup The next time you start Qedit for Windows it will create this connection for you automatically but it does not open any files You can enable this option when you first create a connection Closing Connections without Open Files By default Qedit keeps connections open until you disconnect them implicitly or until you exit from Qedit Sometimes you might not want to keep a host connection open if is not being used For example if the likelihood of ever reusing the connection is slim you might not want to maintain the resources You could use this option if you are worried about people accessing the host through your PC and you are willing to close all files when you walk away A screen saver with password protection however might be a better solution for this problem To change Qedit s default so that it automatically closes connections without open files 1 Select Preferences from the Options menu 2 When the Qedit Preferences dialog box appears select the Close connections with no open files option 3 Click the OK button to close the dialog box This option forces Qedit to close not only connections but also op
95. CHDIR is still effective Worst it can act upon a different set of files A Purge command might remove something totally different than what you intended In this situation you have 2 options You can put all your commands including the CHDIR command in a document and use the Run as host command The other option is to use the Directory dialog box and manually change the CWD to the location you want to work from Session Initiation and Termination You will not be able to use a He110 command to start a new session This command implies termination of the previous session which is not allowed The CI process is started but will not be able to complete the request The dialog box will appear as if it was waiting on something To get the control back simply select the Stop button You will get similar results if you type Bye Duplicate Output Lines There are cases where lines in the output window of the host command dialog box will appear twice This would be the case for most applications using a List parameter to redirect output data Most compilers are such applications A typical compiler command file would be like COB85XL PUB SYS parm text obj list mast new info wksp xdb r Compilers usually write some kind of messages to indicate the number of errors for example Compile statistics are always written to Stdlist Depending on the compiler directives you can request additional output For examp
96. Changes to tag settings in the client are applied only to the current file and are saved in the document database New tag values are also sent to the server so that modified lines are properly identified To set COBOL tags in the client 1 Select Properties in the File menu 2 When the Properties dialog box appears click COBX Although you can always access this tab you will not be allowed to change any of its settings unless e the Language of the file is COBX e you are running version 4 7 11 and later of the server Line Features e 131 132 e Line Features Vancouver MPE COBOL4 PUB_DEMO Properties Options COBX Information Tabs Guides Tag Date None ba Prefix Suffix I Display tags Cancel Apply Help Changing the COBOL tag in the COBX tab Enter the new COBOL tag settings in the Date Prefix and Suffix boxes A COBOL tag can have a literal prefix string a literal suffix string and the system date You can use only one of these settings or combine any of them Qedit has only one restriction the total length of the tag cannot exceed 8 characters As you enter new settings Qedit displays the new tag beside the Tag label There are six different formats in the Date list box e DDMmmYY where the month Mmm appears as a 3 letter abbreviation where the first letter is uppercase and the last 2 are lowercase e YYMMDD e MMDDYY e DDMMYY e CCYYMMDD e DDMMMYY where the month
97. ENEN ESETE 157 Which files do you need to save ssessessesesssesrsstereesrstsrereretsrstsrerererseeseseerreteees 157 Auto Saving Local Files sinnini n ei lent Enae aN aR E aS E REAREA 157 Saving a Qedit Workfile ss sissit noei ensin EE ANE a KE E E R Aien 157 Saving an Existing File Local and Host sesesseeeeeeseseseseeeereresesesrerrersssesesreerees 158 Saving a New Host Piles tet tisk eee Mei el eh wield Geeta 158 Saving New Local Pile c ccsasssestels teieeerct ats m at e neia a aiheet 159 Saving All Opened Files isiende a eat i raia niin Adin EEEa et 160 Closing a Piles oii areeni iii did tii E ie aoe ei a Rae ital 160 Explicit vs Implicit Cl s a a a E eoa raa E apaa aa E Ae aa aR REA 160 Closing a Fileas an oren a a eean ea rieo AEN EEE a e ae n es 160 Forcing a Close on a Host Filesi rrisitdespeereit enpo oiris epaiei ees 161 Customizing Saving and Closing Files ce eescessessessecseeseesecseesecneesecsaeeeesaecaeesecneseenaeeees 161 Automatically Posting Qedit Workfiles on the Server eee eeeseeeeesecseeeecneeeeeeeees 161 Comparing Timestamps Before Overwriting Host Files ceceeeeessseeecneeeeeeeees 162 Saving Changes at Regular Intervals eessssesecseesecneeeecseeecesecaeesecneeseenaeeeeeas 162 Interacting with Hosts 163 OVERVIEW sich aE as See i ae 163 Executing Host Commands scree e herpes se rE ae hah og EEE oe aipeaensch sup REEE 163 Single ine Execution irpreni a aa eaa E SEE A EEEa 163 M lti
98. Files eee eecseescsecseeeecneeeeceeseeeeseeaeeseenees 74 Openin a Local Fil espen i Saeed de Baa ite Ba he Ae eee 75 Opening an HUME Filesi neeaae aane a E a beet aie e e Sika 77 Opening a Host Fei e EE E ie aie E E ERTE 77 Opening Files with Binary Data eee essecseeeecneeeecsseeeeesecaeeseeneeecsaeeeesaecaeeseeners 80 Seryer WALI SS amp 502i sian ctboseecds bees e Sie chs aateteuta iavibucharte R RAN r ANT 80 Maintaining and Using a List of Favorites 0 0 cesceseecesecseeeecneeeecaeeeeeseeneeseenees 81 Viewing the List of Open Files iiic000 senda Ad neva ie iara tthe ade aes 85 Customizing Opening a Files sereins ia ss a aii isenta aiet 85 Setting Default Options for New Files eseseseeeseeseesesssrsrsrrreerersersesrerrererssesesrerrerse 85 Loading Local Files into Memory s s sssseeseseessesresesreesrstsrerterersestsrereereessesesrerrereenes 86 Typing Selecting amp Editing Text 87 Qedit for Windows User Manual Contents e iii OVERVIEW 2 ae aa e settee ets Ace ea de Bs eesti BEAR Set ee eee BEER ees 87 Determining Your Position in a File eeeescssesecssecseesecseeeceaeeecaecaeeecsaecaeesecnesseenaseneeas 87 Cursor Position and Appearance cceescseescsseeecsseesseecaecstesecaessecsaeeeesaeeaeeseeneeaes 87 Controlling the Insertion Point Movements ce esesseeecseeseceseeeceaecaeesecneeeeeneeeeeas 88 Insert Mode vs Overwrite Mode oesie iiaee ei iei ta a ae 88 Typing Text and Inserting Specia
99. Host Connections on page 211 or troubleshooting HP UX Host Connections on page 216 Editing a Saved Connection A connection is defined as a connection name a host name a user login name for UNIX or a hello string for MPE and the passwords needed to access that host Qedit for Windows does not bypass any of your security provisions You can change the host name the login information the passwords and the options in a saved connection If you change the connection name you are really creating a new connection The old connection is not renamed and it remains in the connection list This allows you to use an existing connection as a template for new ones If you want to change the name of an existing connection you need to create a new one and delete the old one Modifying a Saved Connection To modify a saved connection 1 Select the Connections command in the Options menu 2 When the Connection List dialog box appears select the connection you want to change from the Connection Name list 3 You can change the host name the login information the passwords and its prompt options on a connection You cannot however change the connection name because that would actually create a new connection See Copying a Saved Connection on page 56 4 Click Update to save the new values 5 Click Done to close the dialog box Any subsequent use of this connection will implement your changes Renaming a Saved Connec
100. M 7 29 1997 10 34 19 AM 3 1 4 1996 7 22 56 PM 5 29 1997 Directory dialog box for the HP UX host in Vancouver British Columbia Canada As you can see the Last Modified time for the canada file was 1 38 P M which is what was expected Checking the Time Zone on Windows 95 To set the time zone on Windows 95 select the Start button point to Settings and click Control Panel When the Control Panel program group appears click the Date Time icon Go to the Time Zone tab Date Time Properties h 2 x Date amp Time Time Zone GMT 04 00 Atlantic Time Canada T Automatically adjust clock for daylight saving changes Cancel Apply Windows 95 Date Time control panel 224 e Troubleshooting Qedit for Windows User Manual The Windows 95 PC above seems to have the correct time zone and is not adjusting for Daylight Saving Time In the USA and Canada anyone who lives outside of Central Standard Time will need to enable this option Document Database Recovery When the Delete option is selected all file information previously stored is lost Qedit for Windows User Manual Qedit for Windows stores information about each file in a document database called QWINDDB DAT Under some circumstances the document database may become corrupt If this ever happens Qedit for Windows will not be able to start Starting with version 5 4 12 Qedit asks the user for a course of action One of the first things Qedit does whe
101. Manual A Windows Primer Windows Standard Functions Qedit for Windows conforms to many of the standard functions in Microsoft Windows If you haven t had much experience with Windows this chapter covers many of the Windows features that Qedit for Windows uses These features include using the mouse to select text minimizing and maximizing document windows using toolbar buttons and generally enjoying the many time saving shortcuts a Windows interface provides For a complete description of Microsoft Windows consult your Windows manual Switching Between Applications Without a mouse you can still switch to another Windows application Hold down the ALT key and press TAB This brings up an icon list of all your running applications If you let go of the ALT key you will switch back to the last application you were in While keeping the ALT key down you can continue to press TAB until you reach the application you want or go back to Qedit Release the ALT key once you have selected the application you want Use the same procedure to go back to Qedit Controlling the Size and Position of Windows Qedit for Windows User Manual Moving a Window Around on the Screen To move a window first point to the title bar at the top of your Qedit window then click and hold the mouse button You can now drag your window anywhere on the screen Resizing a Window To resize a window put your mouse on any of the edges or corners of your Qed
102. Name should be Qedit Pubtri Robelle 212 e Troubleshooting The IP address is typically a fixed value for a given PC However if you are connecting via an ISP or some dial in equipment the IP address might change on every connection Qedit will re assess the IP address every time it tries to establish a new connection Next Qedit runs an instance of MPE s command interpreter CI Ci Pub Sys It passes a command to the CI so that the Qedit server program gets started The server program name is determined by the Server command in the Options menu The default name is Qedit Pub Robelle This is where host based Qedit is usually installed Configure Server Settings x MPE Server Settings iy MPE Server Name M PUB Geditmar Hep V Group Qeditmgr Cancel HP UX Port Number 7395 Connection Template Je windowsconntmpl dat Configure Server Settings dialog box If the connection process seems to hang at the Waiting for server message make sure you have configured the right MPE Server Name and check the host to make sure the program actually resides at that location The server program receives information via an Info lt string gt The d argument is used to pass the IP address of the PC and the connecting port number This information is passed as a hexadecimal value which will look like this d0Ox1lA2B3C4D5E6F The first eight characters represent the IP address where 2 characters are
103. OBX Line numbers Yes Scratch file QED15434 PUB DEMO Time since saved 7 seconds Keys since saved 0 Print OK Cancel Apply Help File Information page on the File Properties dialog box The information in this dialog box is document specific The dialog box above shows information about Cobol4 Pub Demo You can look at the details by using the scroll bar If you want to capture the information you can select Copy and put all these items in the Windows Clipboard You can print this information by clicking on Print which will give you the standard Windows Print dialog box The Clipboard and the printed document will contain additional information about Qedit for Windows edition version number and build timestamp as in this example Qedit 32 bit Edition Version 4 5 24 Sep 19 1997 23 03 07 Select Done to close the dialog box The information is divided into five 5 sections Document Connection Transmission Server Settings and Cache Statistics Section headings are indented from the related details for easy reading Document Information The first section provides file attributes Details for local files differ slightly from host files Qedit displays the fully qualified file name in both cases For local files this means identifying the disk drive and all directories leading to the file For native MPE host files the file name appears in the lt file gt lt group gt lt account gt format For
104. Qedit Vancouver MPE HOSTCMD PUB DEMO Dota aja alre Compile stream jobl clerk payal Bun build extfile rec 80 run suprtool pub robel Load SCHpL Save compiled script Run as host command Host command Manage scripts Control panel QWTLoadGlobals Robelle X Line 1 Col 27 C Nmf 2 Host Command connection list Selecting a connection from the Host command list displays the host command dialog box Stop execution Clear log window Copy log window Command input field Yancouver MPE ojm Command Progress Step BEAL Expansion control Result window Host command dialog box with single line result window It is very important to note that the dialog box is not meant to be a terminal emulator It is simply a place to display information And even then output destined to format terminal screens such as escape sequences are inoperative here Nonprinting characters are displayed with small empty squares as in _ amp dJ In this example the square is a placeholder for the escape character The title bar shows the name of the connection on which commands are executed You can open multiple host command dialog boxes simultaneously Enter the command you want to execute in the Command field You can enter only one command at a time It can be any command that does not require user input
105. Qedit for Windows 6 0 User Manual Copyright 1996 2009 Robelle Solutions Technology Inc Qedit is a trademark of Robelle Solutions Technology Inc Windows is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation Other product and company names mentioned herein may be the trademarks of their respective owners Updated Sunday January 12 2014 Robelle Solutions Technology Inc 7360 137 Street Suite 372 Surrey BC Canada V3W 1A3 Toll free 1 888 robelle Tel 604 501 2001 Fax 604 501 2003 support robelle com www robelle com Contents Welcome to Qedit for Windows 1 Overview of Qedit for Windows ccccccccccessscesscecssecseececseceeececsaecseeeecsaecseeecasecseeeesaeceeeeeesaeens 1 Hardware and Software Requirements cceeecsesecseeecssecseeeccnerseceaeeeeeaeeateaeeneeaes 1 Network Requirements cccccessceesceescessceeeceseceaeceaeceaecaeecaeesaeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeereneeeeenaes 2 The Ultimate Editing Tool scccciescsicidinle eels bined cicada ain ee 2 Multi File Access Simultancously sceeeecessescseesscsseeeessecseesecneeseceaseeesaeeaeeseeneeaes 2 Speed Speed and More Speed ooo cece or a KE E E E 2 Highly Scaleablevis c chanesiaiiadvndaldniu nina dedaaiaiisentsale hee cen 2 Fully Integrated with Windows ccsccsssccssecsseseceeseeceseeecsaeceeesecaeesecnecaeeseeneeeenaeeess 3 Multiple Independent Views nissene inr a E A 3 Consistent Interface on All Platforms esesseeseeeeeesserstsee
106. RT key puts Qedit into insert mode which controls the way you enter new text The Document Window Document windows are sometimes called child windows Qedit for Windows User Manual The Qedit application window does not directly access files Instead when you open or create a file Qedit creates another window called a document window Although each document window has the same layout they work independently Getting Started e 31 32 e Getting Started Document Title bar fej Vancouver MPE COBOL4 PUB DEMO spell workspace 05 spell version no 05 filler pic s9 eccurs spell status area 05 spell cond word pic s9 Doc im ent 88 spell stat ok val workspace 88 spell found val 88 spell not found val 88 spell bad word len val 88 spell bad line len val 88 spell no main aux val 88 spell no user aux val of Line 16 Col 20 Document Status bar Document window Document Title Bar The document title bar appears at the top of a document window It holds three distinct elements Window control menu Window control tools fs Vancouver MPE COBOL4 PUB DEMO Ekl File name Document title bar e Windows control menu In the example above the icon on the left side of the title bar gives you access to the document window control menu This menu allows you to move re size close the current window or switch to another window e File name The middle section of the title bar displays the fully qualifi
107. Shortcut CTRL Z Toolbar Shortcut CTRL Y Toolbar E Qedit for Windows User Manual e A typing transaction starts with a printable character a TAB a SPACE or a NEWLINE character If there is no current selection the BACKSPACE and DELETE keys also begin a typing session e Single character deletions using either the BACKSPACE or DELETE keys that take place within a typing session are treated as if they were part of an original selection that was deleted e Exception to the above rules any typing transaction that goes on for more than 24 lines gets made into its own transaction and a new transaction is started Undo Command To undo the last modification select the Undo command in the Edit menu If you perform multiple undo actions you cancel the next preceding update You cannot undo changes out of order Undo All Modifications The Undo function allows you to cancel modifications one at a time starting with the most recent Using the Undo command can be very tedious if you want to cancel all the modifications you have made The Revert command in the File menu can do this much faster This command cancels all the modifications made since you have either opened the file or last saved it which ever came last NOTE There is a major difference between the Undo and Revert commands If you use Undo and you have gone too far back you can always use the Redo command to re apply changes The Revert comma
108. Submenu 2 Qedit Untitled1 ETE OBRH Edit Iex Mark view Script command E DES Host Ctrl Shift O gt gt Recent Eies mR i Lio SD Favorites Hen selection Revert Close Disconnect Options Window Unavailable command Properties Print Ctrl P Page Setup Biton Host Exit Menu commands and submenu Some menus have checked commands which use a check mark to show that they are enabled In the View menu below the check mark indicates whether the command is enabled or disabled To change the status of a checked command simply select it Window Help Ruler bar Record numbers Toolbar v Status Bar Show invisibles Checked commands Application Toolbar A number of Qedit functions are also available with a single click of the mouse These functions appear on the toolbar as a series of buttons If you prefer not to see the toolbar you can hide it by selecting the Toolbar command in the View menu This setting is saved across invocations which means that if you hide the toolbar it Getting Started e 25 For a vertical toolbar move it completely over to the left or right side of the window 26 e Getting Started will remain hidden even if you exit and restart Qedit To display the toolbar again you have to enable it in the View menu Changing the Shape and Position of the Toolbar The default location for the toolbar is underneath the menu bar at the top of the
109. Text in Columns ssshcothist eb ar a Eaa o estas aa E E o aa EASE ea kEi 100 Shifting to the Next TabiStOp aienti erii roede aa eiea aar nka Eia 101 Removing or Inserting Tab Characters sseeeseseeeeeeeeeieresssrsesrtrrererrsesrrrrrrererrseseeee 101 Expanding Tabs in Clipboard 2 0 0 0 ci eecscesecsseseceseceeeseceeesecneeeeceaseneesecaeeseeneseeenaees 102 Working with Rectangular Selections ceceeeessseceseeeeeecseeeceeeeeeseceaeeccsaecaeesecseeseenaeseeeas 102 Copying and Cutting a Rectangular Selection ce ceeecessecceesecneeeeceeceeeeneteeesaees 102 Pasting a Rectangular Selection in Replacement eeeeecesecseeeecneeeeceseeeseeeeaees 102 Inserting a Rectangular Selection ec ccssecssesecscesceseceeeeceeeecaeeeeesecaeeseeeeereeaees 103 Deleting or Clearing a Rectangular Selection eeceescceseceeeseceeeeecnereeeeseneseeeeaees 103 Extending a Rectangular Selection cc cesesesecseeseesecseeseceeeeceaeeeeesecaeeeeeneteeeeaees 103 Undoing and Redoing 6 5 ose sdedes nib anie i e e alee Rakes 103 What Delimits an Undo and Redo Transaction ceeeecssecseeeeceeeesceseeeeeaeeneeees 104 Undo Commands seb sey stecssees cusses e ae e n eaa A aoe I A rated segues ered weet ESTIIS E 105 Redo Command ineeie ees o ea a E O EE E E EIEE EEE EATEN 105 Text Formatting Features 107 OAE AA RETTA EEA RA 107 TEKO ni KAONE EEN E EEEE E S E E E A dete aha EE 107 Changing the Document Font esesssesseseeeses
110. a Document into Independent Views on page 35 and clicking and holding the toolbar host buttons to get a list of connections see Shortcut Menus on Toolbar Buttons on page 44 Some models of mouse devices such as the Microsoft Intellimouse have a wheel between the buttons This wheel lets you maneuver through a file easily Qedit gives you the ability to control the scrolling speed of an intelligent mouse Simply adjust the Mousewheel Acceleration slider in the Preferences dialog box See Using the Intelligent Mouse on page 136 for more details Using Mouse Buttons Qedit for Windows recognizes a number of standard ways to use the mouse e Click This means a single click of the left mouse button which is usually the primary button e Double or Triple Click This means two or three left mouse clicks in very rapid succession on the specified object or location on the screen The speed at which you have to click i e the time between the clicks is configurable with the Mouse tool under the Windows Control Panel e Click and Hold This means a single click of the left mouse button and holding it down e Drag Dragging is used to select text Click and hold the mouse across the text you want to select When you reach the last character release the mouse The text you selected appears highlighted e Drag and Drop This is used to move objects on the screen Click and hold the left mouse button on an object and move it
111. a a i ooi 186 User Labels on FileSource aa E aa ees ETEA a a IEEE 186 Network Issues 189 TCPAP nsina a nen a e Raina E A E E A E E EEE EREN dy 189 Firewalls edene a Bais So E Baek Seal E ate 189 Chent to Server Handshaking 2 650 cciscsuptociecies beasesoebastsssshsabesicsseesesssasapsonevanstsenesesense 189 Looking at Server Connections sires atirat e aa raaa a e a Oraa So 191 MPE Connect on List orseson ar aan aeoea a eao a a a aas Tee ISAE Aiea sae 191 UNIX Connection Listoner S a E E E EEN 192 Reference 193 Men Commands a aS e e puss R ar E a Eee Se ea eir E NEEESE 193 1S Co GA 10 Gea ea E TEE E E EE E EE 193 Edit Men a dae BAe a aE TEE E o 195 Tert MEU E ate Re eee 196 Mark Menusi opereer ar se neee eTe E e e a EEE EE E E EE R 197 View Menus snittar i E E a E A E ER EEEE 197 Script Meintsesin eeni a a od Meth r eee eae ss 197 Qedit for Windows User Manual Contents e vii Options Menu vii a avnia i aao oa a aA pha EE ia a aha aa 198 Window Ment sini isd eaten sinh hotest ts hit i hed a a eis 199 Help Men sainan raean n tiesto ee A the tee lie E ees 199 Key Combinations and Functions ccescsssscseeeecsseeeceeceseeecesecseesecnessecsaseeesaecaesseeneseeenaeeees 200 Control Combination Key rnoet ipese teries ea ipe Ea 200 Searching Shortcuts oaen neen ne on diode E A Ea E iene NEES 200 Editing Shortcuts ey nn e e rees E Se a Sieh a en ee E tok ail Eien 201 Other Shortcuts n eE E ith Hae ee ee ee 201 Fun
112. aced by the new file name ourpro 1 htm If you have to work with files that have long names you should use the 32 bit version of Qedit 50 e A Windows Primer Qedit for Windows User Manual Connecting to a Host or Network What do you need to create a connection Qedit for Windows User Manual Qedit for Windows requires a client and a server The client is a program that runs on your PC The server is a program that runs on one or more of your host computers HP e3000 running MPE iX or HP 9000 running HP UX The Qedit for Windows server is actually the native mode Qedit program with a version greater than 4 6 enabled for server mode and run in a special way Qedit s server mode is an option on host based Qedit so you have to talk to someone at Robelle Solutions Technology Inc to enable it On most MPE host computers you do not have to start the server program because Qedit for Windows takes care of everything for you If you have special network security devices like firewalls you might have to use Qedit s firewall protocol Refer to MPE Host Connections on page 211 or the appropriate host based Qedit manual for complete instructions On UNIX hosts you need to start a listener process Refer to HP UX Host Connections on page 216 or the appropriate host based Qedit manual for complete instructions A connection is created between the client and the server when you first attempt to access a file or directory on that connectio
113. al but if specified there must be only Appendix D Language Templates e 255 one The block can contain Endline Inline and LineDesignator blocks There can be as many of these blocks as needed Comment identifiers in these blocks can not have more than 15 characters each Endline blocks define identifiers that makes the rest of the current line a comment There can be as many Endline blocks as needed Inline blocks define identifiers marking the start and end of a comment The beginning of comment identifier is defined with a BeginComment block There must be only one of these per Inline block The end of comment identifier is defined with a EndComment block There must be only one of these per Inline block In a file anything between the start of comment and end of comment identifiers is considered a comment and can span multiple lines There can be as many Inline blocks as needed An Inline block can have a Type attribute If the value is Keyword it means the BeginComment and EndComment must appear as words to be recognized For example if the BeginComment string is comment comment starts a multiline comment but commentary and comments do not A LineDesignator block indicates that the comment character has to be in a fixed position within a line This block has one attribute Position column number where the comment character must appear It is required and must be greater than 0 The comment identifier is optional If
114. ames are identified by a leading SLASH character absolute or a leading dot slash or dot dot slash relative If you don t specify one of these prefixes Qedit assumes you are trying to access a file in the MPE namespace If you want to open a file using POSIX notation you could enter GREEN PUB COBOL4 or COBOL4 You have to use MPE wildcards when you access the POSIX namespace If you want to select all the files that start with a capital p on an MPE host using the POSIX notation you would use the at sign as the wildcard So you could enter P Host Directories When you want to open a single file and you know its name as well as the directory in which it resides you can use the Open command See Opening a Host File on page 77 68 e Creating amp Opening Files Qedit for Windows User Manual NOTE Currently only MPE displays File Type information Qedit for Windows User Manual Going into the file structure of a host however is useful in the following situations e you don t know the exact name of a file e you don t know the directory in which a file resides e to open multiple files at once e to browse the contents of a directory Accessing Host Directories To access a host directory 1 On the File menu point to Open and then click Host 2 When the Open Host File dialog box appears click Directory 3 When the Directory dialog box appears it will list the files and subdirectories in the current work
115. and click Local 2 Select Select all from the Edit menu to copy its contents 3 Select the File menu point to New and click Host to create a new host file Qedit for Windows User Manual Copying amp Printing Files e 147 148 e Copying amp Printing Files When the New Host dialog box appears define the characteristics of the new host file and click New When the new document window appears use the Paste command in the Edit menu to paste the local file into the new host file NOTE The Clipboard has a limited capacity See Workarounds to Clipboard Cache on page 95 Copying Host Files Copying a Host File to the Same Host There are times when you want to modify a file but you don t want to lose the last version of the file To copy a host file to the same host is a two part process first open a copy of the file then save it with a new file name You can also use this process to rename a host file To copy a host file to the same host 1 2 Select the File menu point to Open and click Host When the Open Host File dialog box appears select the file that you want to copy Enable the Open a copy option to open a copy of the file you selected The Open a copy option is available in both the Open Host File and Directory dialog boxes If you select multiple files in the Directory dialog box the Open a copy option will apply to all of them Click Open to open a copy of the file Qedit will open the copy and y
116. and time NOTE The Directory window you are looking at is also stored in a Qedit scratch file Make sure you select the right one If you select the directory scratch file you will not get an error but the contents will be almost unreadable 5 Open the file Qedit will automatically perform an internal recovery process You should then have the text you were working on 6 If the text is yours and in good shape perform a Save as command 7 Once you are sure you have recovered everything you can delete the scratch file Qedit for Windows User Manual Local Files Operation When you open a local file for editing Qedit reads the entire file This is done for two reasons 1 To count the number of lines 2 To create an internal table of line pointers into the original file This table requires 16 bytes per line in the file Qedit keeps track of both the number of bytes in the file and the number of lines in the file Due to internal constraints the maximum size for a local file is 1 Four billion characters or about 4 GB 2 32 2 With up to 2 billion lines 2 31 1 The file is read in 20 480 byte chunks The number of lines is used to move the scroll box to the appropriate location in relation the file size If the scroll box is about 34 of the way down the scroll bar the displayed lines are really about 34 of the way down the file Other editors use the number of characters to position the scroll box which might no
117. anges to an existing file whether host or local use the Save command Save is also one of the standard buttons on the toolbar This menu choice is unavailable if you have not made any changes since the last save if your file does not have a name yet Copy or New or if you opened the file with Read Only access If the file has been modified by someone else since you opened it or last saved it Qedit will warn you and suggest not doing the Save This option can be disabled in the Preferences dialog box in the Options menu The Load local files K into memory option also affects how Qedit saves changes to a local file If you enable this option modifications to a local file that is smaller than the configured threshold are saved only when you perform a save operation When Qedit opens these files it reads the text into your PC s memory and closes the original file If however a file is larger than the configured threshold or this option is disabled Qedit treats the file like a host file and continually saves your changes to the original file For more information see Loading Local Files into Memory on page 86 Saving a New Host File To save a new host file once you have created it 1 Select the Save or Save As command of the File menu 2 When the Host Save As dialog box appears enter the new file name Qedit will save this file in the current directory If you want to save the file in a different directory enter a path to an
118. anguage option Because different language settings have a different starting column the result might not be what you expect For example if you have the following in your configuration file if Qedservmode lt gt 0 then set Language SPL Qedit for Windows User Manual 110 o Text Formaiting Features e Tab stop marker Qedit for Windows User Manual set tabs 8 12 16 24 endif the tab stops will be set at columns 8 12 16 and 24 because the first text column in an SPL file is one 1 However if you have if Qedservmode lt gt 0 then set Language Cobol set tabs 8 12 16 24 endif the tab stops would be set at columns 14 18 22 and 30 because the first text column in a COBOL file is 7 Tab Stops on the Client When you change tab stops on the client the new settings are recorded in the document database and are used whenever you access the file Tabs modified on the client are only applied to the active file There are two ways you can set document specific tab stops on the client on the ruler of the document window or in the Properties dialog box Setting Tab Stops on the Ruler Qedit shows tab stops on the ruler bar as small arrowheads pointing downward If you have never modified the tab stops e g new file or file never modified Qedit s default is every four columns New tabs can be set with a tab stop marker which appears in a button above the ruler Laya ae lY ms Tri Yll Y lY 10 20
119. ant something highlighted If you move your hand from the keyboard to use the mouse you slow down your thinking and editing process at least if you are a touch typist What can you do Typing Selecting amp Editing Text e 93 There is a way to select text without moving your hands from the keyboard the SHIFT key in combination with cursor movement keys When you use the SHIFT key the text is selected as the cursor moves Some of the most useful combinations are SHIFT HOME to highlight to the start of the current line SHIFT END to highlight to the end of the current line and HOME SHIFT END to highlight the current line If you want to select all the lines from the cursor to the beginning of the file use CTRL SHIFT HOME If you want to do the opposite i e select all the lines from the current location to the end of the file use CTRL SHIFT END If the current selection is rectangular CTRL LEFT BUTTON and you use the key combinations above the selection is extended accordingly and the selection remains rectangular In other words this is an easy to select columns throughout the file For more information see Using Cursor Movement Keys on page 137 If you use the cursor movement keys to move away from the selected text the selection is canceled You can also use the ESCAPE key to cancel the current selection Using these keys is good practice because it prevents you from accidentally deleting the selection especially if you
120. application window Under Windows 95 it is possible to move the toolbar to other locations on the document window To move the toolbar click and hold the mouse on the area between buttons Then drag the toolbar to the position you want and release it You can move it left right or to the bottom of the window or even display it vertically on either side of the window o x ORG Ht File View Options Script Help a a sl For help press F1 Vertical toolbar on the right side of the window Turning the Toolbar into a Vertical Column To shape the toolbar into a vertical column 1 Place your pointer as far as possible to the left if you want to move the toolbar to the right or to the right if you want to move the toolbar to the left 2 Drag the toolbar as far as possible to the side that you want until its outline changes to a vertical column 3 Release the mouse button Qedit for Windows User Manual D New and Open local files tools Qedit for Windows User Manual Turning the Toolbar into a Floating Toolbox You can also resize the toolbar and make it into a rectangle that can be moved around the window Move the mouse pointer toward one edge of the toolbar When the pointer changes to a double sided arrow click and hold the mouse button and move the cursor in the direction of one of the arrows Rectangular toolbar Note that the position of the toolbar is not saved when you close Qedit That means
121. aracters If the keyboard for your PC is not a standard English keyboard you just press the special keys on your keyboard to insert the characters With Windows 95 you can still insert special characters into your document with a keyboard for another language See Special and International Characters on page 49 In the context of Qedit the term selecting is synonymous with highlighting If text is highlighted it appears on your screen in inverse video If you don t highlight a string of text in your file the only edit operations that are available to you are to type backspace or delete a single character The key to more powerful functions is text selection Here is a partial list of what you can do with the selected text e delete it by pressing the DELETE or BACKSPACE in insert mode key e replace it by typing some new characters e copy it to the Clipboard Toolbar Copy button e cut it from the document and write it to the Clipboard Toolbar Cut button e if the selected text is an embedded file name open the file 92 e Typing Selecting amp Editing Text Qedit for Windows User Manual Shortcut CTRL H or ALT E F Any selected text automatically becomes the insertion point The cursor is not displayed during selection Qedit for Windows User Manual e search for the selected text Toolbar Find button Cursor Position and Appearance During Selection If you select some text the selection replaces
122. ary created by QUIZ or QTP 650 Cognos QKGO execution time parameters file 651 Cognos temporary sort file for QUIZ or QTP 652 Cognos compiled minidictionary file 654 Cognos QUICK debugger symbol file 655 Cognos compiled PDL dictionary file O Nn Appendix B File Types e 233 234 e Appendix B File Types bt841 Boeing lostdisc output bt850 Boeing operator boot strap info bootdata bt860 Boeing report program config bt840 Boeing dumpdst dump Qedit for Windows User Manual Qedit for Windows User Manual 900 vane RQ Desk Diece MACBINARY EIE 299999 Bowing poroiseon NPR Appendix B File Types e 235 236 e Appendix B File Types 1091 FTAM1 File Transfer Access and Management 1 ISO standard 8571 1092 FTAM2 File Transfer Access and Management 2 ISO standard 8571 1093 FTAM3 File Transfer Access and Management 3 ISO standard 8571 wno HPwoRD one O 5 J Q QO Qedit for Windows User Manual mjo miem C fma Pains seer Pits wc Pars se Pais ue Qedit for Windows User Manual Appendix B File Types e 237 238 e Appendix B File Types 1229 CHARD Character set definition 1230 MGCAT Formatted application message catalog 1249 BBNCM Business BASIC V Binary pa N Nn o0 vu Es n 4 gt sa Pakow sie 1272 DIU Document interchange unit 1437 RDICN HPBRW Dictionary Qedit for Windows User Manual Qedit for Windows User Manual 1618
123. aults UNIX MPE and Local Use the TAB key to move between options on the same tab To move from one tab to another simply click the tab name The General Tab General Searching Defaults UNIX MPE Local Caret allowed in undefined areas V Load local files smaller than 32 Kinto memory IV Close connections with no open files V Automatically post Qedit workfiles V Compare timestamps before overwriting on server Use live scrolling for server files Save automatically every 0 minutes Move caret when navigating V Balance punctuation parentheses brackets while typing J Alert sound on unmatched punctuation V Word selection includes trailing spaces on double click Length of Recent Files or Favorites lists 20 General settings in the Qedit Preferences dialog box Getting Started e 13 14 e Getting Started For a description of the options on the General tab go to the following sections Automatically post Qedit workfiles Compare timestamps before overwriting on server and Save automatically see Customizing Saving and Closing Files on page 161 Balance puntuation parentheses brackets while typing and Alert sound on unmatched punctuation see Matching on page 118 Caret allowed in undefined areas see Allowing the Caret in Undefined Areas on page 143 Close connections with no open files see Customizing a Connection on page 59 Color schemes see Customizing Text
124. ays keep the text and cursor visible Searching amp Replacing Features e 143 If you start typing while the cursor is in the undefined area Qedit automatically fills the area up to that point with blanks If you also have enabled Preserve trailing blanks you might start getting error messages as you insert text Automatically Marking Successful Searches To make it easier to move around in a file you can set markers using the Save position command of the Mark menu When the Automatically save position on search option on the Searching page of the Preferences dialog box is enabled Qedit automatically marks a position after a successful Find operation if the search string is different than the previous one Scrolling Method for Host Files Depending on your network or PC scrolling through host files using the scroll box can be slow This is because Qedit is requesting new lines from the server as you move the scroll box You might not actually need these lines however so Qedit now provides the Use live scrolling for server files option of the Preferences menu By default this live scrolling option is disabled This means Qedit will not request new lines from the server until you release the scroll box While you move the scroll box Qedit displays the record number corresponding approximately to that location in the file The record number appears in a box to the left of the scroll bar Also the text already displayed in the window do
125. be converted to the new font However if you change the default font of a file with the Properties command in the Files menu the font in open documents will not change Setting the Default Value for Auto indent If you would like to use the same auto indent setting for all files you have never opened you can set it in the Preferences dialog box 1 Select Preferences from the Options menu 2 When the Qedit Preferences dialog box appears go to the Defaults tab and set Enable auto indentation to the desired state Any new document you open will automatically use the new setting Displaying Invisible Formatting Characters When Opening Files To display invisible formatting characters enable the Show invisibles option in the View menu If you prefer to have invisible formatting characters always appear when opening a file enable the Open files with invisibles shown option on the Defaults tab of the Preferences dialog box Setting the Default Color Scheme Qedit allows you to define your own color schemes for document windows It offers a number of predefined schemes including one for Qedit defaults You can select a color scheme as the overall default from the General page of the Preferences dialog box Qedit for Windows User Manual Text Formatting Features e 121 122 e Text Formatting Features Selected scheme Colors in selected scheme Color Custornization Normal text Caret C Attention Backgr
126. bers Common Replace Operations Shortcut ALT E R Qedit s search functions are further enhanced with a replace function Combined search and replace can provide you with powerful editing capabilities necessary for global changes to a file Replacing Occurrences of a String To find occurrences of a string from a certain point and replace them with another string 1 Select the Replace command in the Edit menu 2 When the Replace dialog box appears enter the string you want to find in the Search for text box and the new string in the Replace with text box Replace Ea Search for data x Replace with more information Options z I Match pattem Regular Expression I Smart search whole words m Range From curent location Entire file I Search in columns through Replace Help Replace dialog box 3 Define the terms of your search operation You get the same search options as on a Find command If you have not limited your search to selected text the default start position of the search is the cursor s current position Qedit finds all occurrences of the string from that point to the end of the file and replaces them If you have limited your search to selected text Qedit replaces the string only in the selection 4 Click Replace to perform the operation 142 e Searching amp Replacing Features Qedit for Windows User Manual Replacing All Occurrences of
127. bug Controls dialog box 5 If you need to install the server programs on multiple hosts simply repeat these steps for each one 10 e Getting Started Qedit for Windows User Manual Support Files Up to version 5 8 10 support files were created in the system root directory usually Windows on Windows 95 and XP or Winnt on Windows NT Qedit for Windows User Manual If you install Qedit in its default location files required by Qedit are copied to a directory called Robelle Qedit on the drive you specified during the installation These files include the tips file the system script library and language templates Other support files are created in the Windows user s application data directory Typically this is Documents and Settings loginUsername Application data Qedit The support files are e Qwin ini This file contains all global configuration settings such as options in the Preferences dialog box the debug options the UNIX port number the MPE server name and the default fonts e Qedconn dat This file contains information about all your connections For security reasons confidential information such as passwords is encrypted This is the default name The connection template file location can be changed in the Configure Server Settings dialog box e Qederr log This file contains the last error message for any internal consistency failure This can sometimes help track down the cause of a problem when tracing is
128. ce after it and insert a dash between the exchange number and the individual number We would use the following substitution string XT N2Z2 3 The list above would then look like 123 456 7890 111 222 4444 908 737 4456 You can use subexpressions to reorder the text in lines For example if we wanted to reverse the telephone numbers showing the last four digits first then the first three digits of the telephone number followed by the area code we could use the following substituion string Last 3 Middle 2 Area 1l Complete 0 Which would then produce the following assuming that we started with the same data in this example and used the same regexp 248 e Appendix C Regular Expressions Qedit for Windows User Manual Qedit for Windows User Manual Last Last Last 7890 Middl 4444 Middl Le Le 4456 Middl Le 456 Area 123 Complete 1234567890 222 Area 111 Complete 1112224444 737 Area 908 Complete 9087374456 Appendix C Regular Expressions e 249 Appendix D Language Templates Overview In order to take advantage of the syntax coloring feature of Qedit the syntax of a language must be defined in a file known as template Language templates are regular text files containing information formatted according XML rules For that reason template files must have a xm1 extension Template Location Qedit for Windows User Manual Robelle supplied language templat
129. ced Files With some compilers it is possible to incorporate text from other files using special statements The most common statement keyword is Include Statements use a leading character and you can see variations like Include Include Include or Include From this point we will just refer to them as Include files or use Include Other languages have Use statements but they work exactly the same as Include statements COBOL has the standard Copy statement to accomplish a similar operation The syntax is a little bit different than Include and Use statements but the functionality is the same reference lines from an external file You can use the other commands List Include List Use or List Copy to search the active document and any referenced file it might contain Qedit searches for appropriate reference statements based on the command you selected opens the referenced file and then searches for the specified search string Referenced files can be nested which means that a referenced file can contain other reference statements When searching for the string Qedit scans the files as they are encountered The output listing then shows the exact sequence as they would be interpreted by a compiler for example Because there can be numerous referenced files to search some operations can be fairly long If this happens Qedit displays a progress dialog box showing the file names being searched While the server searches for the string
130. ced POSIX support POSIX is an acronym for Portable Operating System Interface Because the POSIX standard is based on BSD UNIX and AT amp T s System V Interface MPE has been extended to support an Hierarchical File System HFS similar to the one found on UNIX hosts As a result UNIX file name syntax with some restrictions can be used to navigate the POSIX namespace Important Note Some restrictions apply if your MPE host is running version 4 0 of the operating system You can use the Directory dialog box to view and select files only in the logon group Qedit uses a POSIX feature of MPE to move between groups and directories Because POSIX is only available with MPE iX 4 5 or later you will not be able to switch to a different group dynamically If you need to use the directory listing of another group you have to create a separate connection that logs on immediately to the appropriate group MPE files are also accessible using this notation Whenever possible Qedit displays names using MPE notation However if you move to the POSIX namespace Qedit adjusts the current working directory to POSIX notation MPE names shown in absolute POSIX notation have the account name first followed by the group name and finally the file name For example the Cobol4 file is accessed via POSIX as Green Pub Cobol4 Names in the POSIX namespace can be in either case but they are case sensitive POSIX directories end with a slash character POSIX n
131. changes are discarded For example if you use the CD command the current working directory is changed only for that particular process As soon as you exit from it the CWD returns to its previous value This has serious implications for host commands entered in Qedit If you are using the host command dialog box each command is executed by itself in its own shell process If you execute commands straight from a document a single shell process handles all the commands in the document In the CD example the command is executed and forgotten immediately The next command you enter might fail if it assumes the CD is still effective Worst it can act upon a different set of files An rm command might delete something completely different than what you intended In this situation you have 2 options You can put all your commands in a document and use the Run as host command The other option is to use the Directory dialog box to manually change the CWD to the location where you want to work Interacting with Hosts e 169 Script Based Features Overview Qedit for Windows User Manual Starting with Qedit 4 9 Qedit comes with its own scripting language It s simply called Qedit Scripting Language QSL QSL allows you to extend Qedit s feature set by writing and defining functions to address your editing needs You can also automate file editing for hands off operations For technical information on QSL please refer to the Qedit Script
132. character 251 question mark search pattern 143 at sign search pattern 143 left square bracket metacharacter 251 right square bracket metacharacter 251 circumflex character class negation 252 circumflex metacharacter 251 circumflex search pattern 143 tilde search pattern 143 plus sign metacharacter 251 Dollar Oldpass Oldpass host command 172 A About Qedit dialog 207 Access log file 217 218 220 Access mode 34 Acrobat Reader 11 Active connections 28 Add scripts 177 Adobe Acrobat 11 Allbase syntax coloring 123 Anchor characters 252 Attributes document 75 Qedit for Windows User Manual Auto indent 68 118 default 125 Backreferences regexp 256 Backspace key 91 100 Binary data 82 Braces matching 122 Brackets matching 122 busy workfile 194 224 BYE MPE command 173 C Cache 97 214 Cancel button 33 34 Caret 14 148 Carriage return terminator 68 Caseless search 142 Character class 253 Character set 56 Characters display nonprinting 93 displaying invisible 121 international 51 94 nonprinting 82 91 92 r_ansi font 93 special 51 91 92 189 Checked commands 25 Clipboard 96 local 98 tab characters 104 Close forced 165 COB74XL command 183 COB85XL command 183 COBOL 64 113 tag 133 134 214 automatic 137 manual edit 133 137 COBOL compile MPE 172 COBOL copylib 190 Color adding scheme 128 changing scheme 128 connection default 56 defa
133. chnical support team In order to get a better response and faster resolution there are certain steps you can go through before calling These steps allow you to have as much information as possible available for the technical staff There are basic questions you should ask yourself e Is the problem reproducible e Isit happening on one PC in particular e Is it happening with one server or connection in particular e Has it worked before If so when did it start You should also gather information on the equipment you are using e What type of PC are you using e What type of connection are you using modem LAN Internet etc e What type of server are you connecting to MPE HP UX Windows NT etc e What versions of the operating system s are you using Qedit provides some tools to answer some of these questions You can use the About Qedit command of the Help menu to see part of your PC configuration Qedit for Windows User Manual Troubleshooting e 203 Getting a Trace 204 e Troubleshooting About Gedit for Windows x A robelle solutions technology Qedit 32 bit Edition With Scripting 4 9 May 22000 17 28 32 Copyright 1996 2000 Robelle Solutions Technology Inc Windows NT Windows Version 4 0 Build 1381 Winsock Version 1 1 Winsock Description WinSock 2 0 Winsock Status Running Windows Directory C WINNT Memory Available 45148 KB El About Qedit dialog box This dialog box shows not only Qedit
134. click the menu name To choose a command select it from the list Available commands appear in a solid color Commands that appear dimmed are not available often because a prerequisite action is necessary For example Qedit does not allow you save a file unless there are unsaved changes There are times where commands are available on local files but are dimmed when editing host files This means the command is not supported in the server you currently use If this happens you should make sure you have installed the latest version of the server Some commands also have a submenu with more choices These commands can be identified by the small dark arrow on the right You can also use keystrokes to access menus and their commands You can press the ALT key once to select the File menu To go to a different menu use the cursor keys to move left or right To see the commands in the current menu simply press ENTER You can then use the UP ARROW or DOWN ARROW keys to select a command All menus and some commands have an underlined letter which is called an access key You can combine the ALT key with the access key to quickly display a menu If a menu name is already selected just press an access key to move to and display Qedit for Windows User Manual Qedit for Windows User Manual another menu If commands that have a defined access key are already displayed on a menu you can also use the access key to select them Submenu indicator
135. command produces a list of all processes currently running on the system To get a list of Qedit server processes simply pipe the output from ps to grep as in ps ef grep gedit The output from this command would look something like 12 05 29 ttyp4 grep qedit 09 16 57 opt robelle bin gedit Oct 15 2 opt robelle bin gedit 06 44 22 opt robelle bin qedit Oct 10 opt robelle bin gedit To display information on sockets you can use the net stat command Here is an edited example of a net stat listing netstat Active Internet connections Proto Recv Q Send Q Local Address Foreign Address state 0 0 produx 4279 produx domain TIME_WAIT 0 produx domain produx 4277 TIME_WAIT 0 produx http 22 33 44 55 0r 1126 TIME_WAIT 0 produx 7395 22 56 77 199 1660 ESTABLISHED The Local Address column shows the host name and port number which sockets are using In the example above the host name is produx and the port number is 7395 Qedit default The Foreign Address column provides information on the source workstation Typically this is the IP address of the client PC running Qedit The listing can be quite lengthy If you wish to get only information pertaining to Qedit you could pipe the net stat output into grep as in netstat grep 7395 192 e Network Issues Qedit for Windows User Manual Reference Menu Commands Qedit for Windows User Manual File Menu The File menu on the toolbar contains the
136. contents vary according to where the mouse points You access shortcut menus by right clicking the mouse Shortcut Menu on Text Boxes Typically these menus give you easy access to Clipboard functions such as Cut and Paste In Qedit shortcut menus are available on some text boxes For example if you have copied a file name to the Clipboard and you want to use it to open the file display the Open dialog box and right click in the File name text box Once the shortcut menu is displayed simply select Paste A Windows Primer e 43 44 e A Windows Primer Open Look in 4 My Documents ol le Shortcut to Northwind File name a Unda Files of type an v ut I Openasreac Copy Delete Select All Right click a text box to display a shortcut menu Shortcut Menus on Toolbar Buttons Qedit s toolbar has one special shortcut function If you press one of the three host buttons and keep it down for a few seconds a menu of host options will appear Just select the host name on which you want to open a file open a new file or search the directory To cancel the menu click somewhere else on the screen Qedit for Windows User Manual Qedit Vancouver MPE COBOL4 PUB DEMO File Edit Text Mark View Script Options Window Help Dieli als Ll open remote i spell found spell not found spell bad word len spell bad line len spell no main aux spell no user aux spell no both aux spell user full
137. csseceeeseceeseceeeecsaeeeesseceeeseeneeeeeeeens 144 Setting Default Search Options 0 0 ce eeeccesecseesecseeeeceeeeecsaeceeesecaeeseeneeeeeseeneeeeeeaees 145 Copying amp Printing Files 147 OV ELVICW Se 4 reter ea araa eae ea aa des hice ie bied deed eran beet ore ESETE 147 Copying a Filesi ihc es oleic aE E E a E E EE E E EE es 147 Copying Local Piles 3 snio iu ae rar r E a A E a E an 147 Copying Host Files scctecenaivaeatentnecnied e E iae R KE A TRE ATER EENS 148 Converting a File to Qedit Format rcis snis rsa eih yer AEE EREE EAE a EES 150 Convert Qedit Workfile to Text Format cccccscccsscecsseceseeecseceeeeecseeeeeeeeseenees 151 Pintiisona Local PADtET nnani ner e R a r TR a a dee r 151 Print Options on a Local Printer eeeeeeeseeeeeseeeseseeeerersestsrsrerrsteesterretsrsesrereereresese 151 Printing on a Local Printers so sins det lh ldap aie alae avian 153 Printing opia Host Printer e aa ys seteio fest sth easapsotteanh ates r e aae ee ra ASE aa EEO EEST peaa aE 154 Print Options ona Host Printer iscc c5603 seipcseyoeethasasensidscadetessbecsanesthessveczecssasoseistyesbess 154 Changing the Default Printer in MPE ee ee ceesecsecseeeecnereeceseeecaeceeeseenerrenaeeees 155 Printing on a Host Prititers e een hee nek Mobiola neat 156 Saving amp Closing Files 157 OVEDVICW AE iene tia isan sdavitigial aetna ARAT 157 SAVING a FIC gs ccgecse acces aenea ec a eoar hd peach ara a eaten ea E A ENOTNE E EN PARTE E
138. ction Keys aisiisnananidipeninntauion E E AE a A I RE A 202 Troubleshooting 203 OVERVIEW ee E E re a E E his E teal eee be EE E E EEE EE ea 203 What to do in case of problems eesseeseeseesesssrsesertersesrereerstrsesesteteerstssesestetstsesseseeeereeseee 203 Getting a Trace kri ieoa ra EE E Guise a a E E apis pena deities 204 Server Trace Files niaaa ee Bins ones a er E E AA E A A eheay 206 Changing Debus Settings e aa e EA Ea Ea RE h 206 File Information Dialog BOX ieeisi irate e nonsteam a Keene euE EE EEDE a Eron 206 Document Information oeiee ienee ee areais Et eiaa E E raae ia 207 Connection Mf rmat oM ena or Eea E aoa a E aa EE EE a EEE a ER 208 Transmission MEOrMAti ON ssis itise eseeto serria tp erR TEES EERTE sE epia 209 SIASIA S DE a Vea AES E E E E E EE 209 Cach Statistics tn o ot aa SL E eae aie 210 Connection Problems meina R E nea oe E aes 211 MPE Host Connections seon o E a E R REE Dass 211 Firewall Protocol on MPE Connections seeseseseeseeeseeesrstsreriereresesesrereerseesesrsreerees 213 HP UX H st Connecti Ons aa nnen A e aa a tenes 216 Connection Progress Messages scsscssesecssecseseesecesesecseeseeneeeeceaeceeesecaeeseeneseeeaees 218 Recovering a Filen herons niae oea a a eoa aa E aes ea Ea ds havea haan Ean 219 Recovering Temporary Host Files eseseeeseeeeesesesrsrsreriereresrsrsrtrreretsseserestnsesrsrerrees 219 Local Files Operai N enneren aera eera e A a eaaa E AE EE EE ERa 221
139. current support files to the new location if they do not exist already The original files are not removed but they are not used anymore The install script copies default support files only e The application profile QWIN ini e The document database and its backup QWINDDB dat QWINDDB bkp e The connection template file QEDCONN dat If the connection template file was changed in the Customize Server Settings dialog box that file is not copied e The error log file QEDERR log Uninstalling Qedit for Windows If you want to remove Qedit from your PC you can use the Add Remove Programs function in the Control Panel of Windows 95 Select Qedit for Windows from the application list Customizing the Client Whether you have one user or one hundred users Qedit for Windows can create a comfortable environment for everyone You can customize various features in the Qedit client to make your daily tasks as efficient as possible Each user s settings are 12 e Getting Started Qedit for Windows User Manual Shortcut ALT O P Qedit for Windows User Manual saved in the Qedit Preferences dialog box Choose preferred search defaults navigation tools font settings and file options These default settings are saved until you decide to change them The Preferences Dialog Box To bring up the global Qedit Preferences dialog box choose the Preferences command in the Options menu This dialog box contains six tabs General Searching Def
140. d Cancel Creating a new folder using Windows 95 or Windows NT 4 0 Defining File Options Shortcut ALT F I Qedit for Windows User Manual Each file has its own set of file characteristics These characteristics are saved in the document database New files files that are not in the document database i e files that have never been opened and files in the document database that do not have customized file properties acquire the default settings defined in the Preferences dialog box Once the file is in the document database Qedit uses the saved characteristics on subsequent access To check or change the characteristics of a file 1 Select the File menu and point to Properties 2 When the Properties dialog box appears you will see the following options Creating amp Opening Files e 63 64 e Creating amp Opening Files Yancouver MPE COBOL4 PUB DEMO Properties x Options coex Information Tabs Guides Record length E5 IV Use spaces for tabs I Display detabbed column Sahiba J Preserve trailing blanks MV Auto indent Set color File Properties dialog box e Record length The Record length text box indicates the number of columns available on each line The value shown in the example above is the default for a COBOL file from an HP e3000 host It has a maximum of 66 columns per line because columns to 6 are used for a sequence number and columns 73 to 80 are reserved for comments
141. dard host based Qedit The following characters can be used for other specific pattern searches at sign matches zero or more characters of any type number sign matches exactly one numeric character 0 9 question mark matches exactly one alphabetic character a z A Z tilde matches zero or more space characters amp ampersand matches the next character use amp to look for an sign circumflex and exclamation point are reserved use and to match them e Regular expression Regular expressions use powerful syntax allowing precise definitions of your string search Regular expressions have been around for a long time and are now available on almost any platform For syntax details refer to Appendix C Regular Expression on page 243 Note that server version 4 8 or higher is required e Smart search whole words Search for whole words and ignore embedded words such as cell in excellent Once enabled this option will not change until you disable it The Smart search also depends on the Qedit Language setting For example in COBOL a word can contain a hyphen character so word does not match word option e Range You can limit the search to a specific section of the file specify the starting point of the search and the columns to search 3 When you have finished selecting your options you can proceed in the following three ways e Click Search Forward to search from the specified starting point
142. ding host command dialog box If the dialog box is closed at the time Qedit opens it automatically For faster access to this feature you can use the shortcut menu by clicking the right mouse button The last option of the shortcut menu provides the same functionality Find previous lt lt Find next lt lt Open Neg Save position of insertion point Properties Copy pathname to clipboard Run file as Run File as host command on the shortcut menu The file does not have to contain only CI or shell commands You should think of the file as an MPE job stream or a UNIX shell script It can contain a mix of operating system commands and program input For example on MPE it is perfectly valid to execute the following Qedit for Windows User Manual run suprtool pub robelle Base store Get d sales List standard Exit Similarly on UNIX you can use sqlplus scott tiger select from emp exit Disabling Host Command Execution Although host commands are useful there are situations where you might want to disable this feature for certain users This can be done by inserting the following statement in one of the server configuration files Set Limits Sys Off MPE Commands Execution Host commands are not executed by the server They are executed by a separate command interpreter CI process Qedit for Windows User Manual To execute commands on MPE hosts the server runs an instance of the comma
143. display different sections A scroll bar includes a scroll arrow at both ends and a scroll box Shell On UNIX hosts this is a program that accepts interprets and executes commands that you normally enter in a session or script It is equivalent to the command interpreter on MPE Split bar Yellow line displayed between two panes when using a split view The split bar can be moved to change the size of a pane 262 e Glossary of Terms Qedit for Windows User Manual Qedit for Windows User Manual Split box Red area that appears at the top of a vertical scroll bar and on the left of an horizontal scroll bar The split box can be used to split a document window into two or more panes This allows you to look at different sections of the same file UDC See User Defined Commands User Defined Command UDC MPE on HP e3000 computers allows you to create your own set of commands These new commands can execute one or more other commands MPE command files or other UDCs XML Stands for eXtensible Markup Language Very similar to the popular HTML HyperText Markup Language Glossary of Terms e 263 Index Symbols exclamation point search pattern 143 number sign search pattern 143 dollar sign metacharacter 251 amp ampersand search pattern 143 deft parenthesis metacharacter 252 right parenthesis metacharacter 252 asterisk metacharacter 251 dot metacharacter 251 question mark meta
144. dit opens the file automatically Special and International Characters Long File Names Qedit for Windows User Manual If you do not have a keyboard for languages other than English and you want to insert special characters into your document Windows 95 has a cumbersome way to do this 1 Run the Character Map program from the Accessories group 2 Select a font from the list This should be the same font that you defined using the Properties command of the File menu 3 For each character you want either double click the character or click Copy This automatically adds the character to the Characters to copy box 4 Go back to your Qedit document and paste the copied characters Older versions of Windows only allow eight characters for a file name followed by a 3 character extension e g Readme txt This limit has been removed in Windows 95 and NT The 16 bit version of Qedit if you are still using it can only handle files that follow the old convention If you use this version to edit files on an NT server for example you might see some strange behavior You will be able to open these files but long A Windows Primer e 49 file names will appear different For example a file called Ourproducts html might show up as ourpro 1 htm Also note the difference in the case used The original uses upper and lowercase letters whereas the new name uses only lowercase If you modify this file and save it the old name will be repl
145. dows 95 scsccssssssesecseeseesecseesecsseeecaecaeesecaeeseenaeeecaesateseenees 47 Registering Text Piles isscsts ecvesicusostdaeseseiatnsestesthassessaeluses teat r e A RRE 47 Registering Qedit Scripting Language Files ee ceeseeecseeesceseeeceeeeeeesecneeeeeeeeeens 48 Drag and drop Pile Openi te cashed e r ove caine ast cup eeeoad es E O E wack peepee 48 Drop 0n Desktop conss esee os aee e E EE EEE E E ESE EEE EEEE 48 Drop on Qedit Application Window ssssesesseseseseseeseeresesrsererreersrssrsesrerrersresrsesrerrerse 49 Drop on Taskbar BUtON ssis seee rossos aE E epee EE aE asies 49 Special and International Characters sesessseeeeeeseseseeeeressrstsettteretstssrersteseseseeeetsesseseneeerees 49 Long Fle Names Sarona ie vst ah A E e coheed titer e N 49 Connecting to a Host or Network 51 What do you need to create a Connection ssessseeiesessetssrteeeressststrtetetserstseererstssesesrerrersesree 51 Connecting Through a Network esesssseeiesesssesisresrerssssrststerrersersesestetretseesesrerrereesese 51 Accessing a FileSerVer neersien e KE labios ease A e eben bees 52 ii e Contents Qedit for Windows User Manual Creating a Connection ois aii ineke eons ideas Sante Ge biti atte aie edu aden 52 Creating a Temporary Connection 0 0 eccessecseesecseesecseeecceseceeesecseesecneseecsaeeeseeeeaees 52 Creating a Saved Connection 0 0 ccccsescsssscsseseceseeeeesecseesecneeeesaeceseeceaeeeeeaecateaeenees 52 Copyi
146. e Templates dere eeen e ee aeae saeset sopees ened outers Ea AE paves copiedes ENE 11 Upgrading Qedit for WindOWS e eies e nea rea a eene pap Eea orai iiieoo 12 Uninstalling Qedit for WindOWS ecsssessscesseccssecseesecseesecuaeeecsaecatesecseesecneesecsaeeeeeaecaeeseenees 12 Customizing the Clent icerir e ee REA REET EER N E R N en 12 ThePreferences Dialog BOX oporre esre eee EEEE E AEE EE A ts 13 Customizing the Server n irer ee E E AE n a ea E SEE EEE a Eaa 19 How To Specify To the Server Program ssesseeeesesserssreerereresesrsrerrererssesrsrerrereerses 19 Configuration Files on the Host esessseessesiesesssesisreerererrseststereeretesesrererersesseseereeses 20 Connection Template File 0 0 eeccssecseeeecsseeecsseeeeeeceaeceeseecaeesecnaseeesaeeeesaecaeeeeenees 21 Running Qeditive ienei ce cadeleelaverebes ag lel ia E ceases bedhead doa acta austen dessin 21 EXpirim Versi Oma S65 E E dues sus tuesathiastasthassensteemedstesteeaeensetieed 21 Tip Of the Day TAE AE E E culedidetecedts cts E EE 22 Startup PLOCESS sive esr che e E a Bc daa th Revd EE E re Sela E E OEE NE E ae 22 The Application Window s reenn een a a ea Eee e a e ar E 23 Qedit for Windows User Manual Contents e i Application Icon and Control Menu eeceeesccssesseesecneeeecneeeecsaeceessecaeeseenereeenaeeees 23 Application Title Bar sic ccsvsccesecvseiescanus ccnsescedenceccectbesdevssessgetadecad buena docs edectdentavenesseave 24 Application Men
147. e are too many messages in the server queue in which case Qedit doesn t allow further editing You will be able to resume your work when the icon becomes yellow again or disappears from the status bar The spinning arrows they are animated and really appear to be spinning which indicate an operation in progress appear whenever Qedit thinks the operation might take some time to complete Arrows can appear during these operations e Opening e Closing e Searching e Working e Printing e Pasting e Replacing Splitting a Document into Independent Views You can look at two different sections of the same file by using the split view feature of Qedit If you put your mouse on the split box the pointer changes to a dark bar with an arrow When you drag the split bar in the direction indicated by the arrow you will see two dotted lines dividing your document into two parts It should look like this fj Vancouver MPE COBOL4 PUB DEMO Miel spell workspace 05 spell version no Split box Split bar spell status area 05 spell cond word 686 spell stat ok 68 spell found 88 spell not found 88 spesi bad sord len gt Line 16 Col 20 Split box Splitting a window using the split bar If Qedit cannot split a window at the location you select you will see a single dotted line You can split the screen only when the split bar becomes solid Be careful when you move a split bar If the split bar changes to a dotted line wh
148. e host name This message will not appear if the user has specified an IP address e Connecting to lt hostname gt Qedit for Windows has issued a TCP connection request to the host For an MPE login Qedit for Windows requests a connection to the RPM server for a UNIX login Qedit for Windows connects directly to the Qedit for HP UX server e Logging in UNIX only The connection is up and Qedit for Windows is sending the login transaction This message might be flashed too briefly to see e Awaiting welcome UNIX only Qedit for Windows has sent the login transaction and is waiting for the server s response When the response arrives the login transaction is complete though the login attempt might have been rejected e Logging in and starting server MPE only The connection to the RPM server is up and Qedit for Windows has sent the RPM request The RPM request contains both the login parameters and the name of the program to run hence the message covering both Qedit for Windows is now waiting for a response from the RPM server e Logged in Waiting for server response Qedit for Windows User Manual MPE only The RPM server has responded that the login and process start were successful Qedit for Windows is now waiting for the new server process to connect to it On MPE the server initiates a connection to the client rather than the other way around e Login Failure Messages When the login proce
149. e it to Set then click the button again For each new guide line repeat steps 3 and 4 To save the new guide line s and close the dialog box click OK To save the new guide line s without closing the dialog box click Apply The Apply button is useful when you want to continue working in the Properties dialog box To set guides at regular intervals 1 2 3 Select Properties from the File menu When the Properties dialog box appears select Guides Enter the number of columns between each stop in the Every text box Remember that these intervals start at column 1 For example if you specify a stop every 8 columns guide lines will be set at columns 9 17 25 etc Qedit for Windows User Manual If the new guide lines do not overlap with any current guide lines the button next to the Every text box will be called Set Click it to acknowledge the new setting If the new guide lines overlap with any current guide lines the button next to the Every text box will be called Clear To remove only the guide lines that overlap click Clear To allow overlapping guide lines click the Clear button to change it to Set then click the button again To save the new guide lines and close the dialog box click OK To set the new guide lines without closing the dialog box click Apply The Apply button is useful when you want to continue working in the Properties dialog box If you have the ruler bar enabled the new guide lines are au
150. e lines This block is optional but if specified there must be only one Each block can contain Termination or Positional blocks There can be a mix of Termination and Positional blocks and each continuation identifier must have only 1 character A Termination blocks indicates that the continuation character should be the last character on the line i e the line is going to be continued A continuation character is required for a Termination block A Positional block indicates that the continuation character has to be at a specific location on the line This block has only one attribute e Position is the column number where continuation character should be The position is required and must greater than 0 The continuation character is optional for this type of continuation If specified a continuation line is assumed only if this particular character is used at the defined position If no continuation character is specified then any character found at that position is presumed to be a continuation For exemple this continuation block defines the backslash as an end of line continuation character It also defines the hyphen in column 6 as a continuation lt continuation gt lt termination gt lt termination gt lt positional position 6 gt lt positional gt lt continuation gt Comment Schemes The Comments blocks defines characters or strings used to identify comment text within the file A Comments block is option
151. e text in Qedit for Windows If you select text before deleting it see Selecting Text on page 92 for more information 1 The first and most obvious way to delete text is by pressing the DELETE key This deletes the single character that is immediately to right of the cursor which might be a space character or a TAB character An interesting case is when you go to the end of a line and press DELETE You remove the NEWLINE character between this line and the next effectively appending the next line to the current line 2 Ifyou are in insert mode you can press the BACKSPACE key This key deletes the character before the cursor position effectively moving you back one character and removing it at the same time If you use the HOME and BACKSPACE keys you remove the NEWLINE character and append the current line to the previous line 3 You can highlight some text any sequence of contiguous characters including NEWLINE characters and then press the DELETE or BACKSPACE key The highlighted characters are deleted and the remaining line fragments to the left and right are combined 4 You can also highlight some text and then press the Cut command of the Edit menu This deletes the highlighted text and writes it to the Clipboard You can get the deleted text back with the Paste command in the Edit menu Merging Two Lines Remember that if you delete the end of a line and remove the NEWLINE character you will merge two lines into one I
152. e your changes Inserting Control Characters The character sets for Windows MPE and UNIX include the 32 characters in the ASCII character set that are control functions For example character value 7 in the ASCII character set means ring the bell The host based method of using CTRL G does not insert control characters into a file because this shortcut combination is used for Qedit s Find again function As a result you need another way to insert a control character Windows does not have a standard way to handle control characters and Qedit for Windows cannot do this either There is no keyboard shortcut for inserting special characters Host based Qedit however can handle these characters The workaround is to save the file on your host edit it with host based Qedit and use one of the methods available on the host Typing Selecting amp Editing Text e 89 Inserting Nonprinting Characters Nonprinting characters are special characters whose ASCII values e g 0 to 31 127 etc cannot be displayed in a recognizable form Within most applications these characters have very specific uses including carriage return line feed etc In Qedit nonprinting characters appear as small square boxes within the text fej Vancouver MPE ESCAPEQW PUB DEMO olx comment comment The Echo command below contains an comment lt escape gt sdB to enable highlighting comment on HP terminals echo O amp dB Error Something has gone w
153. eason you might want to save Qedit workfiles as text files when you are finished editing them To convert a text file into a Qedit workfile 1 Open the file you want to convert to the Qedit format 2 Choose the Save As command in the File menu 3 When the Host Save As dialog box appears choose the Save as Qedit Workfile option 4 Enter the new file name Qedit will save this file in the current directory If you want to save the file in a different directory enter a path to another directory Qedit for Windows User Manual 3 including the new file name See Notation in Host Operating Systems on page 67 for more details Click Save Convert Qedit Workfile to Text Format To convert a Qedit workfile into a text file 1 2 Select the File menu point to Open and click Host When the Open Host File dialog box appears select the file that you want to copy Enable the Open a copy option to open a copy of the file you selected The Open a copy option is available in both the Open Host File and Directory dialog boxes If you select multiple files in the Directory dialog box the Open a copy option will apply to all of them Click Open to open a copy of the file Select the Save As command in the File menu When the Host Save As dialog box appears give the file a new name Qedit will save this file in the current directory If you want to save the file in a different directory enter a path to another directory i
154. eate a Qedit for Windows connection to edit files on PC LANs Any file that you can access from other Windows applications can be edited by Qedit for Windows Creating a Connection A connection is defined as a connection name a host name a user login name for UNIX or a hello string for MPE and the passwords needed to access that host You can create two types of connections a temporary connection and a saved connection Saved connections can be accessed quickly because they have already been defined Temporary connections convenient for one time use cease to exist when you close Qedit Creating a Temporary Connection Temporary connections exist as long as you stay in Qedit for Windows This is a very useful feature for a corporate site with hundreds of systems that are accessed occasionally To create a temporary connection 1 Select the File menu and click Host in either the New or Open commands 2 When the New Host File or the Open Host File dialog box appears click Create 3 When the Connection List dialog box appears select the Temporary option 4 Define the characteristics of your connection Temporary connections are not added to the connection list Creating a Saved Connection If you need to use a connection repeatedly you can create it as a saved connection Once you have created a saved connection it is accessible through your connection list until you remove it To create a saved connection 1
155. ecisely as possible the range and increment to use For extremely large files it is possible for the server to run out of line numbers Other files such as COBOL source files might already contain line numbers In this case the server uses these numbers The server makes sure that the line numbers are valid all numeric and in ascending sequence throughout If it encounters an invalid Qedit for Windows User Manual line number the server tries to recover the error and starts assigning line numbers This could also cause the line number to exceed the absolute maximum In these situations Qedit displays the following warning The server ran out of line numbers while texting the file The file may be too large or contain invalid line numbers See line 032980 Server warning 2 When the server runs out of line numbers it simply stops reading the file This means the file as seen in Qedit for Windows does not have all the original lines The user should close the file immediately without saving it The file should be examined closely to determine the cause The possibly invalid line number is displayed as part of the warning message after See line In order to find the corresponding line you should close the file without saving and open it with the Force Unnumbered option enabled Maintaining and Using a List of Favorites The Favorites command on the File menu allows you create and maintain a list of files that you access most
156. ecnaseecseceaeeeesaecateaeeneeaes 119 Ambiguous Language Identification 0 cee eeeesecssesecseeseceeeeecaeeeeesecaeeseeneeeeeseens 119 SQL Language Templates mioa eee a E E R ARES R E 119 Order of Precedence snein n a E Geeta E niaies 120 Customizing Text Formatting Features cscesecsesecsesecssecseeecseesecsaeeeceecsaeeeeesesateseenees 120 Displaying the Ruler Bar When Opening Files eee eeesecseeeecneeeeceseeeeeseeneeeeens 120 Setting the Default Font for Document Windows csescesesecesecreeeecneeeeeeeeneens 121 Setting the Default Value for Auto indent 0 cee ceeecseeseeeecneeeeceseeecsaeeseeseeneeees 121 Displaying Invisible Formatting Characters When Opening Files eeeeeee 121 Setting the Default Color Scheme eeeeeecsesecsseeeeesecseesecneeecsaeeecaecaeeseeneees 121 Line Features 127 OVEIVICW ie aea i E REEE e r EEE EA dducedsycaddaevicavenlaedancdsee EEE REEE ERs 127 R cord N MDETS e a a a AE ATE sada aA a TE E E Sa aaa RSET 127 Host SEA anlo a ASA A E 127 R c rd NUMPETS ceea e e e a e ER 127 Trailing Blanks s iero iae enea a aea re ee R E e T ieee dR aie 128 Preserve Trailing Blanks seivenenesiasnininoii oe e rE as R Ea 128 COBOL Tagsiciint n enoa ea a E a e aoe hi hav aT R E eee 129 COBOL Tags in Server Configuration Files sseseseseseeesseeeeseesesesrerrersrsrerrerereees 129 COBOL Tags inthe Wen tat aaeain a R e a cotindsnes I ETE E ERANS 131 Line et sth s
157. ection option is enabled automatically Copying amp Printing Files e 153 Print RIES r Printer Name HP DeskJet 680C Series Printer Properties Status Default printer Ready Type HP DeskJet 680C Series Printer Where LPT1 Comment r Print range Copies All Number of copies f1 Pages fron tof Selection ob el I J Collate Cancel Windows Print dialog box 3 If you want to send the file to another printer select it from the Name list 4 Select any other options you want to use Number of copies or Properties 5 Click OK to print the file To send the output to a printer on a host see Printing on a Host Printer on page 154 Printing on a Host Printer If you are working on a host file you can print its content to a local printer or one connected on the host computer You cannot print a local file directly to a host printer Print Options on a Host Printer Options in the Print on Host You can also ask Qedit to print a host file on a printer connected to the host You dialog box are only available can specify the print options by using the Print on host command in the File with version 4 6 54 or later menu The Print on host command is not available if you are editing a local file of the server 154 e Copying amp Printing Files Qedit for Windows User Manual Host Device Name I m Print Range ll Selection Format J Print host line numbers
158. ectories must all have three subdirectories Autoload Scripts and Startup Each subdirectory has a specific purpose For details see the Qedit Scripting Language User Manual Qedit for Windows User Manual Managing Scripts Some scripts are designed only for loading This means they cannot be invoked directly but can only add commands to the Script menu These commands then behave like any other Qedit commands and can be used at any time To load a script 1 Select the Manage Scripts command of the Script menu QSLMPE Compile QSLUEiIListAll QSLUiListCopy Add QSLUtilListInclude QSLUtilListUse QSLUEIS ort Renave H E Manage Scripts dialog box 2 3 4 5 6 That s it All the commands from that script are now available Select the Add button Browse your local directories until you find the script file you want Select the file and Open it The script name is automatically added to the list box on the left Select Done To remove a script 1 Select the Manage Scripts command in the Script menu 2 Select the script name from the list box on the left 3 Select Remove The name is removed from the list 4 Select Done For more details on the Manage Scripts dialog box and the Robelle script library refer to the Qedit Scripting Language User Manual Monitoring and Controlling Scripts Qedit for Windows User Manual Most scripts can run from the Script
159. ed column The status bar at the bottom of a document window displays the cursor position relative to the beginning of the file The status bar shows the relative line number and the column number within the line If the file contains tabs and you press the TAB key Qedit moves the cursor to the next defined tab stop and adjusts the column number accordingly If there is text to the right of the cursor when you press TAB the text will also be moved With Display detabbed column enabled the column number on the status bar includes the number of spaces the TAB occupies as if the TAB character had been replaced with spaces see Use spaces for tabs above fj Detabbed te olx Display Detabbed Column enabled Use Spaces For Tabs disabled Tab to jump from column 28 gt bto column 35 oa Line 4 Col 35 Document window with Display detabbed column option enabled If Display detabbed column is disabled the column number on the status bar counts the TAB as one character regardless of the number of spaces it occupies In the example below the text following the TAB is displayed in column 35 but the column number only shows a value of 29 fj Detabbed te olki Display Detabbed Column disabled Use Spaces For Tabs disabled Tab to jump from column 28 gt bto column 35 oa Line 4 Col 29 Document window with Display detabbed column option disabled Preserve trailing blanks
160. ed features 175 Scripting language 175 Scroll 140 bar 41 95 box 225 mouse wheel 140 Scroll lock key 90 Security 3000 57 215 219 Select All text 98 153 154 Selecting line 43 rectangle 44 word 42 66 Selection as host command 170 Seleq 73 SendTo 49 Serial number 8 9 Server configuration 19 159 227 name 216 219 trace 11 warning 82 Server configuration host command 172 Server install 9 Server name 19 Server port number 19 Server settings 213 Server trace 208 Qedit for Windows User Manual Shift column 102 Shift text 103 Shift with tab 103 Shortcut 205 editing 205 menu 46 189 searching 204 Shortcut keys 204 Smart search 64 66 Sort columns 179 text 179 Spaces for tabs 67 trailing 68 132 Special characters 51 91 92 189 Split box 41 collapsing 37 command 37 views 35 124 SQL syntax coloring 123 Square brackets matching 122 Status bar 30 33 40 89 indicators 35 Support files 11 Switching applications 39 Syntax coloring 122 Allbase 123 ambiguity 123 extension 123 language code 123 MySQL 123 Oracle 123 precedence 124 SQL 123 T Tab character 67 92 compress 104 expand 104 shift with 103 stop 114 115 214 Tag 133 134 214 TCP IP 2 53 161 193 telnet 218 221 227 Temporary connection 54 Terminal emulator 64 Terminator CR 68 LF 68 Qedit for Windows User Manual line 68 Terminator default line 137 Text 91 adding 91 copying 98 deleting 100 finding 142
161. ed file name For local files this is simply the name itself including any extensions e g Readme txt For host files the file name is prefixed by the connection name In the example above the connection name was Vancouver MPE followed by a colon and the file name Qedit for Windows User Manual Text file Qedit workfile ra Write access x Read only icon Qedit for Windows User Manual e Windows control tools The tools on the right hand side of the title bar are the standard control buttons provided in Windows 95 Document Workspace The document workspace is the area in which a file appears within the document window As you move through the file Qedit displays only the part of the file you need to see and records any changes you make Document Status Bar The status bar is a dynamic area with a number of indicators and values It changes with almost every action you perform on the document workspace Typically the status bar displays the document type the access mode a Cancel button and the current cursor position Access mode Cancel button F X Line 1 Col 7 Document type Cursor position Document window status bar Document Type The document type indicates whether you are working with a normal text file or a Qedit workfile Regular text files can be found on both local and host files If the document type icon has black and red lines it means the file has been modified but has not bee
162. ed time Qedit was started again The modify time now showed 12 08 P M This was closer but it was still one hour off It should have been 11 08 A M Perhaps the problem was that the TZ variable on the Vancouver host was set to PST8 instead of PDT7 How can the TZ variable be checked How can the variable be set for the MPE Qedit server Put this command in your Qeditmgr Pub Robelle file setvar TZ PST8 UNIX options specifying Daylight Saving Time To check the Qedit modification times on the UNIX server in Vancouver telnet was used to access the West Coast UNIX system and touch was used to update the timestamp of the file Then the file was listed in the UNIX shell users ralph 11 canada rw rw rw 1 ralph users 7301 Sep 25 10 38 canada A 10 38 A M modification time in Vancouver is 1 38 P M in Anguilla Just for thoroughness the time zone variable and the current time on the UNIX system were also checked users ralph echo TZ PST8PDT users bobgreen date Thu Sep 25 10 45 42 PDT 1997 Now the time was correct and showed that it was PDT The TZ variable was a little different from the MPE system It seemed to be saying that the time zone is GMT 8 but the system also recognizes Pacific Daylight Time Troubleshooting e 223 Directory for daffy Files View h J users bobgreen Pc i 4 2 1994 2 57 41 PM 9 25 1997 1 38 23 PM 12 5 1996 2 02 14 PM 6 5 1996 1 30 50 PM 7 31 1997 1 05 47 PM 6 28 1994 9 29 43 A
163. edit shortcut icon The pointer should change to an arrow with a small plus sign enclosed in a square 3 As the pointer hovers above the icon the icon is dimmed At that point drop the file on the icon i e release the mouse button 4 This operation automatically launches Qedit and opens the file Qedit for Windows User Manual Drop on Qedit Application Window If Qedit is already running and the application window is visible do 1 Click on the file you want to open You would typically use Windows Explorer to locate the file 2 Drag it over to the Qedit application window The pointer should change to a dimmed outlined square with a small plus sign enclosed in a square 3 At that point drop the file on the Qedit window i e release the mouse button 4 Qedit opens the file automatically Drop on Taskbar Button If Qedit is running but its application window is not immediately visible it might have been minimized It should appear as a button on the Windows taskbar In that case you should 1 Click on the file you want to open You would typically use Windows Explorer to locate the file 2 Drag it over to the Qedit button on the Windows taskbar The pointer should change to a dimmed document icon 3 Leave the pointer over the button for a few seconds Windows should restore the application window 4 Move the pointer to the application window 5 At that point drop the file i e release the mouse button 6 Qe
164. ee EE Config Forms Ambebhci Cookies Help Application Data E Cursors Hpuninst Bcimage Desktop Icons CatRoot C Favorites Glini Command Fonts Java fenm SS Files of type Text files txt x Cancel All files Text files txt Select a file filter on local files Open as read only If you open a local file with write access the default you can of course make changes to it If you save these changes you effectively erase the old version of the file You can however protect yourself from modifying a file by enabling the Open as read only option before you open the file Windows will mark a file opened with write access as busy In Windows 95 some applications automatically convert any subsequent opens into read only mode Qedit allows you to open the file again but it will give you an Error deleting a local file permission denied error message when you attempt to save changes to the file Qedit does not stop you from opening the file again Before you open a file the buttons and the directory listing on the Open dialog box allow you to perform the following operations navigate through folders create a new folder Create New Folder button list the contents of a directory List button list the details of a directory Details button display all files of a specific type 3 Open a file by double clicking it or by entering a File name and clicking the Open button
165. eeeesesesesesreeeersrstststerreteersesrererretseesesrerreresrse 38 Closing a WindOW miceinn sranna esate ean R pa eer 38 Mouse Operations s s inene nper a a a E E E A EE A E 38 Using Mouse Button Siin neren r a a e E E e ATA tits 39 Selecting Text with a MOUSE 00 ee cessecseeescnsesecsseceeesecseesecneesecsaeeeeaecaeeseenerrenaeeess 40 Selecting More Text iccantiteavn aii baeid ideas tis T a E aE Auch 41 Extending a S lections cornine e eae i oriee i iran Ea a e 41 Re tang l r SElECt Ons as arara e Ea EE e EEA EER SESER 42 Selecting a Menu Command s s ce cececcssesccssecssesecseceeceseeecesecseesecnesseesaeeeceaeeaeeaeeneeats 43 Selecting Toolbar Buttons aae oren ees aa aenea sigue ese e Eeo PA ap NESE EEEE swish OTE ER p ese 43 Selecting from a Listo e EE Hon nL eee iin 43 Shortcut Menus in Windows 95 uc eeceescsseeeeesecseeseceeseceseeecaecasesecnevseceaseecsaecaeesecneeatenaeeeeegs 43 Shortcut Menu on Text Boxes s s c ssssccsessseecbssscsssssestayvbesssbenanvscbsasssesvenevepeososcgesten set 43 Shortcut Menus on Toolbar Buttons eee ee eeceeeeceeeeeseceseceseceaeceeecseeeaeeeneeeeeees 44 Shortcut Menu on Document Workspace e cee eceecceeceseceseceseceseceecseeeseeeaeeeeeees 45 Send To Function in Windows 95 aoii ce ceecsseecsssecsseseceesecseeeceaecssesecseesecsaeeeeeaecaeesecnesseenaeseeegs 46 Adding Qedit as a Send To Target cceeecsesscssseccssceeeceecsecsaseecsaecaeesecneeseenaseeeeas 46 Registering File Types in Win
166. elect print related commands Qedit Vancouver MPE COBOL4 PUB DEMO Jof x Bl File Edit Text Mark View Script Options Window Help lej x Ci co al ajal eAlsrle al le Print Page Setup if not spell stat ok the perform 98 spell error H call SPELLEND using spell workspace spell mode1 spell status area spell dummy arg if not spell stat ok then perform 96 spell error v 4 gt B X Line 45 Col 7 Print on host printer NUM 7 Click and hold the Print button to get the print shortcut menu 156 e Copying amp Printing Files Qedit for Windows User Manual Saving amp Closing Files Overview Saving a File Qedit for Windows User Manual You can quickly save and close files in Qedit both explicitly and implicitly The familiar Windows interface makes saving local files an easy routine to develop Changes to Qedit workfiles are immediately posted to the hard disc so your work is automatically saved Closing files is equally simple Whether you close individual files or the program itself you are prompted with saving options before a file is closed Which files do you need to save Just because you typed some lines into a new or existing file does not mean that your work has been saved If there is a problem with the PC or the server or the TCP IP connection between them stops it is possible that you will lose the work you have done That is why Qed
167. eme for individual files The new default color scheme is only going to take effect when the connection is closed If it s already opened you should close it and re open it 7 Enter the Login or Hello string 8 When the Add button appears enter your password If your system requires one or more passwords enter them in the appropriate text boxes Passwords are saved in the connection template file When the prompt option is selected the corresponding text box becomes unavailable and Qedit will prompt you for a password every time it tries to establish this connection If you prefer to be prompted for a password you can choose the Prompt option 9 Click Add to create the connection and to save it in your connection list Now you can use this saved connection to access your host system You can create as many connections as you need Remember each connection is associated with a specific user login so you might need several connections to a single host if you need to log in as different users Defining an MPE Host Connection To select the MPE option in the Connection List dialog box your HP e3000 host must run the MPE iX operating system with the Qedit server software installed Qedit server does not support Classic HP e3000s that run MPE V MPE connections must include the following information e Use firewall protocol In most situations you do not have to do anything special to connect to an HP e3000 host However some c
168. en directory dialog boxes on connections that are forced to close Qedit for Windows User Manual Connecting to a Host or Network e 59 Creating amp Opening Files Creating Files You can create a new file on an MPE or HP UX host or on your PC In Windows terminology creating a file from scratch is called the New operation while Open usually refers to an existing file Creating a New Host File Shortcut CTRL SHIFT N To create a new file on a host system h 1 Select the File menu point to Host and click New Toolbar 2 When the following dialog box appears define the file s characteristics New Host File x Connection Vancouver UX x Create produs Record length e1 72 Language Data X Pascab Powerhouse wo New Host File dialog box e First select a Connection which is a host system and specific login name and security If you need to use a connection repeatedly you can create a new saved connection See Creating a Saved Connection on page 52 Once you have created a saved connection it is accessible through your connection list until you remove it from the list e Next select a Language for your file This is not a spoken language such as French German or English but a computer language like COBOL C PowerHouse or Data the default The Language is important because it determines how the Smart string option will work i e hyphen Qedit for Windows User Manual Creating amp
169. en terminates If the login information is correct the server process changes its user id and group id to the ones that correspond to the user name defined in the connection Using a cd command the server then goes to the home directory for that user as defined in the etc passwd file The server picks up a lot of information from the etc passwd file but it does not run the default shell and does not set any of your default environment variables such as PATH TERM etc If the link is established the file is opened and data is transferred between the server and the client Troubleshooting e 217 218 e Troubleshooting Connection Progress Messages When the user instructs Qedit to log on to a host by opening a file on an unused connection or connecting with the Login at startup option enabled Qedit for Windows begins a multistep operation to complete the request Each of the steps is accompanied by a progress message in the Login dialog box Login Vancouver UX Unable to find address for produ Login dialog box The progress messages are designed to be friendly to the user but as a result are not as explicit to a support engineer In addition if any step fails Qedit for Windows issues a user friendly message rather than a technical one Here is the meaning of the user friendly messages translated into technical terms e Finding address for lt hostname gt Qedit for Windows has issued a DNS request to resolve th
170. ences you can have separate lines just for them For example you can define a few lines for inverse video blinking characters inverse video off etc Nonprinting Characters for Reflection Users If you have the Reflection terminal emulator from WRQ Inc you can use one of the fonts provided with the software to display nonprinting characters You can create the Specials library file as described in Inserting Nonprinting Characters on page 90 With the library file open change the display font to r_ansi This displays most nonprinting characters as two tiny characters on top of each other For example a bell character appears as a small b over a small an escape character as a small e over a small c and so on You still cannot enter these characters but at least you can see what they are Qedit does not display line formatting characters such as carriage return line feed and horizontal tabs it interprets them instead Qedit for Windows User Manual Typing Selecting amp Editing Text e 91 Selecting Text Shortcut CTRL C or ALT E C Shortcut CTRL X or ALT E T Shortcut CTRL D or ALT F O B specials tet of x BACKSPACE HORIZONTAL TAB LINEFEED VERTICAL TAB FORMFEED CARRIAGE RETURN SHIFTOUT SHIFTIN DLE DC1 XON DC2 DC3 XOFF DC4 NAK AZ AOC WO NO KO COHN ON gt Av K Line 9 Col 1 Nonprinting characters with the r_ansi Reflection font Inserting Special and International Ch
171. enter users demo public_html explicit or users demo public_html implicit Even if users demo is the home directory for the demo user you cannot simply enter public_html or public_html because you will get this error Login Unable to change directory Copying a Saved Connection You can use an existing connection as a template for a new connection To copy a connection 1 2 Select the Connections command in the Options menu When the Connection List dialog box appears select the connection you want to copy from the Connection Name list Give the connection a new name This will copy the original connection and create a new connection The original connection does not change it remains in the connection list This allows you to use an existing connection as a template for new ones NOTE For the time being we recommend that you retype the passwords on new connections If you have modified only the host login or passwords click Update to save the new values If you have created a new connection click Add Click Done to close the dialog box Opening a Connection Opening a Temporary Connection As soon as you define a temporary connection you can open it A temporary connection stays open until you quit Qedit for Windows 56 e Connecting to a Host or Network Qedit for Windows User Manual Opening a Saved Connection Once you have added a saved connection to your list you can use it repeatedly and
172. enu 2 To find the first or last occurrence of a string in a file enable the Entire file option instead of the From current location option 3 Define the remaining terms of your search See Defining the Terms of a Search above for a list of terms 4 Click Search Reverse or Search Forward to perform the search operation If Entire file is enabled and you select Select Reverse Qedit finds the last occurrence of the string If you select Select Forward Qedit finds the first occurrence of the string Finding a Highlighted Word To find the next occurrence of a highlighted word use the Find highlighted command in the Edit menu To find the previous occurrence of a highlighted word use the Find previous highlighted command in the Edit menu These commands use the terms defined in the last Find operation NOTE The Find previous and Find next buttons always look for the last string defined in a search operation not the currently highlighted text Limiting a Search to Part of a File To limit a search operation to part of a file 1 Highlight the section you want to search 2 Select the Find command in the Edit menu 3 When the Find String dialog box appears you will see a new option in the Range box Selection Only replaces From current location Enable this new option 140 e Searching amp Replacing Features Qedit for Windows User Manual Shortcut CTRL J The Line number and Record number options are available o
173. er Manual Shortcut ALT T L Shortcut ALT T R This is not allowed if there is an active rectangular selection Warning this behavior is different than in previous versions The Detab and Entab commands work only on complete lines Qedit for Windows User Manual move the text in that direction which is similar to inserting a number of spaces at the beginning of a line If you do not have an active selection the modification is going to be applied to the whole file as indicated by the Entire file option If you have selected some text the Selection only option is enabled To shift entire lines left or right see Shifting to the Next Tab Stop on page 101 Shifting to the Next Tab Stop If you want to quickly align text to the next tab stop you can use the Shift left or Shift right commands on the Text menu You have to set some tab stops in the file to use these commands The shifting is done at the beginning of the line If the Use spaces for tabs file property is enabled Qedit inserts space characters in column one If Use spaces for tabs is disabled Qedit inserts a tab character in column one If you use Shift left the text moves to the previous tab stop on its respective line If you use Shift right the text is moved to the next tab stop on its respective line If the text cannot be shifted further Qedit simply stops shifting For example if you keep using Shift left all the lines would eventually be left jus
174. ere are also implicit closes Implicit closes occur when you Exit from Qedit or when you Disconnect from a host Closing a File In both local and host files you can explicitly close the currently active edit window by using the Close command in the File menu There is no corresponding toolbar button In Windows 95 you can use the Close button in the top right corner of the window You can also use the CTRL F4 shortcut The edit window you closed should disappear and if you have other files opened another one will take its place on your screen What if there are unsaved changes If you have made changes to the file and not saved them Qedit will ask you if you want to save your changes N Save changes to Vancouver UX Untitled 2 4 No Cancel Save confirmation dialog box You have three ways to respond e Yes Qedit saves the file If the file has not been named yet Qedit also prompts you for a file name as if you had selected the Save As command e No Qedit closes the file and your latest changes are lost e Cancel Qedit cancels the close operation and brings you back to the edit window Qedit for Windows User Manual What happens to connections when you close a file When you close a host file Qedit usually leaves your connection to that host active in case you want to open another file on the same host For more information see Closing a Connection on page 59 and Closing Connections witho
175. error message It does not provide any hints as to the cause If the login information is complete RPM initiates a new programmatic session on the HP e3000 These sessions however are not identical to interactive sessions initiated on terminals These sessions do not count against the system s user license and logon UDCs are not executed If you are using Security 3000 from VESOFT and you want to implement the same level of security for network logons you need to run a job called Backg at all times Please refer to Security 3000 s documentation for more details Qedit for Windows works with Security 3000 as long as you are using passwords for job names users accounts and or groups Dynamic password prompting is not supported You cannot send messages using MPE s Tell command either FTP s implementation on MPE also uses RPM as a login mechanism If you have difficulty connecting with Qedit for Windows you should try to establish an ftp connection If the same problem occurs with ftp you should focus your attention on the HP3000 security settings If ftp works the problem lies between the Qedit client and server Next RPM runs an instance of MPE s command interpreter Ci Pub Sys It passes a command to the CI so that the Qedit server program gets started The server program name is determined by the Server command in the Options menu The default name is Qedit Pub Robelle This is where host based Qedit is usually installed
176. es are stored in the system language subdirectory below the Qedit base directory e g robelle qedit These files should not be modified as they might be overwritten when a new version is installed If you wish to create new templates or modify one of Robelle s templates you should create them in user language Typically the user subdirectory contains files that have been customized and should be shared by all Qedit users The system and user directories are always scanned You can create your own language templates and store them the location of your choice You simply have to specify the location on the General page of the Preferences dialog box When Qedit starts up it scans all the templates found at the above locations and loads the definitions into internal structures These structures do not change after that point To use a new or updated language template you have to exit out of Qedit and start it up again Here are the language templates supplied by Robelle e allbase xml Allbase SQL e c xml C and C e cobol xml Cobol Cobfree e cobx xml CobolX e fortran77 xml Appendix D Language Templates e 251 e html xml e java xml e job xml MPE commands e MySQL xml MySQL SQL e oracle xml Oracle SQL e pascalix xml e powerhouse xml e qsl xml e spl xml e xml xml Which Language See the host based Qedit User Manual for details Qedit uses different methods to determine the language of a
177. es not change or move until you release the scroll box fe Vancouver MPE COBOL4 PUB DEMO Miel E3 call SPELLCONFIG using spell works spell model spell statu spell hyphe spell durmy if not spell stat ok then perform 98 spell error N call SPELLEND using spell workspac spell model spell status a spell dummy ar if not spell stat ok then perform 96 spell error wo A Line 43 Col 7 The record number appears in a small box during passive scrolling When enabled Qedit requests lines as you move the scroll box If you have a fast network or if most of the file is already in the cache you will not see any delays The text in the document window will move up and down as you move the scroll box 144 e Searching amp Replacing Features Qedit for Windows User Manual Setting Default Search Options You can save your favorite search options Search entire file Ignore case Smart search as the default settings for a Find operation To set your defaults select Preferences in the Options menu When the Preferences dialog box appears enable your choice of options in Search Defaults box Search options have three different settings If an option is disabled e g Smart search the corresponding option in the Find String dialog box will also be disabled If an option is enabled e g Ignore case the corresponding option in the dialog box will also be enabled If an option appears dimmed e g Search entire f
178. es on the UNIX system When the time on the Vancouver system was checked it looked correct showtime THU SEP 25 1997 10 19 AM When the clock on the Anguilla PC Windows NT 3 51 was checked it also showed the correct local time Although Windows 95 doesn t have a clock program it does show the time at the right edge of the taskbar What else is there to check The time zone configuration on the Anguilla PC was checked In Windows NT 3 51 the Date Time was checked on the Control Panel program group Control Panel il Ab e Color Fonts Ports Mouse Desktop Keyboard 2 A E aa B International System Date Time Console Cursors Displa Eg fe B Licensing Sound Drivers MIDI Mapper Sound Mapper Network 3 Server Services Devices Changes the date time and time zone of your computer s clock Windows NT 3 51 Control Panel program group Qedit for Windows User Manual Qedit for Windows User Manual The Date Time showed that the Anguilla PC was set to Greenwich England or some place in that time zone Date 9 25 97 Time Local 1 23 20 PM S Time Zone GMT Greenwich Mean Time Dublin Edinburgh London E 0 Windows NT 3 51 Date Time control panel settings The time zone had to be adjusted to Atlantic Time Canada The automatic adjustment had to be disabled for Daylight Saving Time because Anguilla never goes on Daylight Saving Time To check the file s modifi
179. es the Clipboard appear empty to another PC application If you run into this problem you have two options 1 You can copy the text in chunks For each chunk copy it to the Clipboard so that it is effectively brought into cache Then you can paste it into the target application 2 You can also force Qedit to put all the lines that you select into the document cache First choose Copy Special from the Edit menu This brings the following dialog box Copy Special x Expand tabs while copying Help Cancel Copy Special dialog box with Copy to local clipboard option Typing Selecting amp Editing Text e 95 Shortcut CTRL A Shortcut CTRL C Er Toolbar Source and target files on the same connection Source and target files on different systems Shortcut CTRL V Toolbar l Enable Copy to local Clipboard and select Copy Once the copy operation is completed the selected lines are available on the Clipboard There is no preset limit to the size of the local Clipboard The amount of text that can be copied to the Clipboard can be different for each user because it is determined by the PC configuration If you have to deal with tab characters in files on different platforms you can use the Expand tabs while copying option which is explained in Expanding Tabs in Clipboard on page 102 Copying Text If you want to copy some text you can easily store it on the Clipboard To copy text to the Clipboard
180. f a String cceeceesseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenees 140 Finding a Highlighted Word 0 ceecceesceescesecesecesecneceeecaeeeaeeeseesneeseeeeeeneeeeseneenaes 140 Limiting a Search to Part of a File ceccscecsseessesceesceeseeeeceeceseceeecaeceaecaeeeneenaeeaes 140 Searching im Columns eren aa E EEE E AE TEON 141 Finding a Line Number in a Host File ssssnseeseneeseeeessesessseserseseesessrseessesersersersess 141 Finding a Record Number cc ccscceecceeeceseeeeceecesecaeceaecacecaeeeneeeaeeeseeeeeeereeereneees 142 Common Replace Operations isese iare erie ee eeno Ea i Ea E E EE EEEE E 142 Replacing Occurrences of a String eesseeeesesesrstsrserereesrstsrerteretesesesreessesisrerrereees 142 Replacing All Occurrences of a String eeeseeeeeressersesrrerereresrsesrereereresrsrsrerrerseeeee 143 Qedit for Windows User Manual Contents e v Replacing a String Based on Pattern Matching ee eeeeeceeesecseeeecneeeeeecneeeeesaees 143 Replacing a String Using Regular Expressions sccssessescseeceeeeceeeeeeeeeneteeeeaees 143 Customizing Your Search Options cc cesessscscsseesecseseeceseeecssecseesccneeeesaeeecsaecatesesnesenenaeeess 143 Allowing the Caret in Undefined Areas 0 cceesscsecsecseesecneeeeceaeeeeesecaeeseeneseeeeaees 143 Automatically Marking Successful Searches 0 ceesssessceseeeceseeeeeseceeeeeeeeeeeeaees 144 Scrolling Method for Host Files cccecsssccsese
181. f the new line exceeds the file s maximum line length which is determined by the Language option you will get an error message that says The resulting line would be too long If you need to remove the NEWLINE character you will have to break one or both lines into shorter lines before you will be allowed to merge the pieces together Working with Columns and Tabs Server version 4 8 or higher is required Qedit provides a number of commands to easily deal with text in specific columns Some of the commands are in the Column submenu of the Edit menu and others are in the Text menu The Find and Replace dialog boxes also have features that help you deal with columnar data Throughout these menus column numbers are relative to the Language of the file For most files the first column is one For some languages such as COBOL the 98 e Typing Selecting amp Editing Text Qedit for Windows User Manual first column is seven Values in text boxes must be entered accordingly For example if you want to delete the first two columns of a COBX file you have to enter seven and eight as column values Deleting Text in Columns Shortcut ALT E O D If you want to remove or replace text between two columns use the Delete command of the Edit menu Delete Columns x From To 23 30 Selection only Entire file Tl Fill with spaces Help Cancel Delete Columns dialog box Enter the starting column number in the F
182. fer to the Qedit for MPE User Manual Start the server program with the d argument run gqedit pub robelle info d 7395 Note that a space is required between the argument name d and the port number 7395 The number besides the argument is the port number where incoming Qedit for Windows connection requests are sent to The main server process is listening for requests on that port Typically this is done inside a job stream that runs continuously You can find a sample stream in Qserver Qedit job Robelle on the host If the job is not running new connections cannot be established The server then initializes its environment One of the first things it does is open the log files If it cannot open them it prints a message on the console and terminates Troubleshooting e 213 Server debugging mode can be enabled in the Debug Controls dialog box If you are using a trial version the server name is Qedit Pubtri Robelle thus the log files will be in Qlogtri Robelle 214 e Troubleshooting These log files are used to keep track of the server activities and optionally record additional events for debugging purposes On MPE hosts the log files are created in a group called Qlog which is in the same account as the server program For example if the MPE Server Name in the Configure Server Settings dialog box is Qedit Pub Robelle the log files will be in the group Qlog Robelle The log files are called Error Access and
183. ference would end up with the original text Let s say we have a file that contains a series of phone numbers In North America and possibly other parts of the world phone numbers contain a 3 digit area code followed by a 3 digit exchange number and finally a 4 digit individual number Unfortunately in our case the phone numbers are just series of 10 numeric digits without separators For example 1234567890 1112224444 9087374456 We would like a fast and easy way to format them so the numbers are easier to read To find all these strings we can use the following regexp 0 9 0 9 0 9 0 9 0 9 0 9 0 9 0 9 0 9 0 9 We use the 0 9 character class to specify that we are expecting numeric digits only There are 3 subpatterns in the regexp Each subpattern is enclosed in a set of parentheses The first subpattern repeats the numeric character class 3 times It represents the digits that are part of the area code This is subpattern 1 The second subpattern also has the character class repeated 3 times These represents the exchange number This is subpattern 2 The third and last subpattern uses the character class repeated 4 times These represents the individual number This is subpattern 3 Subpattern 0 represents all 10 digits To reformat we can now combine backreferences with other characters to format the numbers anyway we like Let s say we want to put the area code in parentheses insert a spa
184. file For local files and HP UX files syntax coloring uses the file extension to determine its language When you open an MPE host file the MPE server looks at physical characteristics of the file and its filecode If it can the server assigns a language based on that information If the file is in the POSIX namespace the server also looks at the file extension The server communicates the language information to the client When you open a file for the first time the client uses the server information and stores it in the document database The client relies and uses the document database from that point You can change the language in the client at any time The new information is saved in the document database This means that opening a file in host based Qedit might get a different language than opening it in Qedit for Windows It also means that the client always uses the language that you defined last time you accessed the file Language Template Format Template files use XML syntax Here are some general rules used in the templates e Description of the language is done using lt starttag gt lt endtag gt blocks e Blocks can be nested In other words a block can contain other lt starttag gt lt endtag gt blocks e Tags can contain optional attributes e Attributes are delimited by one or more spaces e Attribute values must be enclosed in double quotes e To avoid confusion and minimize parsing errors enter deli
185. for repetition of characters If there is potential for a character to appear more than once you can use the asterisk or plus sign quantifiers The quantifier is applied to the character to its immediate left There is a very small difference between the two quantifiers The asterisk represents zero or more occurrences of the preceding character That is the character is optional but if it is there it can repeat multiple times The plus sign represents One or more occurrences This means the character must appear at least once but it can appear multiple times ab c Matches ac abc abbc and so on ab c Matches abc abbc but not ac When you have to check for a fixed string of characters it is easy enough to simply type it at the actual regexp Entering abc123 only finds exact matches What if you want to find the string abc followed by a numeric digit There are no specific metacharacters for digits or alphabetic characters However regular expressions have a concept called character class to address these issues Actually character class is a lot more powerful and flexible than metacharacters for specific types of text A character class is enclosed between square brackets Beware that most regexp metacharacters in the list above lose their meanings inside a character class The start of line anchor acquires a different definition and a new metacharacter hyphen appears A character class is a list of possible values for that positi
186. g box or use the Save as command and enter the original file name Remember that changing the Preferences option will be applied to all your files after that The resulting line would be too long The edit operation you are trying to perform would cause the current line to exceed the defined maximum length of the file This message often appears if you try to combine two lines by deleting the end of line character or paste some text from the Clipboard The server file is full Server error 38 Unlike local files files on MPE hosts can have a preset limit thus you cannot add new text indefinitely One way to get around this error is to 1 Close the file 2 Open the same file using Open a copy 3 Open the File menu and select Save as 4 Type the original file name in the File name text box 5 Select Save as Qedit workfile 6 Click Save WinHelp cannot find the Help file A newer version of help is needed Make sure you have the correct Help files for the version of Qedit you are using Typically you get this error if you have the 16 bit Help file while using the 32 bit Qedit program or vice versa Unable to complete login the host refused the connection The Qedit for HP UX server program is not running or you have configured a different port number Unable to find address for lt hostname gt Qedit for Windows was unable to get the IP address for the specified host Unable to open lt file name gt on lt connection
187. g qedit access log usr robelle log qedit error log usr robelle log qedit trace log The server trace facility can be enabled by checking the Enable trace option of the Server Trace Options The facility is then activated for all connections initiated by this user When debugging connection problems at a minimum the following options should be enabled e Messages from host e Messages to host e Raw buffers from host e Raw buffers to host Changing Debug Settings If you wish to change the debug settings temporarily click the Apply button The new settings are effective from that point but are only valid for the duration of the current Qedit for Windows instance As soon as you quit Qedit returns to the permanent settings If you want the new settings to be permanent click Save File Information Dialog Box Qedit for Windows keeps track of certain information about the connection and the document you are currently working on This information can be analyzed to identify potential problems To view the information select the File menu and point to Properties When the Properties dialog box appears click the Information tab Qedit for Windows User Manual 206 e Troubleshooting Qedit for Windows User Manual Vancouver MPE COBOL4 PUB DEMO Properties Options COBX Information Tabs Guides File information for COBOL4 PUB DEMO Document Lines 118 Maximum Width 74 Syntax coloring C
188. ge of your system s normal usage you can decide which processes are valid In this case ricky s process is suspect because it started before the main listener process Oct 15 Invalid or ghost processes can be Qedit for Windows User Manual removed with the UNIX kill command For example if you want to get rid of ricky s process enter the command followed by the process id number showing in the second column kill 15948 Looking at Server Connections Users require special capabilities to run nettool From a system management point of view it is sometimes useful to find current connections to a host Both MPE and UNIX hosts have the information available through commands or utilities MPE Connection List The sockinfo command of the net tool program displays information on sockets currently used on the host The complete program name is nettool net sys nettool net sys NETTOOL Version BO6000A1L Enter HELP HELP for an explanation of the help facility Enter HELP OPERATION for guidance on NETTOOL use Commands can be abbreviated HELP keywords cannot Menu specific commands for the ROOT RESOURCE CONFIG NAMEADDR PING STATUS NMDUMP X25STAT X25CHECK IPCINT XPVAL XPPERF QVALNS NSTEST LOOPINIT NSLOGON SOCKINFO filters 1 gt gt gt At the nettool prompt you then enter the sockinfo command The program automatically goes to the Global Display where all currently opened sockets are listed On a busy system
189. gh 9 and the underscore character 256 e Appendix D Language Templates Qedit for Windows User Manual lt tokencharset gt A Za z0 9_ lt tokencharset gt Keywords The Keyword blocks are used to specify all reserved words for the corresponding language Each block defines one keyword There can be as many as needed and each one can be as long as needed In this short example we define four keywords While Break Move and Perform lt keyword gt while lt keyword gt lt keyword gt break lt keyword gt lt keyword gt move lt keyword gt lt keyword gt perform lt keyword gt Qedit for Windows User Manual Appendix D Language Templates e 257 Glossary of Terms Qedit for Windows User Manual Access keys Underlined character in menu and command names Combined with the ALT key they allow quick access to functions without using the mouse or the cursor keys They are sometimes called mnemonics Active The active document window displays the file in which the changes are going to be applied Caret Character indicating the location for the next operation Its functionality is equivalent to the insertion point A caret is usually represented by a character resembling a lowercase V upside down Cl See Command interpreter Command interpreter CI On MPE hosts the program that is automatically initiated in a session or job The CI accepts interprets and executes the operating system commands on your beha
190. gins 157 page headings 156 page setup 155 wrap lines 156 Printer host 159 Process ID 212 Proxy server 193 Punctuation matching 122 enabling 122 unmatch alert 122 Index e 269 Q qedconn dat 11 12 qederr log 12 Qedit worfile 188 Qedit workfile 28 33 188 Qeditmgr MPE 20 213 227 UNIX 20 214 Qedservmode 20 21 QEDSERVMODE host command 172 QSL file extension 50 registering 50 qsldoc pdf 11 qstart pdf 11 qwin ini 11 12 qwin pdf 11 qwinddb bkp 12 qwinddb dat 11 12 qwinerr log 11 qwintips txt 11 R Read only 78 82 88 231 Record length 64 66 Record Length exceeded 82 Record number 131 146 Recovery HP UX files 224 MPE file 223 Rectangular selection 44 copying 105 cutting 105 deleting 106 extending 96 106 inserting 105 pasting 105 Redo 30 108 Registering file types 49 Regular expression 143 251 anchor 252 backreferences 256 character class 253 escape character 255 escaped sequences 255 metacharacter 251 Remove scripts 177 Rename text file 153 workfile 162 Rename workfile 162 270 e Index Replace 147 pattern matching 147 Replace dialog 147 Requirements hardware 1 network 2 Software 1 Revert 108 Right click 46 47 Roman8 1999 56 Roman9 56 RPM 1 215 17 222 233 Ruler 113 124 S Save all files 28 164 as regular file 162 as workfile 154 automatic 166 position 141 Save As dialog 163 Script control 178 Script Control dialog 178 Script directories 176 Script bas
191. good shape perform a Save aS command Because this is a Qedit workfile the server simply renames it from QED to whatever name you assign The new file is still a Qedit workfile If you want to save it as a regular file you should open a copy of the original workfile and then do a Save as command 6 Once you are sure that you have recovered everything you can delete the scratch file Recovering a File on HP UX Hosts On HP UX hosts scratch files are created in your environment temporary directory The temporary directory is usually defined with the TMPDIR environment variable If you do not know what it is you might have to ask your system administrator or connect using a terminal and type echo STMPDIR usr tmp In this example the environment temporary directory is usr tmp The scratch files numbers e g qscr CAAa24070 1 Goto the Directory dialog box for the connection you were using 2 Go to your environment temporary directory You can navigate by double clicking the appropriate entries in the directory listing or you can go directly to it by entering the directory name e g usr tmp in the file name text box and selecting Open 3 Look for Qedit scratch files qscr 7 4 On most systems all the users share the same environment temporary directory so there will likely be more than one scratch file Look at the Last Modified column and find the one that is more likely to be yours today s date
192. ground color All existing tags are displayed in that area The text area and the tag area are independent of each other If you delete characters from the text the tag value does not move to the text area Similarly if you insert text characters from the text area do not overflow into the tag area If you split a line the tag value remains on the original line If you splice a line by deleting the end of line character the tag value from the second line does not move with the text R Vancouver MPE COBOL4 PUB DEMO olx 30 40 50 60 70 80 a aed eee kee ee eee ee ee ee ee re ere ae 05 filler pic s9 4 comp occurs 570 times ME000725 New comment lines ME000725 ME000725 01i spell status area 05 spell cond word pic 3s9 4 comp 88 spell stat ok value zeros 88 spell found value 0 88 spell not found value 1 f X Line 7 Col 8 COBOL file with tag area displayed Set X vs Set X lt string gt lt date gt The other parameter of the Set X command allows you to update the tags either manually or automatically If you do not want Qedit to automatically tag modified lines and would prefer to manually enter something in the tag area put a set x command with no parameters in the configuration file or use wee set x a null string can be entered as two consecutive quotes The tag area is then under your total control Qedit will not automatically put or change anything in these
193. gt The server is not able to open the file on the connection In some cases Qedit displays additional information on the cause of the problem For example NONEXISTENT PERMANENT FILE FSERR 52 can appear If you are trying to open a Qedit workfile that is already being accessed you might not get an explanation Make sure the file exists and is accessible from a terminal using host based Qedit Unable to start MPE server because the supplied login was not valid This message is displayed when RPM cannot initiate a new session RPM returns a generic error code Qedit cannot establish the exact cause of the Troubleshooting e 227 problem Anything that can prevent a session from starting will return this error Some possible causes include e the login information user group account in the connection is incorrect e one of the passwords in the connection is invalid e the session limit on the host is too low e the string entered in the Hello text box does not have the right syntax e AnRPM error on the host during login server error 75 This message is displayed when RPM cannot initiate a new session on an MPE connection using the Firewall protocol Check the Hello string for that connection and make sure all passwords are correctly entered 228 e Troubleshooting Qedit for Windows User Manual Appendix A Earlier Highlights Overview Here are some of the changes and enhancements made in earlier versions of Qedit for Windows
194. hange an existing one read the Setting the Default Color Scheme on page 121 Loading Local Files into Memory The Load local files smaller than K into memory option lets you control whether Qedit will load local files into memory When this option is disabled default Qedit brings only the necessary parts of the file into memory As a result you can edit local files that are much larger than your PC s memory If this option is disabled Qedit keeps the original file open during the editing process and prevents other people from modifying the file at the same time When Qedit saves your changes it merges the modified lines into the original file Reading the entire local file into memory however has other advantages Editing is very fast because the text you work on is always present in memory By releasing the file as soon as Qedit has finished loading it the file becomes available to other people almost immediately and stays available until Qedit reopens it to save changes To specify which local files get loaded into memory 1 Select Preferences from the Options menu 2 When the Qedit Preferences dialog box appears select Load local files smaller than K into memory and specify a threshold file size If a file is smaller than or equal to the specified value Qedit will load the whole file into memory If the file is larger Qedit will load only the necessary parts of the file which is how Qedit works when this option is d
195. he The space required to store this information is shown as Overhead Next Qedit shows the number of individual lines that are represented by the Data bytes It also shows how much of the cache space is actually used by all this The cache is not monolithic It is actually made of smaller blocks each containing a certain number of lines Qedit displays the number of blocks currently in use Some blocks might be locked This happens when Qedit is waiting for a response from the host that involves lines in a block Because the cache is a critical component of Qedit it has to ensure that everything in it is sound On a regular basis Qedit goes out and checks the integrity of the cache structure Cache Statistics Data 14995 Bytes Overhead 3640 Bytes Lines 361 Cache Full 75 Blocks 8 Blocks Locked 0 Integrity Calls 385 For local files everything is done by the client program For host files the client has to request lines from the server Thus the client issues some requests and also counts the number of cache entries received in response The last item shows the number of requests that have not been satisfied yet by the server Cache Requests Issued 14 Received 74 Outstanding 0 210 e Troubleshooting Qedit for Windows User Manual Connection Problems Qedit for Windows User Manual MPE Host Connections In order to open a file on an MPE host Qedit for Windows must go through a number of steps 1 Qedit for Windo
196. he CTRL key 1 Select the first file 2 Hold the CTRL key 3 Select another file that is not directly adjacent to the first one 4 Both files are highlighted Files appearing between these two are not selected You can also combine the CTRL and SHIFT keys to select even more files in the listing By releasing the SHIFT key and pressing the CTRL key you can skip the files you do not want to open Rectangular Selections If you want to work on text in specific columns on multiple lines you create something called rectangular selection Simply hold the CTRL key while clicking and dragging the mouse The selection is then limited to the leftmost and rightmost columns in the selection as shown here fj Vancouver MPE COBOL4 PUB DEMO olx 01 spell status area 05 spell cond word pic s9 4 comp 88 spell stat ok value zeros 68 spell found value 0 88 spell not found value 1 86 spell bad word len value 2 688 spell bad line len value 3 68 value 4 66 value 5 68 value 6 68 value 7 66 value 6 68 value 9 68 value 10 88 er dup value 11 88 spell user jumbo value 12 05 filler pic s9 4 comp a X L13 C26 L20 C37 Rectangular selection 42 e A Windows Primer Qedit for Windows User Manual Rectangular selections can be defined with the mouse only There is no keyboard equivalent Selecting a Menu Command The line of words across the top of the Qedit window File Edit V
197. he host computer These combined features provide a recovery mechanism if a connection failure occurs Recovering a File on MPE Hosts On MPE hosts scratch files are called QED where the number signs represent a 5 digit random number e g QED24070 They are created in the logon group for the connection used at the time To recover your latest changes 1 Go to the Directory window for the connection you were using 2 Look for Qedit scratch files QED H 3 If there is more than one scratch file look at the Last Modified column and find the one that is more likely to be yours today s date and time There will be more than one if there are other users connecting with the same logon ID group and account Troubleshooting e 219 220 e Troubleshooting NOTE The Directory window you are looking at is also stored in a Qedit scratch file Make sure you select the right one If you select the directory scratch file you will likely get an open error 4 Open the file Qedit automatically performs an internal recovery process You should then have the text you were working on If the Qedit client aborted it is possible that you will not be able to open the file immediately That s because the server uses an internal timeout of 5 minutes before it assumes there is a problem with the connection So for the timeout duration scratch files and Qedit workfiles remain open and cannot be accessed 5 Tf the text is yours and in
198. her folders To create a new folder and add a file to it 1 Open the file 2 Click the right mouse button to display the shortcut menu 3 Click on New folder This should bring the New Favorites Folder dialog box 4 Enter the name of the folder The name can contain any character except a colon It can be as long as needed 5 Click OK The folder is created and the filename is added to it New Favorites Folder x Adding a folder to your Favorites menu Name for new subfolder Project ABC Cancel Creating a new Favorites folder and adding a file to it If the folder already exists it s going to appear on the shortcut menu To add a file to a folder select the corresponding Insert here command Qedit for Windows User Manual Qedit for Windows User Manual 2 Qedit Vancouver MPE HOSTCMD PUB _DEMO Bl File Edit Text Mark Yiew Script Options Window Help pelil ala 20 20 20 ee clo sala stream jobl clerk payables build extfile rec 80 f ascii dev dise un suprtool pub robelle parm 8 info use extfile Ol x 18 x Paste Find previous run Find next run Open run Save position of insertion paint Properties Copy pathname to clipboard Add to favorites Insert here New folder Run file as host command ProjectABC gt nserthere New folder al Line 3 Col 1 C NN f A As KX For help press F1 Add a file t
199. hey are only partially selected If you use a regular selection Sortlines assumes you want to sort on all columns If you use a rectangular selection Sortlines uses the text in the selected columns as the sort keys It re arranges complete lines in both cases though Select the Sortlines command on the Robelle submenu of the Script menu If you want to sort the lines in ascending order select the Ascending option Otherwise select the Descending option Qedit immediately starts executing the script and sorts the lines Because the script uses Qedit s built in edit functions you can use the Undo tool to reverse the operation if you are not satisfied with the results Sorting on Columns The Sortlines script sorts only the lines that are in the selection When you try to sort on specific columns you have to get a rectangular selection When you have a large number of lines it can be tedious to have to scroll through the file while holding the CTRL key to get to the last line There are different to speed up the process If you wish to use the mouse 1 Start a rectangular selection including only a few lines 2 Scroll through the file to display the last lines 3 Press and hold the SHIFT and CTRL keys 4 Click the mouse button on the rightmost sort column Script Based Features e 175 This works relatively well but it requires a bit of practice to always get the columns that you want If you are bit off when you click at step 4
200. his allows extraction of regular expression subpatterns from the original text and re insert them in the replacement string Customizing Your Search Options The caret cursor and the insertion point are all the same thing Qedit for Windows User Manual Allowing the Caret in Undefined Areas Normally Qedit does not allow the cursor anywhere to the right of the last character on a line If you try to enter a character in this area Qedit automatically moves the cursor to the right most character on the line This is Qedit s way of preventing an accidental extension of a line in files where spaces at the end of a line are significant You can change Qedit s default so that it automatically extends spaces between the last character on the line and a newly inserted character or a RETURN key beyond the last character Simply select Preferences from the Options menu When the Qedit Preferences dialog box appears enable Caret allowed in undefined areas When this option is enabled you will be able to put the insertion point beyond the last character of a line If you browse through a file while this option is enabled the cursor remains in the same column no matter where the text ends in a line Qedit does not adjust left or right If the option is disabled however Qedit keeps the cursor in the same column only if the text extends that far For shorter lines the cursor is moved to the end of text adjusting left or right as needed to alw
201. hite background if the selected screen background is dark For this reason Qedit changes anything in white to black Lines per page This setting specifies the number of printed lines per page By adjusting the number of lines per page you can change the font size The more lines per page you request the smaller the font and the more characters per line This setting can be used to remove wide lines that wrap on a page Another way to fit more information on a page is to reduce the settings for the left and right margins Qedit uses your document font as your print font or the print driver will use the closest approximation If you want to print the file in a different font you first have to change the font in your document Select Properties from the File menu and click Set font Margins The four text boxes under Margins indicate the amount of space in the margins of the page Each text box represents a side top bottom left and right In the example above the top left and right margins are set to 0 5 inch The bottom margin is set to 0 6 inch Inches and Centimeters These buttons indicate the unit of measure used with the margin settings Printing on a Local Printer To print on a local printer 1 2 Select the Print command in the File menu When the Print dialog box appears specify the pages you want to print By default Qedit presumes you want to print the whole file If you have selected some text the Sel
202. ht goes all the way to the right margin However if you paste it somewhere else it will not be put on a separate line If you press DELETE the highlighted text is removed and the lines on either side are joined For more details see Selecting Text on page 92 To cancel a selection click anywhere else in the document window Selecting More Text If you click and drag the mouse up or down to a different line Qedit selects the rest of the current line and part of the next line up to the mouse pointer Extending a Selection If you want to select a lot of text you can extend your selection using the SHIFT key 1 Place your cursor at the beginning or at the end of the text you want to select If you want to make sure the cursor remains in place select part of the text immediately 2 Move the cursor to the other end Press and hold the SHIFT key 4 Click at the location where you want the selection to end Qedit automatically selects anything in between A Windows Primer e 41 This technique can be used in other circumstances For example you can use it to open more than one local file in a single operation If you want to select one or more files that appear next to each other 1 Click the first file 2 Hold the SHIFT key 3 Click the last file you want opened All files between your first and last selection will be highlighted 4 Click Open You can also select files that are not next to each other using t
203. ic asciciaiad nn ainct aids hark hia ann ae Ate Aco 133 Maximum Line Length orninn natant nave eana r a a a a E ea 133 Lime Termination serce oore ietie e e irre KEE EEN e EE REEK EEE E E REEN Ri 133 Searching amp Replacing Features 135 COVER VIEW denier a e a E E S E duke E EE es 135 Scrolling Through Pile sis ci sia a E a a he E ERE Poeteendes 135 Using the Scroll BaSe e era eaea e aie ei 136 Using the Intelligent MOUSE ae n ira aa s E a ERTES 136 Using Cursor Movement Keys ccsccesccesecesecesecececaeeeaeeeseeseeeaeeeneeeseeeeeeereeerensees 137 Setting Markers in a File cccceecceescsesceeeceecesecseecaeeeseesneeeeesceesecesecesecaecaecaaecaeeeaeseaeeeeeeneees 137 Marking a Position cccccecceecceesceseceecesecsecsaecseecaeecaeeseecaeecaeeeaeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeseneenaes 137 Returning to a Marked PoSsition ecceceeeseesseescesceeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeceseenseeeseenaeenaeeaeenes 137 Exchanging Current Position with Last Marker cccscesseesseeceeesceeseeeeeeeeeeneeeees 137 Using the Last Marker to Select Text ccceccececsseesseeseeeeceseesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeenaes 138 Defining the Terms of a Search ccccccceescesseesceesceesceseceseceaeceaecaeecaeeeaeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceseeerenaees 138 Common Search Operations edesten aE tatin Aids hatiaa tien eek a s 139 Finding Consecutive Occurrences of a String eccceceesseesceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaes 139 Finding the First and Last Occurrence o
204. ich one it is If it s a not a Qedit listener simply wait for the job to complete If it is a Qedit listener simply abort the job In this example you would use abortjob 38351 Running the HP UX Server 1 If you are installing the server on a HP UX host refer to the Qedit for HP UX User Manual for a complete set of installation instructions or perform the following steps 2 Once the HP UX server files have been copied to the HP UX host you need to sign on to the host as root using a terminal or emulator e g WRQ s Reflection 3 Set the ROBELLE environment variable required by the Qedit server ROBELLE opt robelle export ROBELI 4 Start the Qedit for Windows daemon opt robelle bin gedit d t The server process keeps running until it is stopped explicitly with the kill command or until the system is shut down You have to do steps 2 to 3 every time you want to start the server If you want to start the daemon as part of the system startup process you can get detailed instructions in the Qedit for HP UX User Manual or you can contact Robelle technical support The t option enables the server trace facility If the Qedit daemon is started with this option all user connections will produce trace messages also If the trace facility is not enabled on the daemon the trace facility for individual users can be enabled by checking the Enable trace option of the Server Trace Options on the De
205. ied name for the Qedit program You can select Browse to find it using Windows Explorer You can edit a Web document by selecting the Page Internet Explorer 4 0 command in the Edit menu or selecting the Edit tool A new instance of Qedit will run automatically with the current document opened You are then able to make changes to the document You can save your changes to local files without any problems However if the Web document is on a remote server i e an MPE or UNIX host Internet Explorer simply passes a temporary copy of the document to Qedit In this case the only thing you can do is to use the Save As command of the File menu and save the revised version under a new name on your local drive You then need to transfer the file back to the server e g using FTP Opening a Host File Qedit can open MPE and HP UX host files Qedit workfiles as well as copies of these files WARNING Opening binary files with Qedit can corrupt them See Opening Files with Binary Data on page 80 To open an existing file on a host server 1 Select the File menu point to Host and then click Open 2 When the Open Host File dialog box appears it provides the following options to either search for a file or to open it Creating amp Opening Files e 77 78 e Creating amp Opening Files Open Host File Ea Connection Vancouver UX 7 Create produx Current directory home demo File name profe O Wildcards
206. iew etc is called the menu bar Each word is the name of a menu which you can click to access a list of commands Commands that are dimmed are not available at the time usually because a prior operation is necessary To open a file for example first click the File menu When a list of commands appears you can select the Open command which presents you with more options Host Local Selection Selecting Toolbar Buttons Below the menu bar is a toolbar with various small square buttons Dea aja 20 20 20 Qedit toolbar If you are using the 32 bit edition of Qedit you can find out what a button does by putting your cursor over it and waiting Do not click A toolbar tip will shortly appear to describe its function To activate the function click it once If the button appears dimmed it means that you cannot do that function at this time usually because you have not selected anything to do the operation on Selecting from a List You can make a selection from a file list by clicking the arrow at the end of the list This expands the file list box and displays all the files currently saved in the list Use the mouse to point to the file you want and click to select it You can also use the DOWN ARROW and UP ARROW keys to display the previous or next file name in the list Shortcut Menus in Windows 95 Qedit for Windows User Manual Shortcut menus were introduced in Windows 95 They are context sensitive menus whose
207. ilable from the Robelle submenu of the Script menu The next sections describe in more detail each script found in the library Currently these include e SortLines Sorts selected text e ListAll Lists all lines in the current document containing a specific string e ListInclude Lists all lines containing a specific string This script scans the current document and all Include files e ListUse Lists all lines containing a specific string This script scans the current document and all Use files e ListCopy Lists all lines containing a specific string The script scans the current document and all COBOL Copy library files Qedit for Windows User Manual Qedit for Windows User Manual e MPECompile Compiles source files on MPE hosts Sorting Lines Qedit does not have a built in function to sort text However the feature has been developed using a QSL script This script is automatically loaded on the Robelle submenu of the Script menu Qedit Jol x File View Options DIS bed E p Manage scripts Control panel QWTLoadGlobals Robelle MPE Compile gt List All List Copy List Include gt gt List Use Sortlines Descending N Select columns SortLines script commands Here is how you can sort text l Select all the lines that you want to sort The script sorts all the lines that are part of the selection even if t
208. ile the corresponding option in the dialog box will use the setting in the previous search Qedit for Windows User Manual Searching amp Replacing Features e 145 Copying amp Printing Files Overview Copying and printing files is easy with Qedit for Windows You can copy files across platforms with a simple cut and paste or use the standard Windows Save As command Copy a local file to another local file a local file to a host file or a host file to the same or another host file or to a local file Print a host file on any printer configured on the host connection or on a local printer You can choose from a variety of print options to customize your printout Copying a File By using either cut and paste or the Save As command Qedit for Windows can copy files across all the platforms to which it is connected Copying Local Files Copying a Local File to Another Local File You can use the standard Windows Save As command to copy a local file to another local file 1 Open the local file you want to copy 2 Select Save As from the File menu 3 When the Save As dialog box appears enter the new file name If you want to put the new file in a different directory you can select another directory in the file structure 4 Click Save Copying a Local File to a Host File You can make a copy of a local file and put it on a host by cutting and pasting To copy a local file to a host 1 Select the File menu point to Open
209. ile you are moving it the split bar will be removed i e you will no longer have a split view Qedit for Windows User Manual Getting Started e 35 Split bars are displayed as yellow lines between two panes Alt W S then H for Horizontal or V for Vertical Shortcut double click the split box Shortcut double click the split bar 36 o Getting Started When you release the mouse button if your window is big enough to split Qedit will split it into two windows that scroll independently A split bar will delimit the two panes each with its own set of scroll bars If you have enough room you can split panes into more panes You can adjust the size of each pane by moving the split bar fej Vancouver MPE COBOL4 PUB DEMO of x 01 spell workspace 05 spell version no 7 Pane 05 filler spell status area Split bar to spell hyphen and SPELLCONFIG using spel adjustment indicator Line 16 Col 20 Pane Adjusting the pane size using the split bar You can also use the Split window command in the Window menu This command has two 2 subcommands Horizontal and Vertical which split the active window or pane in half in the appropriate direction If you want to quickly split a window or a pane in half double click the split box Collapsing Multiple Views into One To collapse two views of a file into one drag the yellow split bar to the edge of the window and release it Qedit for Windows User
210. ing Hosts and Operating Systems 0 0 0 0 eceeeesesecsseseeesececeeeesecseesecneeseeeseeecsaecateseeneaee 181 Switching and Tng Fil s sinnen errero nenesa rene eE raio ea EEE E N En E 181 Switching Between Filessrisniniirn iistri iia eoa aE EE EA ERS si 181 Tiling Document WMdOWS sossar enoar ee EE aE EE S 182 Working Smarter with a Terminal Window s ssssessesesesesesrestereesrsrsrerteresssesesrtrrereessesrsreerees 184 Advantages of Qedit Workfiles arisin a a r E ARE E N 184 A tomatic Saverne aia hea e a cian Ae ea Ea AA aa 184 Sole Access to Eessen i T a Ried E ahaa E R E 184 Preventing Accidental Overwrite of Files eseseeseeeeeesessstserrterersrstsrerrerstersreretseseseerreret 184 Instant Access to Embedded Files s sssesscsesescsereecesseosensessssnsneeoesssenencneusesonevensessnsvere 185 Getting the Fully Qualified Name of a File oe eeeecseseceseeeceseeeeeseceeeseceeeeecsaeeeeesesneeeeens 185 Handling Nonprinting Characters cecsccssssssssecsessecesseecsscaeeccaecaeesecseesecnaeeeeeaeceeeaesneeeeens 185 Minimizing Keystrokes ionia ne ne a ea REE Vaa REIR ARAE se eee at 185 Menu Shorteuts cioesneso n a O A awe ae 185 Letter Matching e a cna e E E Ea 185 Expanding the Workspace niei a e a A EA ie tases 186 Quick Access to Directories asean tec edhe ce Seka A E E E E EEE SE E Ee 186 Working with MPE Hosts nsina en rt aeaa E EEE n DoE tele SEE adie Beet 186 Working with Copyhibsiee cisini innn n iare eari i
211. ing Language User Manual All script related commands are on the Script menu Qedit Vancouver MPE HOSTCMD PUB DEMO Bl File Edit Text Mark View Eeeigg Options Window Help laj x Di co Gil ala 20 20 20 4 Compile Bun stream jobl clerk payal EEE Fi build extfile rec 80 run suprtool pub robel Save compiled script extfile Run as host command Host command gt Manage scripts Control panel List All List Copy gt List Include List Use Sortlines a X Line 3 Col 23 C NN T 2 Script menu commands The first set of commands Compile Run and Save compiled script are mostly useful for script developers The Run as host command command is used to execute the file as a series of host commands The Manage scripts command is used to load and unload scripts The Control Panel is used to display the Script Control dialog box Names of loaded scripts are listed at the bottom of the menu Script Based Features e 171 Script Libraries 172 e Script Based Features QSL scripts can be stored in three different directories on your PC The first two directories have fixed names and locations They are created in the directory where Qedit has been installed e g c robelle qedit and are called System and User respectively The System subdirectory contains scripts provided by Robelle This area is rebuilt every time you
212. ing directory or group This dialog box also includes text boxes File name and Wildcard for searching a file and buttons to perform further operations Directory for Vancouver UX SBE View File name sh history I Read only I Open a copy Wildcard J Force unnumbered Directory home demo Last Modified 08 16 1999 4 20 28 PM src 07 27 1999 6 37 16 PM 1024 profile 08 16 1999 1 23 10 PM 19 sh_history 09 12 2001 2 03 01 PM KEG FileData 07 16 1996 4 29 50 PM 204800 MyProfile 09 24 1999 11 23 42 AM 3897 OrderDF1 07 16 1996 4 29 50 PM 204800 OrderxF1 07 16 1996 4 29 50 PM 204800 PartsF0 0871071999 1 56 57 PM 1228800 Print Refresh Help Close File Type The Directory dialog box The Directory Listing The first entry in a directory listing is always two dots which is the parent directory of your current working directory Directories parent or subdirectories within the listing appear in color The listing includes all files even those starting with a dot these files are usually hidden in UNIX The directory listing appears in alphabetical order The listing includes the following information the file Name the File Type the date and time Last Modified and the Size of the file Although the File Type column appears on both MPE and UNIX systems only MPE currently includes this information Creating amp Opening Files e 69 Order Selection button
213. ing system on the host Each child process created by the server program has its own process ID This number is used to identify all transactions logged in the server log files All server logfile entries related to a particular connection are identified by this process ID It appears in square brackets on each line For example the following entries are for the server process 187 Sep 22 1997 09 31 39 187 TRead Length 12 KeepAlive version 1 id 0 Sep 22 1997 09 31 39 187 TSent Length 12 KeepAlive version 1 id 0 Qedit then provides some statistics about the network traffic and the amount of information transferred since the beginning of the edit session These statistics include the number of packets sent and received by the client and the total number of bytes transferred in these packets Connection Name Vancouver MP Host Name DEV Host User demo mgr demo Gl 208 e Troubleshooting Qedit for Windows User Manual Host Qedit Qedit ixX Version 4 6 01 Host OS MPE ixX C 55 00 Host Process ID 82 Packets Sent 3 Packets Received 4 Bytes Sent 132 Bytes Received 812 Transmission Information The transmission section is really made up of two subsections the Transmit Queue and Connection Response Time The packets sent to the server are submitted using an asynchronous scheme This means Qedit for Windows writes outbound packets in a queue and in most cases does not wait for an answer from the server Depe
214. ings and use the Open selection command Qedit will verify that Vancouver MPE or Vancouver UX is a valid connection name If so it will automatically try to connect to the corresponding host and open the file Myfile Mygrp or users clerk profile Opening MRU Most Recently Used Files Qedit maintains a list of the most recently used files This list is accessible via the Recent files command in the File menu Local file names are fully qualified including the letter of the drive Host file names are also fully qualified including the connection name on which they were opened For host files Qedit also keeps track of the options used the last time you opened the file i e Read only or Force unnumbered To open a file in the list select the Recent files command in the File menu Qedit presents the list of most recently used files as a submenu 74 e Creating amp Opening Files Qedit for Windows User Manual Shortcut CTRL O Toolbar Qedit for Windows User Manual Ta 2 View Options Script Help New r kalel Hae Weed bed saa Open Recent Files 1 Dirobdewqwin doc Detabbed tt Disconnect i 2 Vancouver MPE COBOL4 PUB DEMO AGst commend 3 C Windows Readme tt 4 Vancouver MPE ROUTINES PUB DEMO 5 Vancouver UX home demo profile Exit List of most recently accessed files By defaut Qedit for Windows displays 20 files This number can be changed in the General tab of the Preferences dialog
215. install a new version of Qedit Therefore we recommend that you do not copy any of your own files to this directory If you have developed scripts of your own and want to make them available to all users at your site you should copy them to the User directory This area is totally under your control The third location is used to store private scripts Typically these are scripts developed or used by a single user The directory name and location can be different on each PC The path name can be entered in the User script directory field on the General page of the Preferences dialog box Qedit Preferences x General Searching Defaults UNIX MPE Local i areas I Load local files smaller than 22 K into memory MV Close connections with no open files lV Automatically post Qedit workfiles MV Compare timestamps before overwriting on server P Use live scrolling for server files I Save automatically every 110 minutes MV Move caret when navigating MV Balance punctuation parentheses brackets while typing IV Alert sound on unmatched punctuation Mousewheel Acceleration Color schemes Low High 3 Directory Font Change User script directory Cancel Help General page of the Preferences dialog box To specify the User script directory select the Change button to the left of the field and browse the directory on your PC until you find the location The System User and User Script dir
216. interpreted as 128 9 200 63 Select the host type MPE or UNIX and define your host login and password s Each host type has a different set of labels for defining the login and passwords For details see Defining an MPE Host Connection and Defining an HP UX Host Connection below Although the default character set is HP Roman 8 Qedit gives you other choices in the Character set list box If you are using HP s Native Language Support Connecting to a Host or Network e 53 subsystem you can select one of the following a 7 bit national character replacement set the new Roman8 1999 Roman9 or the ISO8859 character set The Roman9 character set is identical to Roman8 except for a single character decimal code 186 now represents the European currency Euro symbol The ISO8859 character set corresponds to Windows Code Page 1252 which allows you to create host files with the Windows character set These files can then be either transferred to a PC or used directly by PC programs without translating the character set 6 All new connections are created with the Qedit default color scheme as indicated by the word Default in the Default Colors list box You can select a different color scheme off the list See Setting the Default Color Scheme on page 121 to add your own schemes or change existing ones Any file opened or created on that connection will use the selected color scheme unless you have selected a different sch
217. inuation lines It is optional and the default is not required 254 e Appendix D Language Templates Qedit for Windows User Manual Qedit for Windows User Manual There must be one and only one StringDelimiter block Each block defines a delimiter A delimiter must be a single character The StringDelimiter tag has the following attribute e Double indicates that two consecutive delimiters mean the delimiter is escaped i e it is used as is Enter escape if that s the case Anything else means consecutive delimiters have no special meaning It is optional and the default is not escaped e The Escape block defines an escape character If the delimiter is preceded by an escape character the delimiter is used at face value and not as a closing delimiter Escape blocks are optional but if specified there can be up to 10 escape entries and each one can not have more than 7 characters This exemple defines the double quote ASCII hex 22 as a delimiter A string defined with it can span multiple lines To escape a double quote i e not interpret it as the start or end of a string it can be preceded by a backslash or two question marks lt quote type continuable gt lt stringdelimiter gt amp x22 lt stringdelimiter gt lt escape gt lt escape gt lt escape gt lt escape gt lt quote gt Continuation Schemes The Continuation block describes how to identify continuation lines i e language statements that span multipl
218. ions at any time This allows you to customize your search and give you the best results To define the terms of a search 1 Select Find in the Edit menu 2 When the Find String dialog box appears define the terms of your search Find String Eg Search for customernumber bd I Match pattem Regular Expression I Smart search whole words r Range From curent location Entire file I Search in columns through Search Reverse Don t Search Search Forward Help Cancel Find String dialog box e Search for Qedit saves the last 15 search requests you have done This includes the search string and all options If you want to recall a search request scroll through the list using the up or down arrow keys If you select some text before calling the dialog box the selected text is automatically used as a search string unless the previous search used the Match pattern or Regular Expression options e ignore case Matches the string whether it is in lowercase uppercase or mixed case in the file 138 e Searching amp Replacing Features Qedit for Windows User Manual e Match pattern Matches patterns of characters instead of specific characters For example bob green matches any occurrence of the string bob anywhere in a line followed by zero or more intervening characters and then the string green The pattern match control characters are the same as those used in the stan
219. irectories in which you have read access It is important to remember that there is only one current working directory per connection Even though you can go to the Directory dialog box from the Open Host File and the Host Save As dialog boxes you are really dealing with the same Directory dialog box This means a change in the current working directory reflects on both host Open and Save As operations If you know the exact location of a directory you don t have to go through other directories to get to it Just use the absolute e g users demo or relative e g demo syntax of the path name in the File name text box and select the Directory button For more host specific information about file and directory notation conventions see the Notation in Host Operating Systems on page 67 Selecting Files Once you have found the files you need they can be opened from the Directory dialog box You can select a file by highlighting it in the listing it then appears in reverse video or by entering its name in the File name text box To highlight a file click it once to remove the highlight click it again If you want to open a number of files at once you can highlight them in the listing You can select up to ten 10 files When you select multiple files the File name text box will display the number of files selected You cannot use the SHIFT key to select additional files you have to select them one by one Creating a
220. is under the main Robelle directory For example if the server program is in opt robelle bin the log files will be in the opt robelle log qedit directory The log files themselves are called error log access log and trace log If you have set the ROBELLE environment variable the log files will be created in the specified directory You have to ensure the new location has the same structure as the original opt robelle Qedit for Windows needs to resolve the host name or IP address you entered in the Connection List dialog box If there is a Domain Name Server DNS configured on your PC a host name is automatically converted to its corresponding IP address Most PCs come with a program called ping which can test connections to other machines on the network You can use it to make sure the DNS is configured correctly and the host name can be reached from your location If you cannot use the host name you can also try the exact IP address if you know it When you start a new Qedit for Windows session there is no connection unless one or more connections are configured with the Login at startup option Upon opening the first file Qedit for Windows must establish a link to the host It tries to open a connection on port number 7395 The server program should be listening on that port whose number has been reserved for Qedit s sole use You can check the configured value by using the Server command in the Options menu Remember that the
221. isabled The minimum value default is 32K The maximum value is 4 096K For files below the configured threshold Qedit allocates a memory block based on their size If you open several large local files at the same time you can quickly consume available memory For this reason we recommend that you use a conservative value for a threshold 3 Click OK to save the option settings and close the dialog box If Qedit has difficulty loading a file because you don t have enough memory the result of an open operation is unpredictable This option also affects save operations For more details see Saving amp Closing Files on page 157 Qedit for Windows User Manual Typing Selecting amp Editing Text Overview Typing and editing features are the foundation of Qedit for Windows These features are supplemented with various ways to select text and to handle nonprinting control and international characters Qedit gives you the ability to cut copy and paste within a file or between files And if you decide not to keep your changes you always have the option to undo or redo your work Determining Your Position in a File Qedit for Windows User Manual For typing and editing you need to know your exact position within a document The status bar indicates the current position of your cursor on the page See Document Status Bar on page 33 for more details Cursor Position and Appearance The current location of the cur
222. ist For example if the HTML template has the same language code as XML the definition from XML is used Valid codes are Language Description Code RPG XML e StartColumn column number where text starts on each line This attribute is optional and must be greater than 0 The default is 1 Qedit for Windows User Manual Appendix D Language Templates e 253 e Horizon maximum number of lines to scan to find the start of a class e g multi line comments It is optional and must be greater than 0 The default is 100 For example the following tag identifies the SPL language which is not case sensitive lines start in column 1 and the language code is 0 lt language name SPL case notsignificant startcolumn 1 gedit languagecode 0 gt language specifications lt language gt For each language there are multiple blocks describing individual elements of the language making up the language specifications All these blocks must be define between the lt language gt and lt language gt tags File Extensions The Extension blocks describe file extensions used to identify the language of a file Extension blocks are optional Each block contains one extension string Extensions can be as long as needed and can be any character string Extensions are not case sensitive In other words c is the same as C Extensions are applicable to local HP UX and Posix files They are sort of dynamic If you add an extensi
223. it window When your cursor changes into a double ended arrow drag it to make the window larger or smaller A Windows Primer e 37 lolx Minimize Maximize and Close buttons on Windows 95 e x Minimize Restore and Close buttons on Windows 95 Shortcut To easily maximize or restore a window double click the title bar Shortcut ALT W H Shortcut ALT W V Unless the text font you are using is really large the minimum window size is set by the status bar Qedit for Windows does not allow the status bar to be narrower than the widest message or indicator Minimizing a Window In the upper right corner of most windows are some control buttons that allow you to minimize the window The Minimize button reduces the program to an item on the taskbar in Windows 95 To restore the window click the minimized icon and select Restore from the menu or double click the icon To restore a program from the Windows 95 taskbar just click it once Maximizing a Window In the upper right corner of most windows is a Maximize button that enlarges a window so that it occupies the whole screen If you want a large Qedit window you need to maximize both Qedit itself as well as the document window within it When a window is maximized the Maximize button changes to a Restore button which returns the window to its previous size If you want to easily maximize or restore a window double click the title bar Arranging Windows into
224. it for Windows has a save function accessible in many different ways Most local and host files have to be saved explicitly individually or all at once Local files also have an auto save feature Of course if you are using Qedit workfiles you do not have to worry about explicitly saving all your changes Auto Saving Local Files If you want to worry about saving your work you can automatically save changes to local Qedit files at regular intervals See Saving Changes at Regular Intervals on page 162 Saving a Qedit Workfile If you are working on a saved Qedit workfile you do not need to perform an explicit save to protect your work because workfiles are directly connected to the host so that changes are posted immediately If you are editing a copy of a Qedit workfile you must save the copy by performing a Save As command If the connection is lost before you save the copy only the changes that were made after the file was Saving amp Closing Files e 157 Shortcut CTRL S 158 e Saving amp Closing Files copied might be lost Under most circumstances it is possible to recover your changes see Recovering a File on page 219 If you are working on a Qedit workfile and you want to save it as a regular file you need to open a copy of the workfile and then save it under a new name If you do not open a copy of a workfile a Save As command simply renames the workfile Saving an Existing File Local and Host To save ch
225. it program files to your PC or file server If this is the case you might have to temporarily disable the virus checking software Downloading Qedit for Windows Versions of Qedit for Windows can be downloaded from Robelle s website The website also provides installation instructions There are 2 types of files production and pre release versions There is a production version every year Pre releases are intermediate versions created between production versions In all cases the download file is called qinstall exe which is a self extracting executable Installing Qedit on Stand Alone PCs For each stand alone PC you need to install Qedit as a Typical installation With stand alone PCs you have to re install new versions of Qedit on each PC that has a licensed copy If you have a large number of PCs on a network and all of them are connected to a file server the Network installation method is much easier to upgrade To perform a Typical installation on a stand alone PC 1 Start the installation program qinstall exe Follow the instructions on the screen When you are asked for the type of installation select Typical a a ad When asked specify the destination drive and directory on which you want to install Qedit You can use the default location provided by the installation program Getting Started e 7 8 e Getting Started 5 Next you are prompted for the name of the Program Folder where the Qedit shortcuts should be
226. itmgr For this feature to be most efficient we recommend that you use one of the system configuration files For complete details refer to the appropriate Qedit User Manual If this feature is enabled users will not be able to open a regular file if someone else is already working on it If a user doesn t have the feature enabled he will be able to open the file but will not be able to save his changes until the file is released 184 e Power Tips for Developers Qedit for Windows User Manual Instant Access to Embedded Files If you are viewing a file in Qedit and come across an embedded file name one of the quickest ways to open the file is to highlight the name and press CTRL D This feature is especially useful with Include files If the embedded file is a host file that needs a connection Qedit has a systematic approach to select a connection See Opening a File from a Command Line on page 73 and Opening Embedded Files on page 74 Getting the Fully Qualified Name of a File ALT F P If you want to include the fully qualified name of your current file in another document or an electronic mail message simply do the following 1 Open the source file and select Properties from the File menu 2 When the Properties dialog box appears click the Information tab 3 Select Copy to put the contents of the Information tab on the Clipboard To isolate only the file name paste all the file information into a temporary file delete e
227. k in the example below 1 Put your mouse just in front of the letter s of the word spell and hold the left mouse button down fej Vancouver MPE COBOL4 PUB DEMO of Xx O1 spell workspace 05 spell version no 05 filler 01 spell status area 05 spell cond word spell stat ok spell found spell not found spell bad word len spell bad line len va L8 C 20 32 len13 Selected text 2 Carefully move the mouse to the right swiping over the rest of the phrase As you move the intervening characters will be highlighted 3 When the k in ok is highlighted release your mouse button The selection you highlighted should look like the example above If you lift the left mouse button before you have finished dragging it you will not select the whole phrase If you move the mouse too far to the right simply move it back You can also select text by clicking the mouse e Double click anywhere on a word and Qedit selects the whole word automatically If you start dragging the mouse after a double click Qedit continues to select whole words You can configure Qedit to select spaces following the word using the option on the General tab of the Preferences dialog box If the Word selection includes trailing spaces on double click option is enabled Qedit selects the current word along with all spaces if any that immediately follows If the option is disabled default Qedit selects the word only e Click th
228. ks basically the same way as the Save tool The only difference is that Save All allows you to save the changes made on all currently opened files This way you don t have to save each window Of course the downside is it saves all your changes without asking for confirmation If you want to save only some of the files you still have to do them one by one Print Tool The Print tool can be used for both local and host files You can also control where you want to print the file A local file can be printed only on a local printer that is attached to your PC A host file can be printed on a local printer or on a printer connected to the host Host Files Tools The Host files group includes three buttons the Manage Connections button handles your connections the Create host file button opens a new host file and the Open host file button accesses an existing host file To invoke one of these operations simply click the button once If you click and hold any of these buttons Qedit displays the primary command followed by a list of available connections In the list connections that are currently opened are identified by a bullet For example if you select a connection name under the Manage connections button Qedit automatically displays the Directory window for that connection Qedit for Windows User Manual ESLA Cut Copy and Paste tools You can erase the contents of the Clipboard with the Clipboard Viewer program in the Windo
229. l restore qtape ROUTINES QLI 14 a 15 Doe see CONTENTS OLIBDOC m 7 Contents 19 COPYCOL copy columns in gedit fil 20 NEATER Qedit P routine to align 21 QOUT Subroutines to write QEDI 22 FINDIJIUNK Editor and QEDIT P routi 23 gt gt e i x Line 17 Col 9 Record numbers in document window Hiding Record Numbers If you do not want line numbers to appear in the document window you can hide them To hide line numbers in a file select Record numbers in the View menu Preserve Trailing Blanks By default Qedit always preserves trailing spaces that have been entered If you try to insert new text on these lines the trailing spaces will eventually reach the right margin When this happens Qedit will not allow you to enter anything else You then have to go to the end of the line and remove some of these spaces to make room for the extra characters Although this can be annoying Qedit does this because it presumes that anything you type explicitly is valuable and should be kept intact Unfortunately you cannot tell which lines have trailing spaces and which ones don t If trailing spaces are really not important you can disable Preserve trailing blanks Once disabled Qedit removes trailing spaces as needed to make room for new text This setting only affects editing while the file is opened As you modify the file and add trailing blanks Qedit recognizes them However trailing blanks are not written
230. l Characters ssseeesesessstereeeeressseseererrersrserreresrsesrereererseese 89 Typing Textpattern EE aaah 89 Inserting Control Charact rs sisieceirs sireno ni i E a E E E 89 Inserting Nonprinting Characters 00 0 0 ececsssceeeecseceeesecseesecnaeeecaecaeesecnevseenaseeeees 90 Nonprinting Characters for Reflection Users 0 ccscesssseeeeeseceeeeecneseeceaeeeeeseeneeeeens 91 Inserting Special and International Characters 0 ceeceesesecesecseeeceseeeeesecaeeeeenaeeeeens 92 Selecting Vextisnanwianiennesa Mae eae ith heteaich Ale sei nalne dt elk Gees ene 92 Cursor Position and Appearance During Selection cceeseseescneeeeeeseeeeeeeneeeeens 93 Multiple Waysito Select Texti iini iceren aie arapen e reae re stig o KESER EEROR 93 Copying Moving and Pasting Text secccciscess ssbesscetendsaseasasehesganieasesbtasenyd Saa VE REEERE 94 The ChipbOard PANE sess Made A EEEE OE EE EE 94 Copying T ext ree tis bei ae il eet 96 Pasun Lext c3 ork pee ai ees ea ey anes 96 Movie Texts caine haiti ne i atl Hakiiinn ia neni 96 Deleting Text irn ee aa dasa aiden ania E EEEE EE RS 98 Mersing Pwo Lines ostenie a Ea a A a E ctin atl 98 Working with Columns and Tabs 0 0 ceceeecssescsseeecssecseesecneeseceaeeecaecaeesecsesseesaeeeeaecaeeseenees 98 Deleting Text in Columms siina a avsiicckeaued tind e a aa takin 99 Inserting Text in Columns 200 ee eeeeeeeeecseeeeesecseesecseeeecsaeeeeaecaeeeeaecaesseeneveeenaeeees 99 Shifting
231. l not make any sense Do not save the file even if you have not changed anything Server Warnings The server might detect inconsistencies when opening host files and send warning messages to the client The file is going to be open but might be different from what is the host The user should then check the file and fix the problems before accessing them again Lines Exceeded Maximum Length Some files must have specific attributes based on the language they correspond to One of these attributes is the Record Length For example COBOL source files are supposed to have fixed length records of 74 bytes Cobol or 80 bytes Cobx If one or more lines exceed that size Qedit displays the following warning Some lines exceeded the Language maximum line length These lines have been folded See line 15 Server warning 1 The server folds the overflowing lines This means the server puts the characters exceeding the Record Length onto a separate line Effectively this means the file appears to have more lines than the original The warning message shows the number of first folded line 15 in the example above The user should examine that line and determine if the file can be fixed and saved without losing or damaging the original file Server Ran Out of Line Numbers The server requires line numbers to be able to edit host files If the file does not already contain numbers the server assigns them as it reads the file It determines as pr
232. le you can ask the compiler to print the source lines as they are compiled The compile statistics are also printed with these You can redirect the additional output to another device or Qedit for Windows User Manual file using the List parameter By default this parameter is directed to Stdlist The compiler is able to determine that the default output and List parameter are one and the same It then assumes there is no need to write the compile statistics twice When compiling from Qedit the CI process in charge of host command execution already has Stdlist redirected The compiler then thinks the default output and List parameter are different so it writes the statistics twice The only way to remove these duplicate lines is to specify a List parameter You would then get only the compiler statistics The disadvantage is that you have to manually look at the List output For example if List was pointing to a file you would have to print the file or open it with Qedit UNIX Commands Execution Qedit for Windows User Manual To execute UNIX host commands the server starts a new instance of the user s default shell The commands are then executed inside that instance Any output is captured and returned to Qedit for display in the host command dialog box Since a new shell is created all UNIX rules and limitations are applicable For example you can change a environment variable like PATH but as soon as the process terminates the
233. le this feature by removing the check from the Alert sound on unmatched punctuation option on the General page of the Preferences dialog box This feature recognizes parentheses square brackets and curly braces Qedit for Windows User Manual Working With Syntax Coloring Qedit for Windows User Manual Syntax coloring uses different colors to identify different parts of the text This is useful for any text that follows syntactic rules such as programming languages In these structured text words are not created equals and have different usage In Qedit for Windows there are 4 categories e regular text e comments e delimited or quoted text e keywords or reserved words Regular text typically represents user defined words such as program variables Comments are sections providing hints and documentation They usually don t have any effect on the programs using the file Most programs need to manipulate character strings Typically these strings are enclosed between delimiters or quotes Lastly certain words have special meanings They are usually known as reserved words or keywords Qedit uses language template files to describe language syntax elements A template file describes how to recognize the language of a file comments quoted text and what are the keywords Each element is assigned a color During an edit session Qedit analyzes the text and highlights words with the appropriate color This event occurs automatically as
234. lear some of the tab stops 1 Select Properties from the File menu 2 When the Properties dialog box appears select Tabs 3 Enter the position of the tab s that you want to remove in either the At column individual tab or Every series of tabs text box If you have entered the position of an existing tab click the Clear button next to the text box If you have entered a position that does not correspond to an existing tab the button will be called Set Repeat this step for each tab or set of tabs that you want to remove 4 Toclear the selected tabs and close the dialog box click OK To clear the selected tabs without closing the dialog box click Apply The Apply button is useful when you want to continue working in the Properties dialog box Text Formatting Features e 113 If you want to remove all the tab stops from a file simply select Properties from the File menu When the Properties dialog box appears select Tabs and click Clear All Auto Indent Auto indent is a great feature because it allows you to follow the indent of the last line when you press the RETURN or ENTER key Instead of the cursor going back to the first position of the line it goes to the column that matches the indentation of the previous line You can use spaces or tabs to increase the indentation If you use tabs you can use SHIFT TAB to decrease the indentation You can change the auto indent setting for a specific document with 1 Select the Pro
235. lets you copy and paste information to and from other Windows applications Open a host file select a portion of it and paste it into Microsoft Word Start Word select some text and paste it into a Qedit for Windows host file All of this is possible with Qedit for Windows Multiple Independent Views How many times have you wished you could look at your variable declarations while working on some new code in the middle of the program How about working on a file with very wide lines where you can never see the left and right margins together on the screen Qedit s split view feature can give you the whole picture by splitting a document window vertically or horizontally All the panes are created with their own set of scroll bars and work independently from each other Consistent Interface on All Platforms Qedit is capable of editing both local PC files and files on your host computers such as the HP e3000 and the HP 9000 If you are used to the full screen interface of Qedit for HP UX and Qedit for HP e3000 you might expect the same interface in Qedit for Windows That is not what we decided to do We chose to make the user interface of Qedit for Windows look as much as possible like the standard Windows editors such as Microsoft Notepad Microsoft Wordpad and Microsoft Word This makes the interface the same for all files you edit and reduces training costs Perhaps with the exception of those whose fingers have the Qedit for HP e3000 or
236. lf It is equivalent to a shell on a UNIX host Current working directory CWD Term used for UNIX host and POSIX namespace on MPE to identify the directory in which most file operations are occurring Qedit looks for files to open or creates new files in the CWD unless the file name is qualified CWD See Current Working Directory Glossary of Terms e 259 260 e Glossary of Terms DNS See Domain Name server Domain Name Server DNS Software used to cross reference IP addresses to host names End of line character Operating systems have different ways of identifying the end of a line in a file Some use a LINE FEED or NEWLINE character a CARRIAGE RETURN or a combination of a CARRIAGE RETURN LINE FEED Firewall Security device hardware or software controlling access to a network Usually controls which IP addresses are allowed to access specific port numbers and services Folder Sometimes called a directory Item used as a container for related folders or documents HFS See Hierarchical File System Hierarchical File System HFS Sometimes called POSIX namespace on MPE File system in which files and directories are arranged in hierarchical fashion There is a root directory from which all other components branch out Insertion point Exact location within the file in which the edit operation is going to take place Usually indicated by a blinking cursor If you select some text the insertion point is
237. look like this Text Mark View Script Of Undo typing Redo paste Ctrl V Cut Ctrl X Copy Ctrl C Paste Ctrl V Clear Select all Ctrl A Copy special Find Ctrl F Endaga Cres Bind again revere Sii SHAG and presions Chel ng nex Has Find ENQ Ctrl H Find previous ENQ Ctrl ShifttH Replace Ctr R Column Edit menu after a Redo command The description shows typing as the last edit operation processed by both Undo and Redo If the last edit operation had been Paste the Undo command description would have shown Undo paste Most times you would use Undo and Redo to back out or re apply text editing operations It is important to know that you can also use these features when changing tab stop settings and guides Thus you can remove a tab stop you just created or move one back to where it was What Delimits an Undo and Redo Transaction The Undo command follows certain rules to define a transaction It has to determine where a transaction starts and where it ends Most operations have a clearly defined scope For example if you select text and press the DELETE key the whole selection is removed from the file If you undo the operation Qedit simply returns the deleted text Some operations do not have as well defined limits These are some of the rules that Qedit for Windows applies to undo and redo operations 104 e Typing Selecting amp Editing Text Qedit for Windows User Manual
238. me to Qedit for Windows e 1 Network Requirements To edit HP UX or MPE server files you must have a TCP IP connection configured in Microsoft Windows Qedit requires a Winsock 1 1 compliant TCP IP stack If you use a Web browser e g Netscape Navigator or Microsoft Internet Explorer you already have TCP IP installed and configured Qedit works best on a true TCP IP connection Qedit should work with proxy servers This is often used in corporate intranets to give people access to the Internet without exposing their actual IP address When using proxy servers you will likely have to use Qedit s Firewall protocol on MPE connections The Ultimate Editing Tool Qedit for Windows is your ultimate editing tool Now you can get the editing functions you need in one easy to use package Qedit s efficient use of resources lets you edit both local and host files with lightning speed even over a network or the Internet You can seamlessly span multiple platforms concurrently and use keystroke shortcuts and toolbar buttons to quickly maneuver through your files In the familiar environment of Microsoft Windows Qedit s ultimate advantage is that by using it to its full potential it helps you reach yours Multi File Access Simultaneously Qedit for Windows allows you to have multiple MPE HP UX and local files open at the same time You can work on all these platforms seamlessly cutting and pasting information between any number of files
239. minutes between Save operations If you are working with text files as opposed to Qedit workfiles your work is regularly saved If you lose your connection you only lose your work from the last automatic Save operation When this feature is enabled all changes to all your currently opened files are saved at the same time Qedit does not allow you to set different intervals for specific documents Qedit for Windows User Manual Interacting with Hosts Overview Qedit has the capability to interact directly with MPE and HP UX hosts You can execute commands directly on the host and view the results in a dialog box Executing Host Commands Qedit offers different ways to execute host commands You can execute them one at a time and see the results immediately You can create a document with all the commands that you need and have Qedit execute them as one If you frequently execute the same commands you can write a script that can be used repeatedly Single Line Execution The command appears Use Host command on the Script menu to select the connection on which to dimmed if the server does not execute the host command Qedit displays only connections that are already open If support the feature you want to execute a command on a different connection you have to open the connection ahead of time by opening a host file for example Qedit for Windows User Manual Interacting with Hosts e 163 164 e Interacting with Hosts
240. miter characters with their ASCII codes using amp xdigits syntax where digits are hexadecimal e Comments in the language template file itself are identified by lt at the beginning and gt at the end 252 e Appendix D Language Templates Qedit for Windows User Manual e Unless specified otherwise tags attributes and values are not case sensitive Language Block The Language block is required It s the main block which contains all other blocks describing the language The Language tag has the following attributes e Name name of the language If two language templates have the same Name the last template encountered is used for coloring The name is optional and there is no default value e Case indicates whether the language tokens are case sensitive or not If the language is case sensitive enter the word significant Anything else means not case sensitive The attribute is optional and the default is not case sensitive e QeditLanguageCode list of numeric codes where each code is a number corresponding to a Qedit Language There can be as many codes as needed This is useful for language codes that basically identify the same language such as C and C or Cobol Cobolx and Cobfree Language codes are optional and there are no default values The same language code should not be used in more than one template If this happens Qedit uses the first one it encounters starting from the end of the l
241. mmand displays the same dialog box Startup Process Upon startup Qedit searches for QSL scripts to load automatically It also loads language templates used for syntax coloring During this operation progress messages are displayed in the Qedit Startup dialog box If there are no errors the dialog box is discarded If errors are detected an error message is displayed along with the name of the problem file You have to click Continue to acknowledge the error and have Qedit continue with the startup process Qedit for Windows User Manual Qedit Startup x Processing language file D robelle bin S ystem Language badtemplate xml Error at line 1 Logged in Waiting for server response The language will not be loaded Qedit Startup dialog box An error does not prevent Qedit from running However some features might not be functional You should correct the problem and restart Qedit The Application Window Qedit for Windows User Manual When you start Qedit you will see the following application window Application Application Application Control icon Title bar Menu bar Qedit Untitled1 Bl File Edit Text Mark View Script Options Window Help l x olea alaj 0 20 25 pie aE slal Spp ation Application Workspace 4 Az KX For help press F1 Application Status bar Qedit application window Application Icon and Control Menu By clicking the horse icon which iden
242. moving 99 pasting 98 replacing 146 selecting 43 94 shift 103 workspace 33 Tile horizontal 40 186 vertical 40 186 Time zone 226 Timeout 194 Tip of the day 22 Tip of the Day dialog 22 Title bar 24 32 39 Toggle keys 31 Toolbar 26 45 buttons 27 moving 26 rectangular 27 Trace server 11 Trace log file 217 218 220 TRANCOMP command 183 Transmission information 213 Trial 216 17 216 17 Troubleshooting 207 TXT file extension 50 TZ 226 227 228 U UDC logon 20 Undo 30 108 transaction 107 Undo all 108 UNIX 1 55 57 host 53 notation 69 Unix files 68 Unload scripts 177 Unnumbered file 81 Upgrade 12 User Defined Command logon 20 User labels MPE 191 Index e 271 V VESOFT 21 215 219 WwW warning folded lines 82 line number 83 server 82 Web site 4 Whole words 64 66 Wildcards directory 72 Open Host File 81 Win32S subsystem 1 Window application 23 attributes 23 close 40 164 control menu 32 document 31 maximize 40 minimize 40 restore 40 size 39 terminal 3 188 Windows character set 56 Word search 143 Workfile 28 33 188 232 rename 162 Save As 162 272 e Index Qedit for Windows User Manual
243. mp Opening Files e 71 Opening a File 72 e Creating amp Opening Files Opening Selected Files Qedit allows you to open files from the Directory dialog box Once you have selected a file or a number of files simply click the appropriate button When opening files on a UNIX host or in the POSIX namespace on MPE Qedit prepends the file name with dot slash to indicate the current working directory if the file name does not start with a dot or a slash that already indicate a relative or absolute path If you have an MPE file and a POSIX file that have similar names the server might not open the file you expect For example let s say the MPE file is called MYFILE and the POSIX file is called my file Qedit does not prefix the POSIX file with because it does not distinguish lowercase from uppercase letters Aside from the case the names are identical In this situation the server always finds files in the MPE namespace first Thus if the filename is not explicitly identified with MYF ILE will always be opened Printing a Directory Listing You can get a copy of information displayed in the Directory dialog Simply click the Print button The listing can only be printed to a local printer Saving Host Files If you have invoked the Directory dialog from the Host Save As dialog the Open button becomes Save You can navigate through the directory structure until you get to the desired location You can e
244. n or when you first run Qedit for Windows if you selected Login at startup selected for that connection It remains connected even though you close all the files on that connection default until you either exit from Qedit for Windows or use the Disconnect command in the File menu Connecting Through a Network In Qedit for Windows a network is a group of two or more computers that can exchange packets using the TCP IP protocol There are other types of networks such as a NOVELL NetWare network or a NetBEUI network but Qedit for Windows cannot run on these networks The Internet is an example of a Qedit for Windows network A LAN with TCP IP enabled is another The active computers on the Qedit for Windows network can consist of MPE and HP UX servers from Hewlett Packard plus PCs running Windows 95 or Windows NT 3 51 or 4 0 The Qedit for Windows client software runs on the PC and the Qedit for Windows server software runs on MPE X and HP UX hosts A Qedit for Connecting to a Host or Network e 51 Windows network can also consist of several LANs connected together via gateways to the Internet Accessing a File Server File servers are different from TCP IP servers running the Qedit for Windows software A file server can allow you to access files on common disk drives as if the shared disk drive were actually plugged into your own PC This works best when the file server and your PC are both on the same LAN You do not have to cr
245. n saved yet If the icon has only black lines it means the file has not been modified since the last save Qedit workfiles exist only on a host currently there is no equivalent format for PC files When you edit a workfile the document type icon always appears the same This is because changes in these files are posted directly to the host server As a result the Save command on the File menu is available and the Save button is not available when you work on a Qedit workfile Access Mode Qedit displays the type of access you have to a file write or read only by using a pencil icon The pencil icon indicates that you have write access to the file i e you can make changes and save them This indicator remains on the status bar for the duration of the edit session If you do not have permission to modify the file you will see the read only icon Getting Started e 33 34 e Getting Started Cancel Button The Cancel button is available when Qedit performs operations that are lengthy When available you can click the Cancel button to stop the operation before it is complete For example if you ask Qedit to print the current file you might see the following status bar 2 X SB Printing Line 42 Col 1 Cancel button available during print operation Qedit shows a printing operation under way and the Cancel button is available Cursor Position The cursor position is normally a relative record and column coordinate In the
246. n it starts up is open the document database and load its contents If the procedure succeeds the current document database is copied to QWINDDB BKP An error message like the one below is displayed if the procedure detects a problem Qedit N The Document Archive could not be read C WINNTSQ WDEBUG QWINDDB DAT has a bad format Document database problem error You should write down the exact error message Click OK to proceed with the next step Qedit then prompts for an action to take Document Database Recovery x Unable to use the document database QWINDDB DAT Click Restore to use the last valid document database Click Delete to replace it with a new one Delete Help Document database recovery options Whichever option you chose Qedit makes a copy of the bad document database to QWINDDB DAT BAD The Restore option is enabled only if there s a backup copy available Select Delete to get rid of the current document database and start with a new one Select Restore to return to the last known valid database Qedit copies qwinddb bkp back to qwinddb dat and tries to load it If this fails again an error message is displayed and the document database is erased In any case you should report the problem to Robelle technical support with the exact error message and if at all possible send the bad document database along for further analysis Troubleshooting e 225 Error Messages F
247. n of the options on the Local tab go to Setting Default Options for New Files on page 85 Customizing the Server Qedit for Windows User Manual When working with files located on host computers Qedit for Windows uses a client server architecture This means that the client program running under Windows interacts with a server program running on the host computers Qedit has to know how to contact the server and the server s behavior can be customized directly on the host How To Specify To the Server Program Qedit needs to know how to connect to the various servers For normal connections to MPE hosts you have to specify the actual name of the server By default Qedit tries to execute Qedit Pub Robelle This is default value for MPE Server Name text box For MPE connections using the Firewall protocol and UNIX hosts you have to specify the port number on which the server is listening to The default value for HP UX Port Number is 7395 Getting Started e 19 20 e Getting Started Configure Server Settings x MPE Server Settings MPE Server Name qedit pub robelle a Help I PUB Qeditmgr Cancel Group Qeditmgr HP UX Port Number 7395 Connection Template C windows GQEDCONN DAT Configure Server Settings dialog box Configuration Files on the Host You can also customize the behavior of the server by putting appropriate commands in a configuration file on the host The Qedit server always exec
248. ncluding the new file name See Notation in Host Operating Systems on page 67 for more details Click Save Printing on a Local Printer Qedit can access local and remote equipment so you can print a hard copy of a file on the printer attached to your PC or you can send the file to a printer configured on the host host files only The Page Setup command is also accessible by clicking and holding the Print button Qedit for Windows User Manual Print Options on a Local Printer You can send a local or host file to the printer attached to your PC or normally available from Windows You can specify the print options by using the Page Setup command in the File menu Copying amp Printing Files e 151 This function is not available at the moment 152 e Copying amp Printing Files Page Setup V Wrap long lines Margins Print line numbers 0 5 E o5 o5 0 6 V Print page headings Lines per page 160 Inches C Centimeters Bo cos Page Setup dialog box When the Page Setup dialog box appears you can specify the print options for the local printer These settings do not control the print options for the host printer e Wrap long lines This option is enabled by default If lines are too wide to fit on the page Qedit fits as much as possible on each line and then wraps the remaining text on the next line For most languages Qedit wraps at word boundaries Although Qedit does wrap hos
249. nd Trace The server tries to open an outbound link on the port number specified in the d parameter back to the originator s IP address If the outbound link cannot be established the server writes error messages to the log files and terminates Use NSCONTROL STATUS to ensure the RPM and RPML services are running on the host Because the outbound port number is assigned on the PC and the number changes for every connection you might run into problems if you are using a firewall at your site You might have to reconfigure your firewall to allow the use of these ports Unfortunately there is no easy way to determine in advance what these port numbers will be If the link is established the file is opened and data is transferred between the server and the client Firewall Protocol on MPE Connections The firewall protocol on HP e3000 hosts borrows traits from the RPM protocol and the HP UX server protocol RPM is part of the MPE operating system and as such is mostly transparent If you use the firewall protocol you have to manually run the Qedit server in a special mode It replaces part of the RPM process and takes care of managing incoming connection requests In order to open a file on an HP e3000 host running with the firewall protocol Qedit for Windows must go through a number of steps 1 Qedit for Windows User Manual You have to start the Qedit main server process on the host For detailed installation instructions re
250. nd interpreter CI PUB SYS as a child process The CI process is created with Stdin Stdlist and Stderr redirected The commands entered in the host command dialog box or in the host document are passed in as St din Any output normally written out by each command to Stdlist is captured in temporary file Similarly if a command writes information to Stderr these messages are also going to be captured in a temporary file Both Stdlist and Stderr are then transmitted to the client where they are displayed in the host dialog box Because the CI process is part of the session process tree it has access to almost everything that makes up the session environment such as MPE variables However there are a few things you have to remember User Defined Commands UDC User Defined Commands UDC are not cataloged thus are not available Logon UDCs are not executed when the connection is established Command files and programs are accessible but since logon UDCs are not executed the HPPATH variable might not be set MPE might not be able to find the file you are looking for If some of the host commands require that the environment be set in a particular way you have to either e explicitly set the environment before you start executing the host commands e change the QEDITMGR server configuration files so the environment is initialized properly Server specific settings can be executed conditionnally by checking the QEDSERVMODE variable first
251. nd cannot be reversed For this reason Qedit asks for confirmation before executing the Revert command Confirm Revert Ed Discard all changes to file COBOL4 PUB DEMO This action cannot be undone 1 Revert Help Cancel Confirm Revert dialog box Redo Command If you want to re apply a modification that you have just canceled you can use the Redo command in the Edit menu The Redo command is very handy if you are canceling consecutive modifications and go one step too far In standard Windows applications such as Microsoft Word redo means to reverse the last undo operation It also has the same meaning in Qedit for Windows Unfortunately in Qedit for HP e3000 and Qedit for HP UX redo means to repeat a previous command This confusion however is unavoidable in English Typing Selecting amp Editing Text e 105 Text Formatting Features Overview Fonts NOTE Qedit prints the font defined in the document or the print driver uses the closest approximation available Qedit for Windows User Manual Qedit for Windows has a number of practical text formatting features that are useful in a programming environment These features include various tools and methods for aligning text as well as selecting fonts for documents and directories Word processing applications such as Wordpad and Windows Write can highlight a heading and apply more than one font to a file Qedit for Windows however does n
252. nd moves the rest to a separate line In all other cases Qedit truncates lines that are too long If this happens Qedit displays a warning message To paste text in a file 1 Position the insertion point where you want to paste 2 Select Paste from the Edit menu to insert the contents of the Clipboard to the file Moving Text The process of moving text consists of two parts First you must remove the text from its original position then you have to paste it to a new location To move text 96 e Typing Selecting amp Editing Text Qedit for Windows User Manual 1 Select the block of text you want to move by highlighting it Shortcut CTRL X 2 Select the Edit menu and click Cut to put the selected text on the Clipboard The previous contents of the Clipboard are replaced with your new selection Toolbar do The text in your document is still selected Qedit for Windows User Manual Typing Selecting amp Editing Text e 97 Shortcut CTRL V Toolbar e Deleting Text The BACKSPACE key does not have any effect in overwrite mode The cursor just moves to the left 3 Position the insertion point where you want to insert the text This could be in the same file another file in Qedit or even another application Select the Edit menu and click Paste You can also perform operations to and from the Clipboard using shortcut menus See Shortcut Menu on Document Workspace on page 45 There are several ways to delet
253. nd save it back the user labels are removed If you want to preserve user labels if any you have to add the following line to one of your server configuration files Set Work Labels On This does not affect editing operations in any way Qedit for Windows User Manual Power Tips for Developers e 187 Network Issues TCP IP Firewalls Qedit works best on a true TCP IP connection created with a Winsock 1 1 compliant TCP IP stack Qedit should work with proxy servers This is often used in corporate intranets to allow the people on the LAN to surf the net without exposing their actual IP addresses to the whole Internet When using a proxy server you will likely have to use Qedit s Firewall protocol on MPE connections In some installations you might have to configure the proxy server to ignore the host s IP address If you want to use Qedit to access corporate servers from home or a remote office you might have to reconfigure your firewall software or router With the Firewall protocol the connection to all UNIX and MPE hosts occurs on port 7395 Connections to MPE hosts start off on port 1542 which is the default and continue on other ports If you have to use Qedit s firewall protocol you might have to change your firewall with the appropriate port number See MPE Host Connections on page 211 Most firewall configurations are done by IP address If you use an ISP when you connect from home you might be assigned a rand
254. nding on the network load these packets might temporarily remain on your PC These packets are stored in memory in an area of limited size In the Transmit Queue the queue length indicates how many packets are currently waiting for transmission This number should change every time you look at the File Information dialog box The highwater mark value indicates the highest value ever attained by the queue length The capacity is the absolute maximum number of packets that can be queued Transmit Queue Length 0 Highwater Mark 64 Capacity 16384 The Connection Response Time section gives some statistics on the overall performance of the network Once every minute Qedit sends a transaction to the host to ensure that it is still processing transactions Because these transactions require no processing on the host just an acknowledgment they are the ones used to produce the response time values The first two items indicate the amount of time Qedit for Windows had to wait before it received an acknowledgment from the server The Last Transaction item indicates the delay for the last acknowledgment from the host The Longest transaction value indicates the longest wait for an acknowledgment since the connection was established The Connection Time indicates how long you have been connected to the host computer for the connection Connection Response Time Last Transaction 449 msec Longest transaction 449 msec Connection Time 1 minute
255. ne the maximum line length of a file and control spaces at the end of a line All these options expand the Qedit toolkit Record Numbers Qedit for Windows User Manual Lines can be referenced by either a number relative to the beginning to a file record number or a number assigned by a host line number Qedit for Windows can use these two types of numbers as navigational tools Host Line Numbers Some Qedit for Windows host files have line numbers which are sequential numbers assigned by the host Although line numbers are stored within a host file they do not appear in the document window Line numbers can have up to 3 decimals e g 115 832 See Finding a Line Number in a Host File on page 141 for more information Record Numbers All files in Qedit for Windows have record numbers which are ordinal numbers that represent a line position relative to the beginning of the file Thus record numbers can be integers only no decimals When this option is enabled record numbers appear in the document window See Finding a Record Number on page 142 for more information Displaying Record Numbers If the Record number command is enabled on the View menu Qedit shifts the text to the right and inserts the record number of each line These numbers appear dimmed because they cannot be modified Line Features e 127 Trailing Blanks 128 e Line Features fj Vancouver MPE ROUTINES PUB DEMO of x 13 Instal
256. nes and the destination has only six the last four lines in the Clipboard are not pasted If the destination area is longer i e has more lines than the source selection text from the Clipboard is repeated For example if the source selection had five lines and the destination area has 10 lines the source data appears twice If you want to get rid of the redundant data you can select it and use the Clear command on the Edit menu This replaces the contents of the selection with spaces If you want to remove the text and shift the remaining text use the DELETE key Inserting a Rectangular Selection There is currently no direct way of inserting a rectangular selection If you want to do this 1 Select the lines on which you want to insert the Clipboard 2 Use the Insert command of the Column submenu on the Edit menu to create an empty area Make sure you make it wide enough to accommodate the text you copied to the Clipboard 3 Select the newly created area if it s not already selected 4 Paste the Clipboard Deleting or Clearing a Rectangular Selection To remove the contents of a rectangular selection use the DELETE key This removes the selection and shifts the rest the lines to the left To clear the contents of the selection i e replace it with spaces use the Clear command on the Edit menu Extending a Rectangular Selection To select columns from the current location to the beginning or end of the file use
257. newly created files will be listed at the bottom of the menu list and they will be numbered 1 2 3 etc You can go to any of the files by typing its number or by selecting the file from the menu list Customizing Opening a File Qedit for Windows User Manual Setting Default Options for New Files If you want to set the default options for a new file 1 Select the Preferences command from the Options menu 2 When the Preferences dialog box appears go to the appropriate tab for the platform where the file resides The platforms currently supported are UNIX MPE and local files 3 When you see the correct tab select the options you want to use as defaults 4 If desired you can set the defaults for the other platforms at this point also 5 Click OK to save the options as the new defaults Default options are used for new files files that are not in the document database i e have never been opened in Qedit or files in the document database but for which you have not specified custom settings Changes made in the Preferences dialog box are not applied to currently opened documents Most of these options are described in detail in Defining File Options on page 63 To use a default color scheme select the scheme name from the Default Creating amp Opening Files e 85 This option is only available in version 4 7 04 and later 86 e Creating amp Opening Files colors list box If you want to define a new color scheme or c
258. ng a Saved Connection scsi issi sern reseta nesaat osese rass T Enei na kEi TiSi 56 Opening a Connection ereer n n ere ish ede tee ioe ted ipe an a eare E eE ERSA ee 56 Opening a Temporary Connection seseeseseeseesreeeeressstsesrtereretsstsrsttrrstetssesrsrerresereee 56 Opening a Saved Connection 0 ce eeceecsseseesseceeeeceteecsaeeecsaeceseecsaecaeesecaeeseeneseeeaees 57 Editing a Saved Connection senenin nenn n a iene ance viet baat ease led i 58 Modifying a Saved Connection ceessccssecssesecseeeeceseeecesecssesecnevsecsaeeeesaecaeeaeeneeees 58 Renaming a Saved Connections esisiini n a e e EE 58 D l tinga Saved Connection S rassasiar hr n r a E RE 58 Gl sing a Connect omiensa aie A e a ena eaeh ai aane a aia T eaa EE A EE a EA RE 59 Customizing a Connection srin cionin a rin a e a E oa r AE a ai 59 Automatically Logging In at Startup sseseseeseseseseesesresssrstsrrtererrrsesrerreresssesesrerreree 59 Closing Connections without Open Files sseseseeseesesssssesieeesrerssrsesrerreresssesrsreereree 59 Creating amp Opening Files 61 Creating Files c3 26iig aer r a a A a Ses A ae ty 61 Creating a New Host Files snaren ia area Busts aae Ea aeaea aa aaa o io 61 Creating a New Local Files pss ieee iea serrie erta poa ra eroto Trie a aikaa ii 62 Defining File Options e eek eee ear a ee hea emanated E ees 63 Setting the Line Termination Character cc ceesesseesecseeeeceseeeceseeeeesecaeeaeeseeneeeeens 6
259. nly for files that have both Qedit for Windows User Manual 4 Define the remaining terms of your search See Defining the Terms of a Search above for a list of terms 5 Click Search Reverse or Search Forward to perform the search operation Search Forward finds the first occurrence of the string in the selection Search Reverse finds the last occurrence in the selection Searching in Columns To search for a string in certain columns of a file enable the Search in columns option and enter the column numbers in the appropriate text boxes Column numbers are relative to the Language of the file For most languages the first column is one For others such as COBOL the first column is seven The left column number is required but the right column is optional If the right column number is not specified Qedit assumes the search starts at the left column and continues to the end of the line The column numbers specified are inclusive That is if you enter five as the left column and seven as the right column Qedit searches three columns five six and seven Finding a Line Number in a Host File Lines in a file are identified by numbers All files local and host have relative numbers also known as record numbers That is lines are numbered from one and incremented by one In addition to record numbers host files often have absolute line numbers That is each line has explicit sequence numbers that are stored in ASCII Absolu
260. ns All these selections basically work the same However there are differences specific to rectangular selections Copying and Cutting a Rectangular Selection To copy or cut text from certain columns all you have to do is select the area You can create rectangular selections only with the mouse There is currently no equivalent keyboard function To create a rectangular selection simply hold the CTRL key and click the mouse button as you would for a regular selection Once the text is selected use the Copy or Cut command on the Edit menu to send the selection to the Clipboard You can also use the CTRL C and CTRL X shortcut keys Pasting a Rectangular Selection in Replacement To paste the contents of a rectangular selection you have to select the area into which you want to paste This area does not have to be exactly the same size as the area copied to the Clipboard Qedit does its best to fit it in the destination If the destination area is narrower than the source selection wider lines from the Clipboard are truncated 102 e Typing Selecting amp Editing Text Qedit for Windows User Manual If the destination area is wider than the source selection text from each source line is pasted on a separate line and Qedit pads the rest of the area with spaces If the destination area is shorter i e has fewer lines than the source selection the extra lines in the Clipboard are dropped For example if the source selection had 10 li
261. nsert the selection in these commands for easy searches or file opens If you have selected some text the selection is inserted in the commands If you select one of the Find commands Qedit uses the search options used on the last Find operation The Save position of insertion point command saves the current cursor position on the caret stack If you have selected some text the command reads Save position of selected text The Go to previous saved position command jumps to the location last saved on the caret stack The next command in the menu Properties gives you direct access to the File properties dialog box so that you can change document attributes This dialog box can also be accessed using the Properties command in the File menu The last command Copy pathname to clipboard puts the fully qualified name of the active document in the Clipboard For an MPE host file this would be in the form of lt file gt lt group gt lt account gt If the file is in the POSIX namespace of an MPE host or the file is on a UNIX host the format is lt absolute pathname gt lt file gt If the file is local the format is lt drive gt lt absolute pathname gt lt file gt If you are working on a host file there is a command to execute the file as host commands If there is no active selection the command is Run file as host commands If there is a selection the command is Run selection as host commands Send To Function in Windows
262. nserted in the tag area The second part Set X List On Off allows you to control the display of the tag area In total you have four 4 possible combinations e Set X List Off No automatic or manual update tags are hidden e Set X List On Manual update allowed no automatic update tags are displayed e Set X lt string gt lt date gt List Off Automatic update no manual update allowed tags are hidden e Set X lt string gt lt date gt List On Automatic update no manual update allowed tags are displayed Set X List On vs Set X List Off The List option of the Set X command controls whether or not you see the tags in the document window The text area only goes to column 72 Because you do not have access to columns 73 to 80 you cannot manually enter tags Line Features e 129 Of course this requires Set X List On to have the tag area displayed 130 e Line Features fy Vancouver MPE COBOL4 PUB DEMO olx fe 7 10 20 30 40 60 70 roi lYiritiiiitins 1 spell status area 05 spell cond word pic s9 4 88 spell stat ok value 88 spell found value 88 spell not found value 7 e ae a A l 88 spell bad word len value 88 spell bad line len value 88 spell no main aux value 88 spell no user aux value 88 spell no both aux value X Line 6 Col amp COBOL file with tag area not displayed If this option is enabled the area in columns 73 to 80 appears in a different back
263. nt delimiter it s going to be used as a quote Similarly if the letter C appears as a comment delimiter as well as in the keyword list it s going to be used as the start of a comment Text within quotes is not analyzed Similarly text following the start of a comment is not analyzed Customizing Text Formatting Features 120 e Text Formatting Features Displaying the Ruler Bar When Opening Files The ruler bar can be enabled in each document If you would like every document window to open with the ruler bar first select Preferences from the Options menu Then enable the Open file with a ruler bar option from the Default tab NOTE If this option is enabled the ruler bar will appear in all the panes created with the split view feature Qedit for Windows User Manual Setting the Default Font for Document Windows If you would like all your files to have a specific font you set it as Qedit s default To set the default font for all new documents 1 Select Preferences from the Options menu 2 When the Qedit Preferences dialog box appears go to the Defaults tab and click Display Font 3 When the Font dialog box appears select the Font the Font style and the Size If you want to apply a font size that is not available in the list you can type a custom size in the text box Once the default font is changed any new document you open will automatically use the new font Any open documents at the time of the change will
264. nt systems RDBMS such as Oracle Allbase and MySQL Although these systems are based on SQL they all have differences and unique Text Formatting Features e 119 language extensions For this reason Qedit for Windows comes with multiple SQL template files oracle xml allbase xml and mysql xml Most of these systems allow creation and execution of script files Typically the script files share the same extension sql That s what is used in the template files To avoid any confusion and make sure Qedit picks the appropriate template for your environment you have to remove the ambiguity To do this you can do one of the following e You can rename the templates you do not use Change the xm1 extension to something else e You can move the files from robelle qedit system language to another directory e You can edit the templates you do not intend to use Open them in Qedit and remove the extension blocks or change the extension identifier to something unique Order of Precedence The same characters or strings can be used in different categories in a language template This can affect coloring behavior and may appear incorrect to users That s why this is not recommended When analyzing text for syntax coloring Qedit uses the following order of precedence to identify categories 1 Quotes 2 Comments 3 Keywords 4 Regular text For example if double quote character is defined as a quote delimiter as well as a comme
265. nter a new name or you can select one from the list To save the file click Save Very often you will be working on existing files In order to modify these files you first need to open them Qedit can open files in a number of ways including some shortcut methods Qedit always applies a file s saved attributes from its document database no matter how the file is opened Document Attributes Saved by Qedit Qedit maintains a document database in which it stores document specific attributes Document information is added or updated whenever files are opened saved or closed Local file names are fully qualified including the drive letter Host file names are also fully qualified including the connection name on which they were opened For each file in the database Qedit keeps track of the following settings e the cursor position or selection active at the time of closing e the display status of the Ruler bar and Record numbers e current Tab settings e current Guide settings Qedit for Windows User Manual Qedit for Windows User Manual e all of the check box settings from the Options page of the Properties dialog box e the font settings from the Options page of the Properties dialog box e the document specific COBOL tag Qedit is careful to track only these 6 settings for each document They are stored locally in the database called Qwinddb dat See Support Files on page 11 Nothing is stored on the server That means y
266. ny changes yet the Undo tool is unavailable and appears dimmed Getting Started e 29 mala Find Previous Find and Find Next tools 30 o Getting Started The Redo button is available only if you have used the Undo button at least once It is used to re apply the operations that have been reversed by an undo operation starting with the last one Search Tools The search group includes three buttons allowing you to find strings within the file Find previous locates the previous occurrence of the string Find locates a new string or changes the search options and Find Next locates the next occurrence of the string To define the search criteria select the Find button so that you can specify the string and any search options you want to use in the Find String dialog box Once you have used the Find button the Find previous and Find next buttons become available Application Workspace Qedit uses the application workspace to display all its document windows The workspace can display multiple documents at the same time or only one document can occupy the whole area Document windows cannot be moved completely outside the application workspace Application Status Bar The status bar at the bottom of the application displays various indicators If you prefer not to see the status bar you can hide it by selecting the Status Bar command of the View menu This setting is saved across invocations which means that if you hide the sta
267. o an existing Favorites folder Opening a File from the Favorites The filename now appears on the Favorites list To open it select the Favorites command on the File menu find the file in the list and click on it Because filenames can be very long the name may be shortened in the list Qedit replaces some characters in the middle with three dots However when you put the mouse pointer on a name Qedit displays the fully qualified name on the status bar Creating amp Opening Files e 83 84 e Creating amp Opening Files Qedit Readme tc lolx OREH Eit Iet Mark View Script Options Window Help laj x C New to see e saa m Open gt e A or Qedit or Windows Recent Files for Qedit for Windo A Favorites gt Project ABC 1 Vancouver MPE HOSTCMD PUB DEMO X Beve 1 CAWindows Readme tt Close Disconnect Save Cites Save As SEJE AI Properties Print Ctrl P Page Setup Printon Hast Exit 4 P A XxX Line 1 Open HOSTCMD PUB DEMO NUM Ui Opening a file from the Favorites There s no limit to the number of files that can be added to the Favorites list and each folder However Qedit only displays a limited number of files This limit can be changed in the General tab of the Preferences dialog You can have between 5 and 50 files The default limit is 20 When the filelists are displayed a shortcut character is assigned to the first 35 files
268. o use the HP UX kill command In this example you would enter kil 122 If you are planning to install the MPE server you have to make sure the server program is not used by anyone either as a host based editor or as a server with Firewall protocol To determine if the program is accessed on newer versions of MPE you can do 1 listf gqedit pub robelle 8 KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK FILE QEDIT PUB ROBELLE 6 Accessors 0 6 P 6 L 0 W 0 6 Share R 7 S2506 RICKY CLERK ACCTG P 1 L 0 W 1 R 1 DEV 15 S2504 GL CYBIL DEV P 1 L 0 W 1 R 1 REM 24 201 21 203 52503 AR JOE DEV P 1 L 0 W 1 R 1 REM 207 42 133 226 S2501 BOB OPERATOR OPER P 1 L 0 W 1 R 1 DEV 20 Getting Started e 9 38351 QSERVER MGR ROBELLE P 1 L 0 W 1 R 1 SPID 02552 2 The lines with LDEV are typically sessions running host based Qedit If you know who these users are you should contact them and ask they exit from Qedit until the installation is complete 3 The lines with REM are typically remote users connected over the network They are likely to be Qedit for Windows users You should contact them and ask they disconnect until the installation is complete 4 The line starting with J is a job running on the host It could be a job using Qedit to perform some file edits or a Qedit server running with Firewall protocol There is not easy way to tell wh
269. of Qedit s toggle keys Show invisibles Displays formatting characters that are normally invisible Script Menu The Script menu on the toolbar contains the following commands Compile Run Load script Save compiled script Run as host Host Command Manage scripts and Control panel Other commands on the menu are custom commands and added by previously loaded scripts Reference e 197 198 e Reference Compile Compiles the script stored in the active document Run Compiles and runs the script stored in the active document Load script Loads a script in the Qedit script environment Save compiled script Compiles the script stored in the active document and saves the result in compiled format Run as host command Executes the file contents or lines in the selection as host commands Host Command Prompts the host command dialog box in which you can execute commands on a specific connection Manage scripts Prompts the Manage scripts dialog box which allows loading and unloading of scripts Control panel Prompts the Script Control dialog box which allows control over script execution display script messages and source code for debugging purposes Options Menu The Options menu on the toolbar contains the following commands Preferences Connections Debug and Server Preferences Prompts the Qedit Preferences dialog box in which you choose default settings for General Searching and Defaults opti
270. of column operations there is now one exception to this rule If you have a selection and you hit the TAB key the selected lines are shifted right The text is not replaced If you want to replace the selection you have to use the DELETE key or any other key except TAB first to get rid of the selection then enter the tab character Known Problems Here is a list of problems that were known at the time the version was released These problems will be fixed in future versions 4 e Welcome to Qedit for Windows Qedit for Windows User Manual Document Window Displayed Incorrectly You might run into a display problem when minimizing document windows to an icon If you work on other documents and restore the icon to its previous size the window might appear without borders taking only part of the application workspace This is a minor problem but does not affect editing operations To correct this problem simply maximize the window Qedit for Windows User Manual Welcome to Qedit for Windows e 5 Getting Started Installing Qedit for Windows Qedit for Windows User Manual The installation process for Qedit for Windows is the same as in any other Windows application Qedit is available as a download from Robelle s website There are two basic types of installations Typical for stand alone PCs and Network Workstation for network file servers If you have virus checking software it might prevent the installation process from copying Qed
271. of the other window visible to scroll and click Now here is a test Configure your four windows so that two of them are located at the top and cover 3 4 of the Qedit workspace and the other two are located at the bottom and come up 3 4 of the way Hint adjust the location and size of each independently then use CTRL TAB to switch between them Qedit for Windows User Manual Power Tips for Developers e 183 Working Smarter with a Terminal Window Open up a terminal window on your host using a tool such as Hyper Terminal or Reflection You will need a terminal window to test an application whose source files you are modifying with Qedit for Windows Now you can switch between the edit windows and an execution window Consider some typical tasks To compile your source file you need to ensure that your local edits are posted to the host server then execute a compiler program on the server If you are editing a regular file you will want to use the Save command in the File menu before going to the terminal window and compiling the file Otherwise you will be compiling the old version If you are editing a named Qedit workfile you do not have to save your changes because when you leave Qedit for Windows it automatically posts changes to all open Qedit workfiles on all hosts If you find compiling errors just click Qedit for Windows and use the Goto command in the Mark menu to jump to the line with the syntax error To execute your revised pr
272. often You can add filenames to the list You can create groups to assemble files related to a project for example Of course you can remove them from the list A file can only appear once in the list even if you use folders Adding to the Favorites To add a file to the list of favorites 1 Open the file 2 Click the right mouse button to display the shortcut menu 3 Click on Insert here to add the file at this level Qedit Vancouver MPE COBOL4 PUB DEMO olx Bl File Edit Text Mark View Script Options Window Help lej x Di co E ala 2 20 20 AAL aE slala 0i spell line pic x 1000 ras 01i spell linelen pic 39 4 comp value 1000 01i spell word pic x 24 01i spell wordlen pic 39 4 comp value 24 noire Paste L call Save position of insertion point Paral Properties atus area Copy pathname to clipboard phen Add to favorites New folder Run file as host command call SPELLEND using spell workspace spell mode1 a a B X Line 38 Col 7 For help press F1 NUM 7 Adding a file to the top level Favorites Qedit for Windows User Manual Creating amp Opening Files e 81 82 e Creating amp Opening Files Adding to a Favorites Folder You can organize the Favorites list into groups or folders A folder could represent files needed for a larger project You can also have multiple levels of folders In other words a folder can contain ot
273. ogram just stay in the terminal window after a successful compile link the program and type the command to execute it Advantages of Qedit Workfiles Automatic Save Changes to a Qedit workfile are posted to the server immediately You do not need to save your work explicitly See Saving a File on page 157 Sole Access to Files If you want to make sure that only one person at a time has access to a file you can convert a file to the Qedit workfile format This still gives a group of people access to the file but only the first person to open the file gets write access Storing a file in a Qedit workfile format ensures that no one else can modify the file while you have it open See Converting a File to Qedit Format on page 150 Preventing Accidental Overwrite of Files If you are not working on Qedit workfiles there can be simultaneous access to file To prevent another user from changing a file while you are working on a copy of it you can enable a feature that warns you about a possible overwrite This gives you the ability to decide if someone else s changes can be overwritten when you save your changes See Comparing Timestamps Before Overwriting Host Files on page 162 Qedit server 5 1 10 or later is If you wish to get tighter control over host files you are working on you can enable required the Set Text Exclusive feature of the server You need to enter the command in one of the server configuration files Qed
274. olved you run the risk of losing data You should only select OK when you are sure the connection with the server has been broken and the transaction cannot be completed If you want to give the transaction a bit more time select Cancel Customizing Saving and Closing Files Automatically Posting Qedit Workfiles on the Server To post the latest changes to all workfiles when you go to another Windows application select Preferences from the Options menu and enable the Automatically post Qedit workfiles option Qedit offers this option in case another application needs to use the file If you disable this feature you can lose some changes to the file Qedit for Windows User Manual Saving amp Closing Files e 161 162 e Saving amp Closing Files Comparing Timestamps Before Overwriting Host Files By default Qedit does not save your edited file on the server if someone else has modified the file after you got your copy of it If you choose the Compare Timestamps before Overwriting on Server option Qedit allows you to write over other people s work without receiving a warning To change the default simply select Preferences in the Options menu and enable this option Saving Changes at Regular Intervals Qedit can now automatically save the latest changes to a file at regular intervals To use this feature you have to enable the Save automatically option in the General tab of the Preferences dialog box Then specify the number of
275. om IP address which can make configuring the firewall more difficult Most ISPs however use a small range of addresses for a specific user Client to Server Handshaking Qedit for Windows User Manual In order to detect and report possible connection problems during a session the client and the server programs are constantly exchanging information Of course if you are working on a host file information is always flowing your changes are transmitted to the server and the server returns lines as you scroll through the file Every time the client sends a transaction over the network the server sends back a transaction to acknowledge receiving the client s request If you have started a connection but are not actively using it you might be working on a different host or have simply left your office for a moment the client keeps Network Issues e 189 190 e Network Issues sending special transactions to the server to make sure the connection is still functional These transactions are called KeepAlive If you enable tracing on the server and look at the trace file you would see something like this Sep 22 1997 09 31 39 187 TRead Length 12 KeepAlive version 1 id 0 Sep 22 1997 09 31 39 187 TSent Length 12 KeepAlive version 1 id 0 The first entry identifies the KeepAlive transaction received from the client The second entry shows the server sending the acknowledgment back The client sends such a transaction every minu
276. ompanies have installed network security devices such as firewalls to restrict access even further Depending on the installation these devices might prevent Qedit from communicating to the server using the default MPE connection protocol Qedit offers an alternate connection scheme that should solve this problem while satisfying the customer s security needs For these connections you have to enable Use firewall protocol Remember that this protocol requires additional installation on the host Refer to MPE Host Connections on page 211 or the appropriate host based Qedit manual for complete instructions e Hello 54 e Connecting to a Host or Network Qedit for Windows User Manual Qedit for Windows User Manual Enter your normal hello command into Hello text box but do not include the word hello Each new session on MPE has its own hello string A hello string can contain up to four elements with the following syntax lt session gt lt user gt lt account gt lt group gt Session and group names are optional e Session and Group Passwords Each element name can have a different password for login information giving each hello string up to four passwords Session User Account and Group For example these are valid commands ralph purch entry ordentry clerk distrib manager payables Note that the Session password is only used with third party security packages such as VESOFT s Security 3000 Defining an HP
277. on in the string The character class can be as long as needed A character class for numeric digits would be 0123456789 Note the list does not have to be in sorted order You could have entered the digits in reverse order or in random order and the character class would still be valid It just makes it harder to verify that all digits are there Similarly a character class for lowercase letters would be abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz It is really important to understand that a match occurs if one of the characters in the class is found Using the abc example above if we wanted to make sure we had this string followed by a digit we would enter abc 0123456789 Matches abc0O abcil and so on to abc9 Appendix C Regular Expressions e 245 To make it even more restrictive we could have used abc 13579 Matches abc followed by one odd digit Because a character class is only a list of possible values you can mix and match all the characters in the ASCII code table plimy246 e Matches pie pre p4e pre This would find text that starts with the letter p and ends with an e with a single character between them matching one of the letters a m or y one of the digits 2 4 or 6 an exclamation mark a period or an asterisk Note the period and asterisk are not metacharacters anymore Of course if the character class contains a lot of possible values it can be tedious and error prone to enter each character The hyphen
278. on to a language template simply restart Qedit for Windows to implement it immediately Extension support for HP UX and Posix files is done a little differently The server always assign a language code to a file The language code is checked against the language templates If there s a match Qedit uses that language If there s no match and the language code is Text or Data which are generic types Qedit looks at the file extension If there s a match that s the language If the language code and extension do not match a template the file simply does not have a language and no syntax coloring is done Here are file extensions identifying C or C files lt extension gt h lt extension gt lt extension gt c lt extenstion gt lt extension gt cpp lt extension gt String Delimiters The Quote blocks define characters that delimit literals within the language Quote blocks are optional Each Quote block contains a StringDelimiter block and optional Escape blocks The Quote tag attributes are e Type indicates if a string started with this delimiter can span multiple lines If strings can be continued on separate lines use Cont inuable Anything else means the string ends with the current line It is optional and the default is not continuable e ReopenContinuation indicates whether an opening quote character is required on the continuation lines If required enter t rue Anything else means the delimiter is not required on cont
279. one line up t one line down one character left lt one character right gt beginning of the line Home end of the line End one page up less one line Page Up one page down less one line Page Down Cursor movement keys can be combined with other keys to provide other shortcuts See Key Combinations and Functions on page 200 Setting Markers in a File Shortcut F11 key Shortcut F12 key Shortcut CTRL F11 Qedit for Windows User Manual Marking a Position For each document Qedit can save up to the last 10 markers at a time These markers can be an insertion point or a block of selected text Qedit uses a Last In First Out LIFO stack to save these markers To mark a position select the Save position command in the Mark menu For example if you put markers on lines 2 10 and 8 and then go to line 20 the cursor returns to line 8 10 and 2 respectively when you use the Go to previous position command consecutively If you save more than 10 markers in the file you will lose the oldest marker You will also lose a marker if you delete or cut and paste the text in which a marker is located Returning to a Marked Position Although you can save up to 10 markers in a file you can return only to the previously saved marker in the list each time you select the Go to previous position command in the Mark menu If you have not saved a marker this command is unavailable If you want to mark the position to which the
280. ons Connections Prompts the Connection List dialog box in which you Add Remove and view Details of the connection Debug Prompts the Debug Controls dialog box in which you set tracing features Server Prompts the Configure Server Settings dialog box Qedit for Windows User Manual Qedit for Windows User Manual Window Menu The Window menu on the toolbar contains the following commands Cascade Tile Horizontal Tile Vertical Arrange icons Split Window Split Window Horizontal Split Window Vertical and a list of currently opened files Cascade Arranges all open files in a stacking sequence from the top left corner of the screen Tile horizontal Fills the application window with all the open documents Document windows are placed one on top of the other Tile vertical Fills the application window with all the open documents Document windows are placed side by side Arrange icons Arranges minimized document windows into a neat row side by side Split Window Displays a submenu with two commands Horizontal and Vertical which split the active window or pane in half in either direction Split Window Horizontal Splits the active window horizontally in half Split Window Vertical Splits the active window vertically in half Help Menu Provides on line help for Qedit for Windows The Help menu on the toolbar contains the following commands Tip of the Day Contents Using Help Scripting
281. ons Display the document control menu Display the application control menu CTRL G CTRL SHIFT G CTRL B CTRL H CTRL SHIFT H CTRL U CTRL R CTRL J CTRL C CTRL V CTRL X CTRL A CTRL Z CTRL S CTRL N CTRL SHIFT N CTRL O CTRL SHIFT N CTRL D CTRL P CTRL TAB CTRL SHIFT TAB ALT TAB ALT HYPHEN ALT SPACEBAR Reference e 201 Function Keys Display on line Help Fl Move the cursor up toward the beginning of a file F2 Find the previous occurrence of a string F3 Find the next occurrence of a string F4 Go to the previous page F5 Go to the next page F6 Mark the current cursor position F11 Return to the last marked position F12 Close the current document window CTRL F4 Switch to the next document window CTRL F6 Exchange the current cursor position with the last CTRL F11 marked position Select text between the current cursor position and the SHIFT F12 last marked position Close the program and all open files ALT F4 202 e Reference Qedit for Windows User Manual Troubleshooting Overview This chapter describes the information sources to track a problem as well as an overview of some potential areas of trouble connecting to hosts server problems and recovering files As users need to access multiple computers the issue of setting and synchronizing time zones is also discussed What to do in case of problems If you are experiencing some problems with Qedit you can call our te
282. ons of MPE Qedit for Windows User Manual Qedit passes whatever is in the Wildcards text box to MPE s Listfile command If you specify a wildcard that does not start with an HFS prefix slash dot slash or dot dot slash Listfile assumes the information is for an object file group or account in the MPE namespace If you use one of the HFS prefixes Listfile searches the POSIX namespace Currently there is no way to get a complete file list by searching both namespaces with a single wildcard string Under MPF iX 5 5 and perhaps other versions you can use the Seleq parameter to further refine the requested file set For example you could use the Code option of the Seleq parameter to only select files of a certain type You would then be able to select only Qedit files code 111 CM program files code PROG NM program files code NMPRG or COBOL source files code EDTCT using wildcards such as seleq code 111 seleq code prog seleq code nmprg seleq code edtct For a list of file types refer to Appendix B File Types on page 231 The Seleq parameter has a lot of different options Please refer to your host user manuals for details Changing Directories Qedit displays directories parent or subdirectory in color If you select a directory within the current working directory it becomes the new current working directory You can look for a file by continuing to move to other d
283. ot offer multiple attributes in one file because host systems do not usually support them in their text files To enable the transfer of programming and system files among disparate systems we have sacrificed fancy typefaces Qedit is designed to deal with program source and data files In these type of files positioning text on specific columns is important For this reason Qedit allows you to chose only among fixed pitch fonts installed on your PC Qedit for Windows allows you to select fonts that can be applied to both files and directory listings It also lets you adjust the size and style of the fonts These font attributes can be customized by each user You can change the font of individual files or set the default font for all new files Changing the Document Font Qedit uses the font you have set as a default for document windows Because it mostly works with data and program source files in which field position within a record is important Qedit only displays fixed pitch monospaced fonts This way you know the column position on the screen is really the physical position in the record To change the font in a document 1 Select the Properties command from the File menu 2 When the Properties dialog box appears click Set font 3 When the Font dialog box appears select the Font the Font style and the Size If you want to apply a font size that is not available in the list you can type a custom size in the text box Text
284. other directory including the new file name See Notation in Host Operating Systems on page 67 for more details If you do not remember the path name to the new location you can use the Directory button and go to the Directory dialog There you can navigate the directory structure until you get to the desired location Qedit for Windows User Manual Qedit for Windows User Manual 3 Host Save As x Connection Name Vancouver UX Current directory home demo File name cobprog cbl I Overwrite if file already exists I Save as Qedit workfile I Do not write Newline delimiters T Fixed lenath records Directory Help Cancel Host Save As dialog box If the new file name already exists Qedit asks if you want to overwrite the existing file with the new one Check whether you are really in the directory you think you are before clicking OK The ESCAPE key or Cancel button is always safer If you already have a file with the new name Qedit gives you an option to overwrite its contents eliminating the confirmation message Qedit also gives you an option to save the new file as a Qedit workfile Enable Do not write Newline delimiters to save the file without any Newline delimiter This option is automatically enabled if the Length option has been specified on the Open Host File dialog box This option is only available with the HP UX server version 5 3 13 or later Enable Fixed length records if you wish to
285. ou can edit it without modifying the last version of the file Select the Save As command in the File menu When the Host Save As dialog box appears give the file a new name Qedit will save this file in the current directory If you want to save the file in a different directory enter a path to another directory including the new file name See Notation in Host Operating Systems on page 67 for more details If you do not remember the path name to the new location you can use the Directory button and go to the Directory dialog There you can navigate the directory structure until you get to the desired location Qedit for Windows User Manual Qedit for Windows User Manual Host Save As x Connection Name Vancouver UX Current directory home demo File name cobprog cbl I Overwrite if file already exists I Save as Qedit workfile I Do not write Newline delimiters T Fixed lenath records Directory Help Cancel Host Save As dialog box e Ifthe new file name already exists Qedit asks if you want to overwrite the existing file with the new one Check whether you are really in the directory you think you are before clicking OK The ESCAPE key or Cancel button is always safer If you already have a file with the new name Qedit gives you an option to overwrite its contents eliminating the confirmation message e Qedit also gives you an option to save the new file as a Qedit workfile e Enable Do not w
286. ou can copy the document database from one PC to another and get the same attributes on all client machines e g your home PC and your PC at the office To have complete consistency between machines you also have to make sure certain information such as the connection names and available fonts is the same on each machine Qedit saves the last selection position within the file as line and column coordinates in relation to the beginning of the file If a file is modified with something other than Qedit next time you open the file with Qedit it selects the same coordinates but the selected text might be a completely different string If you open a host file and view the ruler you will see the default tab settings specified in the host Qeditmgr files If you close the file exit Qedit start it up again and open the same file you will continue to see the default host tab settings even if these settings changed on the host If you open a document view the ruler and then change the tab settings these become the new tab settings for the document They override whatever default settings were specified in the host configuration files Similar rules apply to the font settings If you never change the font of a document when you open it you will view the document in the default font If you do change the font of a document the new font will be saved and it will be applied from that point onward It does not affect other documents There i
287. ou should get a listing similar to this root 16554 24018 2 12 05 29 ttyp4 0 00 grep gedit joe 14043 12235 0 09 16 57 0 10 opt robelle bin qedit d t root 12235 iLO Oct 15 0 00 opt robelle bin gedit d t cybil 5449 12235 0 06 44 22 0 01 opt robelle bin qedit d t ricky 15948 12235 0 Oct 10 0 01 opt robelle bin gedit d t The last column on the right shows the name of the programs selected The line that reads grep gedit is the command you used to get this listing Ignore it All the other ones running opt robelle bin qedit d t are Qedit server instances The line that shows a one 1 in the third column is actually the Qedit listener process This process will be constantly running until you decide to shut it down You would do so if you wanted to make sure no one can connect to this host using Qedit For example you might stop the main Qedit process while you are backing up the system You also have to remove this process if you want to install a new version of Qedit for HP UX The other three Qedit processes joe cybil and ricky are actual Qedit connections The fifth column indicates the time that process was started If you see only a time e g 09 16 57 this means the process has been running for less than 24 hours It is the actual time it started If the process has been running for more than 24 hours the system shows only the date it started e g Oct 10 Based on this information and your knowled
288. ound Highlight 0O Invisible marker Guides Qedit Default Sci S cin a Pane border Sylvan Retreat Split box Comments O Tag background Quotes Margin background Keywords E CAC ICANN n i i _ Select i Color scheme list Color Customization dialog box To select a color scheme simply click the name in the color scheme list Its colors appear in the color boxes on the right Each color scheme includes these elements e Normal text Characters making up the actual text of the file and COBOL tags e Background Workspace background Characters in the foreground can be Normal text Invisible marker Guides Comments Quotes and Keywords e Invisible marker Markers displayed when the Show invisibles option of the View menu is enabled e Guides Once set guidelines are always visible in the document window Guidelines can be set when the Ruler bar is displayed or from the Guides page of the Properties dialog box e Pane border Panes appear when using the split view feature This color is used to delimit the panes e Split box Small box at top of the vertical scroll bar or on the left of the horizontal scroll bar The box is used to create split views e Tag background Area where COBOL tags are displayed The tag values can be displayed using one of the Normal text Comments Quotes or Keywords colors e Margin background Area between the right margin of the text and the right margin of the
289. oxes If you have selected multiple files in the Directory dialog box the Read Only option will apply to all of them Open a copy There are times when you want to modify a file but you don t want to lose the last version of it To open a copy of a host file enable the Open a copy ALT E option before opening the file For more ways to copy a host file see Copying a Host File to Another Host on page 149 Force unnumbered The server analyzes the last 8 columns of the first 5 lines in a file If these columns contain only numeric digits and these digits are in ascending order Qedit assumes these are line numbers and should not be part of the data In certain cases this can cause problems because these numbers might very well be valid data To force Qedit to read these files as unnumbered enable the Force unnumbered option ALT U before opening the file The numbers will be displayed along with the rest of the text You will also be able to edit these columns Length This option is available on HP UX connections only and with version 5 3 13 or later of the server If the connection has not been opened yet the option is available but might be ignored by the server If the connection is opened and the server does not support the feature the option is not displayed at all If the file does not contain Newline delimiters at the end of each line you can enter a maximum line length to break the file into pieces In this case
290. pe Character Other characters used in a regular expression might also have special meanings The most important one is probably the escape character In Qedit the backslash is the escape character A metacharacter loses its special meaning if preceded by a backslash In the example 246 e Appendix C Regular Expressions Qedit for Windows User Manual abc 123 square brackets indicate a character class This regexp would match abc1 abc2 or abc3 If we escape the square brackets as in abc amp 1238 the square brackets are then used as literals This means they are now part of the string The only matching value is then abc 123 If you want to search for a backslash simply enter two in a row e g The only exception to this rule is the start of line anchor Because is also an escaped sequence there is only one way to search for the literal You have to use the hexadecimal value of the character You would use the following string in your regular expression x05e Escaped Sequences in Regular Expressions Additionally the escape character can be combined with other characters to represent other non printing characters Qedit recognizes the following escaped characters These should not be confused with escape sequences used to control the display on HP type terminals These are not metacharacters either b Backspace e ASCII escape character ESC f Formfeed n Newline linefeed r Car
291. pe window 10 Select Close to close the Edit file type window 11 Select Close again to close the Options window Registering Qedit Scripting Language Files If you are using scripts written in the Qedit Scripting Language QSL you should also register the qs1 extension 1 Goin Windows Explorer 2 Select the Options command from the View menu 3 Select the File Types tab 4 Select the New Type command 5 Inthe Description of Type text box enter Qedit Scripting Language 6 Inthe Associated extension text box enter qs1 7 Select New to add an item to the Actions list 8 Inthe New Action dialog box enter Open in the Action field 9 Inthe Application Used to Perform Action field enter the Qedit program name e g c robelle gedit qwin32 exe or use the Browse button to find it 10 Repeat steps 7 to 9 using edit as the action 11 Select OK or Close until you re back at Windows Explorer Drag and drop File Open a fs n Qedit f Wine or NS Dropping a file on the Qedit shortcut icon 48 e A Windows Primer Windows offers a way to quickly open a file from an application Assuming you can see the file and the application you can use one of the following methods Drop on Desktop Icon In this situation let s assume the Qedit shortcut icon appears on the desktop 1 Click on the file you want to open You would typically use Windows Explorer to locate the file 2 Drag it over to the Q
292. pell no main aux alue 68 spell no user aux alue Line 6 Col 7 Guide lines in document window Moving or Clearing Guide Lines on the Ruler If you want to move an existing guide line simply drag it to a new position on the ruler bar If you want to remove a guide line drag it off the ruler bar Setting Guide Lines in the Properties Dialog Box The other method for setting guide lines is through Properties dialog box on the Guides tab You can easily set an individual guide line or a series of guides Text Formatting Features e 115 116 o Text Formaiting Features Properties Ed Options coBx Information Tabs Guides Every Hi Get or At column H Set Revert GIEar All Cancel Apply Help Setting guide lines in the Properties dialog box To set individual guides 1 2 3 Select Properties from the File menu When the Properties dialog box appears select Guides Enter a column number in the At column text box You can type a number or you can use the scroll arrows to select the column you want If the new guide line does not overlap with any current guide lines the button next to the At column text box will be called Set Click it to acknowledge the new setting If the new guide line overlaps with any current guide lines the button next to the At column text box will be called Clear To remove the overlapping line click Clear To allow an overlapping line click the Clear button to chang
293. perties command from the File menu 2 When the Properties dialog box appears go to the Options tab 3 Select the Auto indent check box Guide Lines Guide lines are vertical lines that provide a visual aid for aligning text They do not modify your text but provide you with a constant reference point throughout a file Once you set a guide line in a document it remains on your screen as long as you view the file There are two ways you can set document specific guides on the ruler of the document window or in the Properties dialog box Setting Guide Lines on the Ruler t Before you can set a guide line the ruler bar must be visible To set a new guide line click and hold the Guide marker above the ruler bar until the mouse pointer Guide marker changes to a Guide pointer a square pinhead Then drag this new pointer to a position on the ruler bar and release it The new guide line appears as a thin blue T vertical line from the ruler bar all the way down to the document status bar You can set as many guide lines as you need Guide pointer 114 e Text Formatting Features Qedit for Windows User Manual Qedit for Windows User Manual fj Vancouver MPE COBOL4 PUB DEMO of x 20 30 a Y Y Y ES piri tsyi it pour tiridt piuuitlitit Jt ilis 01 spell status area 05 pell cond word pic s9 4 68 spell stat ok alue 86 spell found alue 68 spell not found alue 88 spell bad word len alue 88 spell bad line len alue 88 s
294. ree times to easily select a whole line If you start dragging the mouse after a triple click Qedit continues to select whole lines You can quickly select complete lines by moving the mouse pointer to the left margin where it changes to a right pointing arrow Click once and Qedit automatically selects the whole line Click and drag to select more lines Qedit for Windows User Manual Qedit for Windows User Manual Qedit Vancouver MPE COBOL4 PUB DEMO lof x File Edit Text Mark View Script Options Window Help ojei Ss aa amp Salem of Sala fe Vancouver MPE COBOL4 PUB DEMO 66 88 value 11 value 12 pic s9 4 comp occurs 9 times spell user dup spell user jumbo 05 filler spell model s9 4 comp spell dummy arg s9 4 comp spell hyphen x 2 For help press F1 Right pointing arrow for easy line selection Complete lines are usually highlighted all the way to the right margin and include end of line characters which are invisible by default If you paste the complete lines somewhere in the file they will also be on a separate line If the end of line character has not been selected the pasted text will appear on the same line as the existing text There is only one exception to this rule The last line of the file does not have an end of line character If you highlight the complete last line it appears just like any other complete line 1 e the highlig
295. rererssrsrsrerreresssesesreerersersesreee 3 Internet Friendly xiis 3 335 Sava act E E EEE ETA aie Bae 3 Host Based Qedit vs Qedit for Windows ccccsccesssecssscesscecsseeeseeceseceeseecseeeeseecesesesseecsseeeeaees 3 Getting Help iscesitssccesssiescesseitss a a r a a E A EE E nies eae EE Ea E E 4 What s Newin This Version eseese ore sor aeneon aar ss EE era E Se TE ANE OES oe atebcotes 4 Highlights in Version 6 0 noe ie ee e ea ea a a E EEES 4 Compatibility sesednr aini n a a E i aioe R E ETE E eee 4 Known Problems ceceno n aa A E keh ea oh haan nen es 4 Document Window Displayed Incorrectly 0 0 cceecssseccssecreeseceeeeeceeceeceaseeessecneeseenees 5 Getting Started 7 Installing Qedit for Windowsis ssisnn ineeiieo aE rE EAE TE SE aa 7 Downloading Qedit for Windows esesseessssessesessseseeterstssrstsretreresssesesterrereenseseseerees 7 Installing Qedit on Stand Alone PCs s ssesesseesseeeesesssssesresreresssrsreresssesrsrerrereessesrsreerees 7 Installing Qedit on Networked PCS ce ceeecesssccsseeeeeecseeeceeecsaeeecsaecaeesecneeseeeaeeeeeas 8 Installing the Qedit for Windows Server eeesesesecseesecseeeeceeeeeceaeeeeesecaeesecnereeeeaeeees 9 Running the HP UX Server cccccscessesorcesesevesessnseessenenetcnserosesenvessstvesenenensnsenesoses 10 Support ules sis ves che AR bl Adenia ied BR av iets Wa ae nie aed abe Beat 11 Martti E E E secs pueosdessussssssandosiessvt sasvenescassbescsoyeoudeesves 11 Langag
296. riage return s Space t Horizontal tab DDD 1 3 octal digits representing a character s ASCII value xDDD 1 3 hex digits representing a character s ASCII value YEG Control code e g Control G G is the bell character For example you would use t All lines with a tab character e amp d Terminal escape sequence ESC amp d Backreferences in Regular Expressions Qedit for Windows User Manual We have seen basic expressions where almost everything evolves around single characters of text Even character class lists are really used to match a single position You can use parentheses to divide a long regular expression into smaller portions Each portion then becomes a regexp of their own This does not affect the way a string search is done However each subpattern can then be used in a replacement operation Appendix C Regular Expressions e 247 Subpatterns are numbered from 0 to 9 Subpattern 0 is reserved and represents the complete matched string Note that subpattern 0 is implicit and is always available even if the expression does not contain any parentheses Explicit subpatterns are numbered from to 9 starting from the left of the expression Subpatterns can be referenced in a replacement regexp using the escape character backslash followed by the number When applying the replacement string backreferences are substituted with the actual matching text Backreferences can be used as many times as needed Each re
297. rite Newline delimiters to save the file without any Newline delimiter This option is automatically enabled if the Length option has been specified on the Open Host File dialog box This option is only available with the HP UX server version 5 3 13 or later e Enable Fixed length records if you wish to save the file with lines of equal length This option is automatically enabled and can t be disabled if the CobolFixed server setting is enabled and you are editing a Cobol source file This option is only available with the HP UX server version 5 3 13 or later 7 Click Save to finish saving the copied file If you have trained your fingers to use shortcut keys e g CTRL S you won t have to worry about wiping out the existing version of a file because you work with a copy of it You can also use this process to rename a host file After saving the copy use the Host Command dialog box and purge the old version Of course you could use the Host Command dialog box and enter a Rename MPE or mv UNIX command to get the same result You can also make a copy of a host file by using the Select All Copy and Paste commands of the Edit menu The Save as method is more productive because you only need a single command that uses less resources on the client and the server Copying a Host File to Another Host You can also copy a host file from one host to another 1 Open the host file you want to copy Copying amp Printing Files e 149
298. rmation Tabs Guides At column Revert Clear All I Cancel Apply Help Setting tab stops in the Properties dialog box To set individual tab stops 1 Select Properties from the File menu 2 When the Properties dialog box appears select Tabs 3 Enter a column number in the At column text box You can type a number or you can use the scroll arrows to select the column you want 4 If the new tab stop does not overlap with any current tab stops the button next to the At column text box will be called Set Click it to acknowledge the new tab If the new tab overlaps with any current tab stops the button next to the At column text box will be called Clear To remove the tab that overlaps click Clear To allow overlapping tabs click the Clear button to change it to Set then click the button again Qedit for Windows User Manual Qedit for Windows User Manual 5 For each new tab stop repeat steps 3 and 4 6 To save the new tab s and close the dialog box click OK To set the new tab s without closing the dialog box click Apply The Apply button is useful when you want to continue working in the Properties dialog box To set tab stops at regular intervals 1 Select Properties from the File menu 2 When the Properties dialog box appears select Tabs 3 Enter the number of columns between each stop in the Every text box Remember that these intervals start at column 1 For example if you specify a stop
299. roll through the current directory You can use your mouse or cursor movement keys to move through the list of files and subdirectories The highlighted file indicates your current position within the list e You can go to other directories See Changing Directories on page 71 e If you know part of the file name use the Wildcard text box to search through the current directory See Using Wildcards on page 70 e Fora more precise search you can combine the File name and Wildcard text boxes If you want to search another directory for example enter its path name in the File name and use the Wildcard text box to narrow your search Using Wildcards Wildcards are symbols that represent unknown characters If you know part of the file name use the Wildcard text box to find all files that match Unless the File name text box contains a different directory Qedit will search in the current working directory Make sure you use the host appropriate rules for wildcard characters because these rules are different for MPE and UNIX Qedit does not do any validation on the string On UNIX for example an asterisk means one or more characters and file names are case sensitive So if you want to see all files that start with a capital p you would enter P Please refer to the appropriate host user manuals for details on using wildcards Qedit for Windows User Manual The Listfile command with Seleq parameter is not available on all versi
300. rom text box If you do not specify a column number in the To text box Qedit assumes you only want to work on one column If you want to remove more than one column simply enter the column number of the last column in the To text box If you put the cursor in the To text box Qedit automatically fills it with the file s Record Length This is useful if you want to clear all the lines from one point to the end of the line If you do not have an active selection the modification is applied to the whole file as indicated by the Entire file option If you have selected some text the Selection only option is enabled and the operation is applied only to the selected text If the Fill with spaces option is disabled Qedit removes the text in the specified columns Text to the right of the To column is then shifted left to fill the vacant columns If Fill with spaces is enabled Qedit removes the text in these columns and replaces it with spaces This preserves the text alignment to the right of the columns Inserting Text in Columns Shortcut ALT E O I If you want to insert text at a certain column position use the Insert command of the Column submenu Qedit for Windows User Manual Typing Selecting amp Editing Text e 99 Insert Column x Text At column E s Selection only c Entire file woo cos Insert Column dialog box Type the text you want to insert in the Text text box In the At column text box enter the column
301. rom time to time Qedit needs to let you know that something is not working quite right As much as possible you will only see a message box with a short message describing the problem as accurately as possible There are two types of messages warning and fatal Each type is identified by an icon appearing in the message box finds something unexpected Qedit displays an error message and aborts This might x Qedit always checks internal structures to make sure nothing is wrong If it ever sound drastic but it is the only way to prevent further damage Fatal error From time to time Qedit also displays messages to show informative text or less A serious errors Typically these messages inform the user about the success or failure of an edit operation These messages are just warnings because there is no threat to Informative or warning the physical integrity of the file message Here are some of the messages that you might encounter e Cannot continue editing on connection lt connection name gt because the host reset the connection The host process identifier for this connection was lt pid gt Qedit detected a problem with the connection to the host The server is not acknowledging transactions anymore The Process Identification number PID can be used to search through the server log files when trying to determine the cause of the problem e Error deleting a local file permission denied You are trying to save a local file
302. rong oa A Line 5 Col 7 Displaying nonprinting characters You cannot insert or modify nonprinting characters directly with Qedit for Windows If a file contains these characters Qedit does not change them You can work with these characters however if you use another program host based Qedit for example to create a character library file so to speak This workaround does not For example you can call this library file Specials and keep it somewhere on your work with ASCII 9 the TAB PC or host Each line contains a number that represents the ASCII value followed by character because Qedit uses a space and the corresponding nonprinting character If you need to enter a special tabs for formatting purposes character into a file such as the escape character ASCII 27 just open Specials Then highlight the square box next to the ASCII value that you need and copy it to the Clipboard When you return to the file you are currently editing paste the character at the desired location 90 e Typing Selecting amp Editing Text Qedit for Windows User Manual fj specials tet of x 08 BACKSPACE o 09 HORIZONTAL TAB 10 LINEFEED 11 VERTICAL TAB 12 FORMFEED 13 CARRIAGE RETURN A a 14 SHIFTOUT 15 SHIFTIN 16 DLE 17 DC1 XON 18 DC2 19 DC3 XOFF 20 DC4 21 NAK 22 SYN OOD boo oo a BFA Line 9 Col 1 File with nonprinting characters ready for copy If you need to work with terminal escape sequ
303. rsesetreereresrsteterretstssesrsterrerseesesrereereeeese 107 Changing the Directory Font cece ceeesesesceseceeeecneesecesesessecsaseceaecaeesesneseeeaeeees 108 Bold Italics and Underline neninn ann a ii ea A N E ai 108 Ruler Bar isere nsee oerein e aE REEE E EEEE EEEE S E EEES 109 Displaying and Hiding the Ruler Bar s ssesseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeseererreressserrsrerrerssrsesrerrererese 110 Fab Stops konan r a a obi a a a R A R weniny 110 Tab St ps o the Server sisien eseese ie nessies dovii ne eo oi Eebe e aE Srana eerk 110 Tab Stops on the Cheftrainer iain ire a E E E 111 VAAK Enta ci ai AEE E RRETA 114 Guide Ea AEE EA ees 114 Setting Guide Lines on the Ruler ceeeeesesessececeseceeeeceeeecaeceeesecneeseeneeeeeeaees 114 Moving or Clearing Guide Lines on the Ruler cece eeeseeceseeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeees 115 iv e Contents Qedit for Windows User Manual Setting Guide Lines in the Properties Dialog BOX ceesseeesceeeeceseeeeeeeneeeenees 115 Moving Guide Lines in the Properties Dialog BOX eceeesecseesceeeeceeeeeeseeneeees 117 Clearing Guide Lines in the Properties Dialog BOX 0 ceeesesecesecreeeeeseeeeeeeneeees 117 Invisible Formatting Characters cscssscsssccssececesecseeecnessecsaeeecsecaeesecseseeesaeeeeeaecaeeaeenees 117 Matching Opening and Closing Characters ccssesecsesscseeseceseeecesecaeesecneeseceaeeeeeaecateseenees 118 Working With Syntax Coloring ceeeceesccsseessesecseesecsseeecaecaeesecsees
304. s ccscccsseesseeseeeseeseeeseceseceseceaeceaecsaecaeeeneeeaeenneeneees 247 Appendix D Language Templates 251 OVERVIEW sisithin abate nents ie Satna A A E E 251 Template Oca Mn nasenne hha sev Ressecints docsersscede E E O ER AE 251 Which Language sis ie nen ae e e ek ea ES aE tats eraa i aao a Tea a ENE E Era SEE aa 252 Language Template Format incean ie eea ie i EE E E E E R 252 Language Block oin e ea E E E E Red Ae Be a Ree 253 Fle ESAIT R T T E T 254 Stine DELTAS rs e ereer an eorne aa e pae E se eae settee AN E EEEE EIEEE NeT 254 Contintation Scheme Sesine oee E iee E ee a Gaede 255 Comment SCHEMES soiien nie n e rr EES EEE EE EN EEEE E SEE EE a 255 Loken Character et secssesvaeatiares ciitesatiesa cjeee A R A E E 256 ILIAN Ee SAE E T E 257 Glossary of Terms 259 Index 265 Qedit for Windows User Manual Contents e ix Welcome to Qedit for Windows Overview of Qedit for Windows Qedit for Windows User Manual Welcome to Qedit for Windows the Microsoft Windows editor that edits local and server files both large and small Use Qedit for Windows to edit files on your local PC network computers that are available from Microsoft Windows and files on your HP UX or MPE servers Throughout this manual the terms HP e3000 and MPE will be used interchangeably to identify an MPE host Likewise the terms UNIX HP 9000 and HP UX will be used to identify a UNIX host Hardware and Software Requirements Qedit for Windows up to ver
305. s 77 Mouse click double 37 40 41 42 52 66 224 triple 41 43 Mouse operations 41 Mouse wheel 140 Moving the cursor 90 96 141 MPE 1 3 11 20 24 32 53 61 80 91 210 23 211 13 215 17 222 23 227 28 232 compiling 183 environment 171 173 notation 70 version 4 0 70 MPE file labels 191 MRU 77 search request 142 Multi line host commands 170 MySQL syntax coloring 123 N Native Language Support 56 Network 53 install 7 8 Network requirements 2 New features 4 New Host File dialog 29 59 63 Newline missing 81 NLS 56 Nonprinting characters 82 91 92 host command 168 Notation MPE 70 POSIX 70 Unix 69 O Open application window 51 desktop icon 50 drag and drop 50 51 from command line 75 host file 59 79 215 maximum length 81 selection 95 taskbar button 51 Qedit for Windows User Manual unnumbered 81 Open a copy 81 Open dialog 46 48 64 77 Open Host File dialog 29 80 Oracle syntax coloring 123 Overwrite mode 90 91 P Page setup 155 Page size 157 Parentheses matching 122 Password 56 dynamic 215 219 prompting 59 Paste Progress dialog 97 PASXL command 183 Pattern matching 143 PID 212 PIN 212 ping 215 218 220 Port 11 216 MPE 1 193 UNIX 1 193 218 221 Port number 19 Position Exchange 141 Go to 141 Save 141 POSIX 70 211 notation 70 POSIX prefix 74 Preferences dialog 13 162 232 Print host 158 host line numbers 156 line numbers 156 lines per page 157 manuals 11 mar
306. s currently no way to reset all the local and host defaults for a modified document Opening a File from a Command Line The command line interface feature in Qedit can automatically open a file at startup You can use this feature from a DOS prompt in a DOS shell script or in any other application that has a command line interface You cannot create a new file from a command line you can open only an existing file The command line feature uses the following syntax gedit lt connection gt lt filename gt Qedit is the program file name In a Typical installation on a stand alone PC the program file name would be Qwin32 Depending on the interface you use you might have to qualify it with the letter of the drive the full path name e g C Robelle Qwin32 and the file extension e g QWin32 exe Connection represents the valid name of a saved connection which must be identical to a name in Qedit s connection list This means you must make sure all lowercase and uppercase characters are entered correctly as well as any spaces and special characters Qedit assumes everything in front of the colon is part of the connection name If it cannot find a corresponding name in the connection list it assumes the file is local Creating amp Opening Files e 73 and tries to open it as such To open a local file you can simply use the letter of the drive as the connection name For example you can enter qwin32 c windows readme t
307. s required Metacharacters Qedit for Windows User Manual Regular expressions might look like wildcards used in the Pattern search option They are sometimes compared to wildcards but in fact they are much more powerful They can also be much more complex You have to practice in order to use them efficiently and to their full potential For brevity we will often refer to regular expressions simply as regexp Although all regexp implementations share a basic set of metacharacters and syntax rules other tools and programs might have different extensions and variations Be aware that the version used in Qedit might not have all the extensions you are currently familiar with For example Qedit does not support alternation with the vertical bar I equivalent to a logical or Also this is the first implementation in Robelle products We will be looking at other tools and might decide to extend our own implementation in future releases If you are interested in learning more about regular expressions you should get a copy of Mastering Regular Expressions written by Jeffrey E F Friedl and published at O Reilly amp Associates Inc This book covers most regular expression implementations the differences between each one how most regexp engines work and some tips on how to get the best performance from each type Qedit supports the following metacharacters Start of line anchor End of line anchor Matches any character
308. s the current dialog box The Help menu also provides access to Robelle resources available over the Internet Use one of the commands in the Robelle Web submenu to connect your browser to Robelle s Web site http www robelle com or see the latest features in Qedit for Windows You can also use the E mail Technical Support command to send a question or comment to our Technical Support staff What s New in This Version Compatibility The current version of Qedit for Windows is 6 0 Here are a few of the changes and enhancements made since version 5 9 Highlights in Version 6 0 e It is now possible to specify the number of files appearing in the various filelists Recent Files in the Favorites list and individual Favorites subfolders This is done in the General tab of the Preferences dialog e Qedit for Windows does not abort anymore when editing a Cobx file on a Unix server The abort occurred when a number of conditions were present e Under certain circumstances an Undo or Redo action could cause an abort e The newconnectiontemplate QSL method created incorrect MPE connection The session password was incorrectly used as the user password For a history of development highlights see Appendix A Earlier Highlights on page 229 For Qedit Scripting Language QSL highlights refer to the QSL User Manual In most cases when you have selected some text typing a character replaces the selection With the introduction
309. s useful when you want to continue working in the Properties dialog box If you want to remove all the guide lines from a file simply select Properties from the File menu When the Properties dialog box appears select Guides and click Clear All Invisible Formatting Characters Some characters such as spaces and tabs are used to format text in a file By default they do not appear on the screen when you edit a file they appear as empty Qedit for Windows User Manual Text Formatting Features e 117 Shortcut Alt V I space between characters Even though they are mostly used for lining up columns in a file they can also have special meanings For example files on UNIX can contain TAB characters to separate data fields Qedit also displays end of line markers whenever appropriate If you want to see where SPACE and TAB characters are used you can enable the Show invisibles command on the View menu Once enabled spaces between words are shown as small dots Each dot represents one character TAB characters are represented by arrowheads pointing to the right End of line markers are represented by a left pointing arrow This icon is similar to the one usually appearing on the keyboard ENTER key fej Vancouver UX home demo MyProfile Bel Es Set up the terminale TERM 7 0092 export TERM stty columns 60 lt cote stty erase H intr yY eof E kill al seen stty parity cH ee eens stty istripe a
310. sages to host Messages from host Cache management Sloth management Raw buffers from host Raw buffers to host Editor view Windows control messages Trace files can become very large very quickly especially when working with large data files We recommend that you leave the trace option disabled until you have a need for it The Comm Quality text box should always specify 100 You have to give the trace file a name It does not have to be in any particular directory but we Troubleshooting e 205 recommend you put it in the same directory as the Qedit program We also recommend that you use a trc extension Enable Force flush on every write to ensure all the trace records are posted to disk immediately Server Trace Files When Enable Tracing of the Server Trace Options is checked the server writes information to three 3 server trace files On MPE hosts the files are created in the Qlog group in the account where the server program resides For example if the server is called Qedit Pub Robelle the trace files will be access qlog robelle error qlog robelle trace qlog robelle On UNIX hosts the trace files are located in a directory called log qedit under the directory specified in the ROBELLE environment variable See the Qedit for HP UX User Manual for details For example if the server is in opt robelle bin gedit and the ROBELLE environment variable is not set the trace files will be usr robelle lo
311. save the file with lines of equal length This option is automatically enabled and can t be disabled if the CobolFixed server setting is enabled and you are editing a Cobol source file This option is only available with the HP UX server version 5 3 13 or later Click Save to finish saving the file Saving a New Local File To save a new local file once you have created it 1 2 3 Select the Save or Save AS command in the File menu When the Save As dialog box appears give the file a name and select the directory in which you want to save it Click Save to finish saving the file If a file has not been saved yet or you use the Save As command on an unsaved file a Save As dialog box will appear so that you can select the drive folder and file name Saving amp Closing Files e 159 Closing a File iol x Close button in Windows 95 has an X 160 e Saving amp Closing Files Saving All Opened Files If you want to quickly save your changes to all the files currently opened just select the Save All command in the File menu If you have newly created files Qedit will prompt you for new file names If you were working with existing files the changes are simply written to disk Explicit vs Implicit Close When you close a file Qedit posts all changes to it releases any exclusive access claims you have on it and closes its document window Of course there is an explicit Close command on the File menu but th
312. se the Display tags option must be enabled so you can have access to the tag area Maximum Line Length The maximum line length can be as much as 8 172 characters or as small as 66 columns for COBOL or even smaller for data files This means that when you combine lines together by pressing DELETE at the end of a line or by pasting from the Clipboard you will likely receive the message The resulting line would be too long Most Windows editors have such a large maximum line length such as 64 000 columns that you never see this problem But many host based files must have fixed size lines both programming language files and application data files Lines in UNIX files are usually delimited with the NEWLINE character It is sometimes called the LINE FEED character Other operating systems use a CARRIAGE RETURN or a combination of CARRIAGE RETURN and LINE FEED characters Qedit automatically detects these characters and splits lines at the correct location During a Save operation Qedit uses the same record delimiter You can change the line termination character on the Options page of the Properties dialog box or the Local page of the Preferences dialog box Line Features e 133 Searching amp Replacing Features Overview Qedit gives you immediate search results even with enormous host files This is because Qedit actually performs host file searches on the server not the client When Qedit finds a string match it downloads only
313. sing the Qedit server as well as regular Qedit on the same host you should modify the Qeditmgr file so that commands written for a particular mode are only executed in that mode This is particularly true on MPE hosts because logon User Defined Commands UDCs and command files are not executed in sessions initiated by Qedit for Windows This might cause some commands in Qeditmgr to fail e g non existent variables Ultimately the server environment might not be set correctly For example on the HP e3000 you could perform Qedit for Windows User Manual Running Qedit Qedit for Windows User Manual if Qedservmode 0 then set extprog mpex pub vesoft endif On UNIX you would check the value of QEDSERVMODE in a script executed from the Qeditmgr file because Qedit UX does not support the If Then command Connection Template File All the host connections that you create are stored in a file on your local hard disk The default is to store them in a file called Qedconn dat in the Windows directory You can change the connection template file name in the Connection Template text box Once Qedit for Windows has been installed you can start it by clicking the appropriate icon in the Robelle program group Expiring Version If you have an evaluation copy of Qedit and the version is about to expire you might see the following Expiry Message dialog box Expiry Message Ea Qedit 32 bit Edition With Scripting 4 9 11 Jul 24
314. sion 4 7 01 is available in a 16 bit edition for Windows 3 1 and 3 11 As a pure 16 bit version it does not require any of the files from the Win32s subsystem Versions 4 7 02 and later are only available in the 32 bit edition Qedit is also available in a 32 bit edition for Windows 95 and Windows NT Qedit for Windows requires a minimum of 4 MB of memory and approximately 3 MB of disk space If you want to use Qedit to access corporate servers from home or remote offices you might have to reconfigure your firewall software or router The connection to the HP UX server occurs on port 7395 On HP e3000 servers port 1542 is the default Remote Process Management RPM listener You can also configure individual MPE connections to use Qedit s firewall protocol If you use this option on MPE the MPE server will work like an HP UX server and Qedit will use port 7395 as the default If you use an Internet Service Provider ISP you might be assigned a random IP address when you connect from home You have to make sure you can connect using all possible IP addresses The Qedit server software has to be installed on your HP UX or MPE servers This software communicates with Qedit for Windows running on your local PC to provide fast service for all your editing needs To get accurate time information in the Directory dialog box you have to make sure the time zones on all your computers are set correctly See Time Zones on page 221 Welco
315. soon as Qedit is able to associate a language For new files syntax coloring might occur only after the first save For existing files this should happen as soon as the file is opened If it can t associate a language no coloring occurs Language template files are loaded when Qedit starts up Since these files are plain text files based on the XML specifications you can easily customize existing templates or you can create your own To activate your changes you need to exit out of Qedit and start it up again If you wish to know which language Qedit is associated with a particular file look at the Information page of the File Properties dialog box The language name on the page is the name specified in the language template file Ambiguous Language Identification Qedit associates a language with a file based on one of 2 things e a Qedit Language Code for host files e the extension of a file for Posix Unix and local files This information is entered in each language template Qedit does not prevent the same language code or extension from being used in more than one template Qedit uses a very simple method to resolve the ambiguity it uses the last one loaded From the user s point of view however this can be disconcerting We recommend that a language code or file extension be used in only one language template SQL Language Templates The Structured Query Language SQL is used with most if not all relational database manageme
316. sor is called the insertion point Qedit for Windows uses a blinking cursor to show the current insertion point The cursor moves around when you press a cursor movement key or click the mouse button If a block of text has not been selected the cursor position appears on the document status bar as a relative record and column coordinate If a block of text has been selected the coordinates of the cursor appear as the starting line and column and the ending line and column Typing Selecting amp Editing Text e 87 The vertical bar displayed between the greater than and less than characters is not part of the text It is the insertion point indicator fj Untitled2 of x The insertion point is between here gt kand here a 2 X Line 2 Col 37 Blinking vertical bar indicates the insertion point Controlling the Insertion Point Movements In some applications the SCROLL LOCK key is used to control the behavior of the insertion point as you move around in a document Even though Qedit displays the current status in the toggle key box of the status bar Qedit does not work any differently whether the key is enabled or disabled If a block of text has not been selected you can change the behavior of the insertion point by changing the status of the Move caret when navigating option on the General page of the Preferences dialog When you start Qedit for Windows this option is enabled As you move through a file
317. specified a comment is assumed only if this particular identifier is used at the defined location If no identifier is specified then any character found at that position is presumed to be a comment In this example two slashes identifies end of line comments In other words whenever two slashes are encountered whatever text follows them is considered a comment A slash asterisk sequence starts a comment section An asterisk slash sequence ends it A dollar sign in column 1 indicates that the current line is a comment lt comments gt lt endline gt lt endline gt lt inline gt lt begincomment gt lt begincomment gt starts comments lt endcomment gt lt endcomment gt ends comments lt inline gt lt linedesignator position 1 gt lt linedesignator gt lt comments gt Token Character Set The TokenCharset block defines all the characters that can be used in user defined words such as variable names This block is optional If specified it should contain a list of valid characters The list is similar to a character class in a regular expression Character ranges can be specified by entering the first and last character of the range separated by a dash e g a z means all lowercase letters between a and z The character list can be enclosed in square brackets and If so the brackets are discarded In this example user defined words can have upper and lowercase letters digits 0 throu
318. ss fails due to a user error e g an incorrect password the message should be self explanatory However login failures due to network problems cause Qedit to generate a user friendly message The message is of the form Unable to because where the first ellipsis is replaced by the action that failed and the second is replaced by a translation of the error code that Qedit received Because these messages indicate a low level technical problem they are difficult to document You should get assistance from our technical support staff to get these resolved Here are some examples of login failure messages e Unable to obtain a socket because e Unable to set up receive connection because e Unable to set up the connection because e Connection failed because e Unable to obtain resources for an MPE Login because e Unable to start MPE server because a problem occurred e Unable to complete login because e Unable to start communication because e Login failed because Recovering a File Qedit for Windows User Manual Recovering Temporary Host Files When working on host files Qedit creates a temporary holding area called a scratch file These scratch files which are Qedit workfiles write all the changes you make to disc almost immediately These files are temporary in the sense that they will be purged when the connection is closed normally If the connection closes abnormally these files still exist on t
319. ste it into a file on another host or into a local file There are two reasons for this 1 it could take a long time if the file is very large and 2 you are quite likely to paste it back into another file on the same host system Instead Qedit copies the selected text to the internal Hold file on the host server Unique to each logon this Hold file functions much like the Clipboard 94 e Typing Selecting amp Editing Text Qedit for Windows User Manual Qedit for Windows User Manual Qedit copies the data from the host to the PC only when you paste to a local PC file or to a file on another host For example when you cut or copy on one connection and paste on another one Qedit must physically transfer the Clipboard from the first host to the PC then to the second host This can take a while so a small progress indicator window is displayed during this process The same process occurs if you cut or copy from a host file and then paste into a local Qedit file Pasting 13993 lines from Yancouver MPE to Untitled Paste progress indicator dialog box Workarounds to Clipboard Cache Problem If you cut or copy a host file then paste it into a PC application such as Notepad or Microsoft Word you could run into one problem If the Clipboard lines fit into the Qedit cache the paste request will be satisfied If the Clipboard lines do not fit into the cache Qedit cannot get the missing lines by issuing requests to the host which mak
320. t be correct if you have very short or very long lines Changes that you make to the file are retained in memory A global change that affected every line in a 2 GB file would not fit in memory In this case Qedit shows a warning to let you terminate possibly without saving your changes This is a function of the virtual memory emergency code in Qedit and not anything to do with local editing per se When you save your changes the following takes place 1 Qedit creates a temporary file on the same drive and in the same directory as the original file with the name QSnnnnnn tmp where nnnnnn is replaced with a random number 2 The changes made are merged with the original file to create a new copy This is similar to performing a Text and Keep command in host based Qedit Even if a single line was changed the entire original file must be copied 3 The original file is purged 4 The temporary file is renamed as the original file Time Zones You pull up your home group for the development HP e3000 and you notice that the modify date for a file you know you changed ten minutes ago is way off 4 hours later in fact What has gone wrong Greenwich Mean Time GMT UTC is the answer Client server applications including Qedit for Windows use GMT to record times This is the time in Greenwich England ignoring Daylight Saving Time and is considered zero 0 New York is normally at GMT 5 Los Angeles is at GMT 8 Paris and Berlin
321. t files with a Language of DATA it does not necessarily wrap them at word boundaries All local files are assigned a hidden Language of SPL Continuation lines are indented four 4 characters from the left margin so that they are easier to identify If you disable this option Qedit fills each line and truncates the text at the next character even if it is in the middle of a word e Print line numbers You can request to include line numbers on the printed page Note that these are really records numbers a sequential number that represents a line relative to the beginning of the file e Use host line numbers If you asked to get line numbers and you are dealing with a host file you can ask for the actual line numbers and not the sequential record numbers e Print page headings By default Qedit prints a one line header with the PC s current date and time the file name and the page number If all this information does not fit on a single line Qedit replaces some of the characters from the middle part of the file name with an ellipsis If you do not want to include the page header simply disable this option e Print with syntax colors Qedit for Windows User Manual Qedit for Windows User Manual By default Qedit prints in black only To print using the current syntax colors enable this option Qedit uses the same colors as those used on the screen Keep in mind that certain screen colors might not show well on paper w
322. tches the indentation of the previous line You can use spaces or tabs to increase the indentation If you use tabs you can use SHIFT TAB to decrease the indentation Setting the Line Termination Character These file properties discussed above are common to all types of files Local files have an additional option that controls which line termination character is used when a file is saved to disk Qedit automatically detects which line termination was used originally and by default uses the same one when the file is saved You need to change the Line termination character only when you want to explicitly change the file type Qedit for Windows User Manual Notation in Host Qedit for Windows User Manual C Windows Readme tc Properties x Options coex Information Tabs Guides Use spaces for tabs I Display detabbed column Record length J Preserve trailing blanks Line termination DOS cr If x M Auto indent Set font Set color Local file Properties dialog box The Line termination list box offers the following selections e DOS CR LF e Macintosh CR UNIX LF CR stands for carriage return and LF for line feed This option only affects the way files are created on save operations It is a useful feature when you know the file is going to be used on a different platform and want to ensure the file is created appropriately for the target application Operating Systems Qedit
323. te and expects an answer from the server almost immediately If the client does not receive an answer from the server after 3 KeepAlive transactions i e after about 3 minutes the client assumes there is a problem and disconnects The server does not send any transactions of its own It only responds to client requests If there is a legitimate problem with the network and the client cannot communicate with the server anymore how could the server know there is a problem On MPE hosts there is also a built in timeout value If the server does not receive a transaction of any kind within 5 minutes it assumes the client is no longer there and breaks the connection on the host side This means dead sessions will eventually go away by themselves However if the client aborts and you were using a Qedit workfile or had a scratch file opened you will not be able to re open them during that 5 minute period Qedit will report that the file is currently accessed by someone You simply have to wait for the timeout to expire On HP UX hosts there is also a timeout function and server processes should disappear by themselves However in the event that some old server processes remain on your system you can get rid of them by logging in as root on the system console or on a terminal and entering ps ef grep qedit This command looks at all the processes currently running on your system and selects only the ones that contain the string gedit Y
324. te line numbers do not necessarily match the line position relative to the file For example line number 100 might actually be the 150 line of the file Absolute line numbers can also have up to three decimals e g 15 25 217 147 Although Qedit does not display line numbers in host files it does allow you to find one This is very useful when you are working on a server report such as compiler errors output which refers to lines by their absolute line number To find an absolute line number select the Goto line command in the Mark menu Go To Line x Go to line goesesessesesceoesosoesesosseg C Record number woo cme Go To Line dialog box with absolute line number option When the Go To Line dialog box appears enter the line number and click OK Qedit automatically selects the Line number option if the file is numbered If the file is unnumbered Record Number is selected Searching amp Replacing Features e 141 Shortcut CTRL J Finding a Record Number Lines in a file can also be referenced by a number relative to the beginning of the file These ordinal numbers which are called record numbers are available in all Qedit files To find a record number in a file use the Goto line command in the Mark menu enter the desired number and if given a choice enable the Record number option For more information see Record Numbers on page 127 You can also move around in host files using absolute line num
325. terminator 68 unnumbered 81 File as host command 170 File extension syntax coloring 123 Qedit for Windows User Manual File labels MPE 191 File Options dialog 212 File types 66 73 237 Filename 189 Filters 78 Find 141 44 141 44 first 144 in columns 145 in selection 145 last 144 options 144 part of file 145 selected text 144 Find String dialog 142 Firewall 1 3 193 217 protocol 56 217 Fold lines 81 Folder Favorites 85 Font 111 default 124 nonprinting characters 93 print 157 r_ansi 93 window size 40 Force close 165 FORTRAN command 183 ftp 215 219 Function keys 204 206 G Go To Line dialog 145 Goto previous position 141 Group 57 80 215 219 223 Guide line 113 118 H Hardware and Software Requirements 1 HELLO MPE command 173 Help 4 Highlights 4 Host printer 159 Host command 167 Oldpass 172 BYE 173 clear log 169 COBOL compile 172 copy log 169 dialog 168 disable 171 Index e 267 duplicate output 173 environment 172 HELLO 173 interrupt 169 logon UDC 172 MPE 171 nonprinting characters 168 QEDSERVMODE 172 server configuration 172 settings 172 UDC 172 Host file 24 193 closing 165 creating 63 MPE 212 opening 79 152 wildcards 81 Host line numbers 156 Host name 46 54 61 54 61 213 215 218 220 22 220 22 Host printing 158 HP 9000 1 3 53 57 217 220 HTML Editor 79 Include files 180 Indent 68 118 default 125 Information connection 212 document 211 transmission 213
326. that has been opened as Read Only by another application or in another window in Qedit e Login Invalid user or password The user name or password entered on an HP UX connection is incorrect e Login Unable to change directory Qedit could not switch to the directory you specified in the Initial directory text box in the Connection List dialog box e System command failed Server error 37 The server has tried to execute an operating system command but the command failed You might receive this message if you have tried to open an invalid directory name from the Directory window e The host file has been modified by another user Server Error 46 This message appears when you try to do a Save on a host file It means the file you are editing has been modified since you opened it or the last time you saved it 226 e Troubleshooting Qedit for Windows User Manual Qedit for Windows User Manual You should try to find who has modified the file so you do not lose someone else s changes You can also try to find what has changed You can save your copy of the file with a different name and then compare it with the copy on the host Host based Qedit comes with a program called Compare which lists differences between 2 files Look at the output and determine if the differences are valid If you want to force Qedit to save the file anyway you can disable the Compare timestamps before overwriting on server option in the Preferences dialo
327. the highlighted text itself Internet Service Provider ISP Companies offering Internet access to individuals or organizations They usually offer services such as electronic mail World Wide Web hosting etc IP address Internet Protocol address Unique identifier required for all computer systems connected to a network The address is made up of a series of 4 numbers separated by a period Each number can have a value between 1 and 255 e g 128 11 200 77 Qedit for Windows User Manual Qedit for Windows User Manual NOTE Do not enter leading zeros in any part of an IP address A leading zero indicates that the value is specified in octal notation In the example above if you had entered 128 011 200 077 the IP address would have been interpreted as 128 9 200 63 ISP See Internet Service Provider Mnemonic Short series of characters used to represent an attribute a concept or provide fast access to a function They are called mnemonics as they are typically easy to remember See also Access Keys Most recently used MRU List that contains information entered most recently in a specific area The file name list box of the Open Host File dialog box and the Search for list box of the Find String dialog box are examples of MRU lists MRU See Most Recently Used Native Language Support NLS Subsystem that allows proper handling conversion formatting and collation sequence of national characters Refer to documenta
328. the list can be quite long The following example has been edited and shows the format 1 gt gt gt sockinfo GLOBAL DISPLAY Gsxds b 86263000 Program ricky clerk acctg qedit pub robelle jinetd manager sys inetd net sys jhttpd mgr apache httpd pub apache dan pgmr dev gedit pub robelle system process snmp net sys system process dsdad net sys dan pgmr dev vtserver net sys 28 processes 0 locked semaphores 40 sockets To identify Qedit connections you would look for the server name currently configured in the client in the Program column By default the server is gedit pub robelle If you know the logon information of a particular user you would look for it in the User column The other columns that might of interest are Pin and Job The process identification number PIN is the server instance associated to a particular connection This number should match the Host Process ID line found in the Information page of the file Properties dialog box Qedit for Windows User Manual Network Issues e 191 You can use the Showproc command to get details on how the server has been invoked The server name is displayed along with the encoded IP address and socket number showproc 131 QPRI CPUTIME STATE JOBNUM PIN PROGRAM STEP C152 0 00 708 WAIT S3583 131 QEDIT PUB ROBELLE dxP18c915cb052a UNIX Connection List On UNIX hosts you can find information about server instances using the ps ef command This
329. the new short file name Registering File Types in Windows 95 Qedit for Windows User Manual In Windows 95 you can register file types and associate them with an application This allows you to specify one application to open a file another application to print it and so on You can register Qedit as the default application for certain file types For optimal use make sure these files are text only You should also make sure you are not interfering with the proper operation of other applications In other words make sure you are familiar with a file type and understand the implications of registering it with another application before you proceed Registering Text Files For example to register Qedit with Text documents i e files with a txt file extension 1 Goin Windows Explorer 2 Select the Options command from the View menu 3 Select the File Types tab 4 Find the Text Document file type entry If the file type you need does not exist you have to create it using the New Type command In this case you need to know more information about the files you want to register 5 Select Edit 6 From the Actions list select the one you want associated with Qedit 7 Select Edit again A Windows Primer e 47 8 Enter the fully qualified program file name for Qedit in the Application used to perform action text box Qedit is usually installed as Robelle Qedit Qwin32 exe 9 Select OK to close the Editing Action for ty
330. the portions of the file that contain the match That s why Qedit is so fast Qedit also provides you with numerous search criteria embedded words highlighted words pattern matching as well as a partial file search Qedit s replace option further enhances the search capabilities Scrolling Through a File You can scroll through a file either horizontally or vertically There are several basic ways to scroll through a file use the scroll bar use cursor movement keys or use the wheel of an intelligent mouse Each document window has both a horizontal and vertical scroll bar Qedit for Windows User Manual Searching amp Replacing Features e 135 fj Vancouver MPE COBOL4 PUB DEMO BBE mr to spell hyphen SPELLCONFIG using spell workspace spell model spell status area spell hyphen Scroll box spell dummy arg t spell stat ok then erform 95 spell error Scroll arrow Vertical scroll bar SPELLEND using spell workspace spell model spell status area spell dummy arg gt a Line 40 Col 7 Horizontal Scroll arrow Scroll box scroll bar Vertical and horizontal scroll bars Using the Scroll Bars The vertical scroll bar is located on the right side of a document window A scroll bar consists of scroll arrows at either end of the bar and the scroll box that moves along the bar Just as in other applications it allows you to scroll up and down in a file The distance you move in a file depends
331. tified in column one For a faster way to perform the same operation select the lines completely or partially you want to shift and e Use the TAB key to shift to the right e Use SHIFT TAB to shift to the left This feature introduces an incompatibility with previous versions If you intended to replace the selection with a tab character pressing the TAB key now shifts the lines to the right The text is not replaced If you want to replace the selection you have to use the DELETE key or any other key except TAB to get rid of the selection then enter the tab character Removing or Inserting Tab Characters You can visually align text in files by using spaces or tab characters Spaces viewed on the screen are stored in as many characters in the file If you type five spaces the file stores five bytes Tab characters however take up only one byte in the file no matter how it appears on the screen Using a mix of spaces and tab characters can be deceiving The size of a file changes depending on which one you use Since these are different characters programs that read the file must be able to handle both If you need to use either formats you might have to replace one with the other This can be very tedious Qedit has the ability to do the replacement with a single command from the Text menu If you have a file containing tab characters and you want to use spaces instead use the Detab command Qedit preserves the visual alignment b
332. tifies Qedit you can access the application control menu This menu contains commands that modify characteristics in the application window such as its size and location These standard Windows commands are described in Controlling the Size and Position of Windows on page 37 Getting Started e 23 24 e Getting Started Application Title Bar The title bar displays information about Qedit as well as the document you are working on If files are open the name of the active document appears on the title bar Otherwise only the application name Qedit appears on the title bar Qedit Readme tet olx Title bar for a local file If the active file is on a host the connection name appears as a prefix of the file name In the example below the connection name is Vancouver MPE and the file is called Cobol4 Pub Demo Qedit Vancouver MPE COBOL4 PUB DEMO Miel E3 Title bar for a host file Application Menu Bar The menu bar displays the names of menu headings which provide access to a variable number of commands The number of headings on the menu bar depends on whether a file is open The default menu bar when you have no files opened has the following five 5 menus File View Options Script Help Short menu bar As soon as you open one file the menu bar expands to the following nine 9 menus File Edit Text Mark View Script Options Window Help Complete menu bar To display the commands on a menu
333. tion If you want to rename a connection it is a two part process first you need to rename the original connection when you make a copy of it then you need to delete the original connection To copy the original connection to a new connection name see Copying a Saved Connection on page 56 To delete the original connection see Deleting a Saved Connection below When you have finished these steps the connection list should not include the original connection Deleting a Saved Connection If you no longer need a saved connection in your list you can delete it To delete a connection 1 Select the Connections command in the Options menu 2 When the Connection List dialog box appears select the connection you want to delete from the Connection Name list 3 Click Remove The connection should no longer appear in the connection list 58 e Connecting to a Host or Network Qedit for Windows User Manual 4 Click Done to close the dialog box Closing a Connection Unless you change its default Qedit does not automatically close a connection when it has no open files To close a connection select the Disconnect command from the File menu If you have more than one connection select the connection you want to close To ensure that all of your connections are disconnected select Exit from the File menu This closes all files and disconnects all hosts Customizing a Connection Automatically Logging In at Startup
334. tion from HP for details NLS See Native Language Support Pane When using a split view sections of the file on either side of a split bar PID See Process Dentification number POSIX Hierarchical File System on HP e3000 running MPE iX 4 5 or later Files and directories created under the HFS follow the same rules as other machines running UNIX Glossary of Terms e 261 Process Identification number PID Server processes usually have a unique ID number assigned by the operating system There is one server process per connection The PID can be used to scan the log files and find out what was done during that editing session Qedit Scripting Language QSL Scripting language offering access to Qedit for Windows functions and objects It can be used to customize the Qedit client environment perform common editing tasks define new commands to perform custom functions or automate repetitive tasks for hands off operations Refer to the QSL User Manual for details QSL See Qedit Scripting Language Record length Maximum number of characters that can fit on a line within the file Often related to the Language of the file Remote Process Management RPM Server process running under MPE iX allowing the creation of sessions and processes from remote computers RPM See Remote Process Management Scroll bar Area on the right hand side and at the bottom of a window that allows you to move around in a file to
335. to a new position on the screen For example you can move document windows on your screen Although the mouse is very handy in Qedit for Windows you can use the keyboard for most tasks in Qedit For example you open a file and want to edit a word near the bottom of the page Press the DOWN ARROW key until it starts to repeat then let up just in time If you miss go up or down a line Press the RIGHT ARROW key until you reach the desired column If you overshoot you are in column one of the next line If you pick the wrong line and it is shorter than your target line you have to go right then down then right again This is an error prone task It can be more efficient to use the mouse to move the insertion point to the word you want TIP If your mouse seems sticky it is probably dirty Mouse devices pick up lint and need regular cleaning The cleaning process is relatively simple twist off the cover on the ball let the ball fall out and scrape the lint off the three rollers with a finger nail or sharp object Then replace the cover A Windows Primer e 39 40 e A Windows Primer Selecting Text with a Mouse Selecting or highlighting text is a basic operation of Qedit Without it your editing is very limited When text is highlighted it appears in inverse video and is available for further processing There are several ways to select text with a mouse Dragging the mouse over the text is one way to highlight To select spell stat o
336. to the file when you save it Next time you open the file trailing blanks are gone That s because the server never transmits them to the Qedit client NOTE If you delete characters from a line Qedit does not put back trailing spaces that might have been removed Qedit for Windows User Manual COBOL Tags Tags can only be used in files with Language of COBX Qedit for Windows User Manual COBOL source files can contain some information in columns 73 to 80 of each line This area is sometimes referred to as auto comments or tags For COBOLX files this area appears in a different color The color is defined in the color scheme applicable at the time You can set COBOL tags in either the server configuration file or the client COBOL Tags in Server Configuration Files Although the default value for a COBOL tag is set in the server configuration file you can override it by using the COBX tab in the Properties dialog box For example if you want to set a special default tag only for users that connect as CLERK in their session name you can either insert the following lines in Qeditmgr Pub Robelle or each user can put the Set X command in their own Qeditmgr configuration file See Customizing the Server on page 19 for more details if hpjobname CLERK then Set X ME yymmdd List on endif The Set X command has two parts The first part Set X lt string gt lt date gt allows you to define the string you want i
337. tomatically displayed in the document window Moving Guide Lines in the Properties Dialog Box To move guide lines in the Properties dialog box you need to add a guide line at each new location see Setting Guide Lines in the Properties Dialog Box above and clear each old guide lines see Clearing Guide Lines in the Properties Dialog Box below Clearing Guide Lines in the Properties Dialog Box You can clear overlapping guide lines when you set new ones see Setting Guide Lines in the Properties Dialog Box above After guide lines have been set however you can also clear one line a series of lines at regular intervals or all the guide lines in the file To clear some of the guide lines 1 2 3 Select Properties from the File menu When the Properties dialog box appears select Guides Enter the position of the guide line s that you want to remove in either the At column individual guide line or Every series of guide lines text box Once you have entered the position of an existing guide line click the Clear button next to the text box If you have entered a position that does not correspond to an existing guide line the button will be called Set Repeat this step for each guide line or set of guide lines that you want to remove To clear the selected guide line s and close the dialog box click OK To clear the selected guide lines without closing the dialog box click Apply The Apply button i
338. tus bar it will remain hidden even if you exit and restart Qedit To display the status bar again you have to enable it in the View menu For Help press F1 CAP NUM SCRL OVR 4 Informative message Teekes Status bar of the application window On the left side of the status bar Qedit displays informative messages as you use certain functions For example if you use the Create local file button on the toolbar a short message appears on the status bar explaining what you are about to do Create a new local file CAP NUM SCRL OVR 4 Status bar while using a tool button Qedit for Windows User Manual Toggle Keys There are four functions that you can switch on or off CAPS LOCK NUM LOCK SCROLL LOCK and INSERT Each function has an indicator box in the Qedit status bar When a function is disabled its corresponding indicator box appears blank For Help press F1 Ui Status bar with all toggle keys turned off The toggle keys perform the following functions e The CAPS LOCK key puts new text in uppercase e The numeric keypad on the right side of your keyboard can be used to either enter numbers or move the cursor The NUM LOCK key makes the numeric keypad enter only numbers e In some applications the SCROLL LOCK key controls the behavior of the insertion point while working on a document Qedit simply indicates the status of the key It does not have any effect on Qedit s operations e The INSE
339. ults hierarchy 129 Local default 87 MPE default 87 removing scheme 129 schemes 125 UNIX default 87 Index e 265 Column delete 101 find in 145 insert 102 shift 102 Command line interface 75 Compile MPE source 183 Configuration server 19 159 227 Connection 2 53 54 161 193 copying 58 creating 54 disconnect 53 61 164 information 212 maintaining 60 MPE host 56 215 removing 61 renaming 61 Temporary 54 UNIX host 210 23 220 using 29 59 80 Connection List dialog 55 58 60 61 215 Connection template 21 56 Controling scripts 178 Convert text to workfile 154 workfile to text 155 Copy Special dialog 98 Copylib 190 CR terminator 68 Cursor 35 keys 31 Customizing client 13 connection 61 opening a file 87 save and close 165 search 148 server 19 D Debug permanent settings 210 temporary settings 210 Debug Controls dialog 208 Delete column 101 Detab 104 Dialog About Qedit 207 Connection List 55 58 60 61 215 Copy Special 98 Debug Controls 208 Directory 1 29 81 Expiry message 21 266 e Index File Options 212 Go To Line 145 Host command 168 Login 222 Manage scripts 177 New Host File 29 59 63 Open 46 48 64 77 Open Host File 29 80 Paste progress 97 Preferences 13 162 232 Replace 147 Save As 163 Script control 178 Tip of the Day 22 Directory 62 221 224 changing 73 creating 64 default HP UX 58 80 220 dialog 29 Font 15 112 layout 7
340. uses the full width of the application workspace and fits as many windows as possible in the available height Qedit Vancouver MPE ROUTINES PUB DEMO Jof x File Edit Text Mark View Script Options Window Help peli als 20 20 20 ee clo oe gale 1 lt lt ROUTINES QLIB DEV NOTES 2 FIX NEXT LINE CONTROL NOLIST SCONTROL SCONTROL NOLIST SCONTROL SUBPROGRAM MAIN ROUTINES ERRORS BEGIN lt lt QLIB SUBROUTINES call SPELLCONFIG using spell workspace spell model spell status area spell hyphen spell dummy arg if not spell stat ok then perform 98 spell error a EFA Line 51 Col 49 For help press F1 NUM lA Horizontally tiled windows with two documents If you prefer to see the windows side by side use ALT W V The application workspace will now look something like this It uses the full height of the application workspace Qedit tries to fit as many windows as possible in the width available Qedit for Windows User Manual Gedit Vancouver MPE COBOL4 PUB DEMO File Edit Text Mark View Script Options Window Help peli alsa 20 20 20 ee clo sala lt lt ROUTINES QLIE call SPELLCONFIG using s FIX NEXT LINE C 3 CONTROL NOLIST 4 CONTROL SUBPROGF 5 BEGIN 6 lt lt 7 QLIB SUBROUTINES o mu if not spell stat ok then perform 98 spell error 9 Purpose This sc call SPELLEND using spel 10 availak spel 11 compile spel 5 spel a
341. ut Open Files on page 59 Forcing a Close on a Host File Qedit always keeps track of what is going on with the server The server always acknowledges each transaction that it receives If a transaction is critical Qedit will not continue until it receives a confirmation from the server When a file is closed for example the document window remains on the screen until the server confirms that the file has been closed properly If there is a problem and Qedit does not receive an acknowledgment a document window might remain open If a user tries to repeat closing the file Qedit will display a Force Close dialog box because it is waiting to finish processing the first request Another symptom of an incomplete close operation is the continued appearance of transmission arrows If Qedit receives another close operation while an earlier close operation is still in progress you might see one of the following error messages in the Force Close dialog box Error closing connection name filename Close anyway Some information may be lost Unknown error closing filename Close anyway Some information may be lost Server error error number Connection name has not finished operation the file Do you want to close anyway Some information may be lost Select OK if you want Qedit to close the file without waiting for the server to respond As mentioned in the message you will be interrupting a transaction If data movement is inv
342. ut it physically removes all the tab characters and replaces them with the appropriate number of spaces The opposite is also true You can use the Entab command to convert spaces into tab characters Qedit looks at the text and the current tab stops When it detects the possibility of replacing one or more spaces by a single tab it does so In addition Typing Selecting amp Editing Text e 101 Qedit tries to preserve the visual alignment If need be it will combine tab characters and spaces Expanding Tabs in Clipboard When working with files on different platforms it is sometimes annoying to deal with tab characters If you are working with a local file and you want to make sure the text sent to the Clipboard does not contain tab characters simply enable the Expand tabs while copying option in the Copy Special dialog box Copy Special x EC Gpy to local clipboard peseeeeescesoeseesesecescesoeseesceseeseeseecesseeseseeesessesey IV Expand tabs while copying E m a Help Cancel Copy Special dialog box with Expand tabs while copying option This dialog box can also be useful when copying large amount of data from a host file to a local file See Workarounds to Clipboard Cache Problem on page 95 Working with Rectangular Selections Server version 4 8 or higher is required You can select text in specific columns instead of complete lines or a selection spanning multiple lines with different start and end colum
343. utes the commands in system configuration files such as Qeditmgr Pub Robelle on HP e3000 and opt robelle gqeditmgr on HP UX Commands in these configuration files are executed for anyone using Qedit on the host machine either as the host based editor or as the server Refer to the appropriate host based Qedit User Manual for details On MPE hosts other Qeditmgr configuration files can be installed in the Pub group of the logon account and in the logon group for a particular connection Execution of these files is optional and can be enabled in the Configure Server Settings dialog box You can enable one or both options to use the corresponding configuration file If they are both enabled the server executes the files in the sequence shown Pub first then the logon group immediately after the system configuration files The Pub and group Qeditmgr files are typically used to further customize a user s environment On UNIX hosts users can also have personal configuration files called geditmgr The server looks for this file in the user s home directory Unlike MPE these personal configuration files are always executed there is no option to enable Using the Qedservmode Variable The QEDSERVMODE variable on the hosts allows you to have different settings for the server version and for the host based version of Qedit QEDSERVMODE is always set to zero if you are in the regular mode and to non zero if you are in server mode If you are u
344. verything except the file name then copy the file name to the Clipboard 4 Go to the target file or application and paste the file name from the Clipboard That s the long way to do it You can also use the Copy Pathname to Clipboard command on the shortcut menu right click Handling Nonprinting Characters If you are working on files with nonprinting characters Qedit preserves these characters when you edit the file And if you need to edit the nonprinting characters you can set up a file library of nonprinting characters and use Qedit s convenient cut and paste feature to edit them To set up a file library of nonprinting characters see Inserting Nonprinting Characters on page 90 Minimizing Keystrokes Qedit for Windows User Manual If you prefer to use a keyboard Qedit s many shortcuts minimize your keystrokes In addition to common Windows editing functions Qedit shortcuts include searching for and moving text as well as creating and opening files Menu Shortcuts As you grow more familiar with Qedit s features you can incorporate keystroke shortcuts to quickly access application menus dialog boxes editing and searching features It takes only a few keystrokes to put you into vital parts of the program See Key Combinations and Functions on page 200 Letter Matching You can select a file you previously opened by typing only the first few letters of its name in a text box Qedit matches the letters you
345. website If you are planning to install the HP UX server you have to make sure the Qedit daemon is not running To determine if it is or not you can do the following 1 2 Log in as root on the system console or on a terminal Enter ps ef grep qedit This command looks at all the processes currently running on your system and selects only the ones that contain the string qedit You should get a listing similar to this root 165 240 2 12 05 29 ttyp4 0 00 grep gedit joe 140 122 0 09 16 57 0 10 opt robelle bin qedit d t root 122 1 0 Oct15 0 00 opt robelle bin qedit d t cybil 544 122 0 06 44 22 0 01 opt robelle bin qedit d t ricky 159 122 0 Oct10 0 01 opt robelle bin qedit d t The last column on the right shows the name of the programs selected The line that reads grep qedit is the command you used to get this listing Ignore it All the other ones running opt robelle bin qedit d t are Qedit server instances The line that shows a one 1 in the third column is the Qedit daemon process All the other processes are Qedit for Windows user connections In this example these connections are logged in as joe cybil and ricky If you know who these users are you should contact them and ask that they disconnect until the installation is complete Repeat the command in step 2 until the Qedit daemon is the only process left running This is the process you want to ultimately remove To do so you have t
346. ws Accessories ols Undo and Redo tools Qedit for Windows User Manual Qedit Vancouver MPE COBOL4 PUB DEMO File Edit Text Mark View Script Options Window Help Dos tal ala 80 F pai remote fl spell found spell not found spell bad word len spell bad line len spell no main aux spell no user aux spell no both aux spell user full Click and hold on the Open host file tool If you select a connection name under the Create host file or Open host file buttons the appropriate dialog box is displayed with the name you selected in the Connection text box Cut and Paste Tools The cut and paste group includes three buttons allowing easy access to the Cut Copy and Paste functions If you have not selected any text and have not sent anything to the Clipboard all three buttons are unavailable and appear dimmed If you select a block of text the Cut and Copy buttons become available Once you cut or copy your selection to the Clipboard the Paste button becomes available It remains available until you cut or copy a new selection even if you paste the contents This allows you to copy the same selection to different locations Undo and Redo Tools The undo redo group includes two buttons allowing you to reverse your edit operations or re apply an operation that has been reversed When you click Undo Qedit removes the changes you have made one at a time starting from the most recent change Of course if you have not made a
347. ws needs to resolve the host name or IP address you entered in the Connection List dialog box If there is a Domain Name Server DNS configured on your PC a host name is automatically converted to its corresponding IP address Most PCs come with a program called ping It allows the testing of connections to other machines on the network You can use it to make sure DNS is configured correctly and that the host name is reachable from your location If you cannot use the host name you can also try the exact IP address if you know it When you start a new Qedit for Windows session there is no connection unless one or more connections are configured with the Login at startup option Upon opening the first file Qedit for Windows must establish a link to the host By default it uses the Remote Process Management RPM feature of MPE iX RPM comes standard in MPE iX 5 0 or later If you are running earlier versions of MPE iX you have to purchase the NS 3000 product If your company uses firewalls and other network security devices the RPM protocol might not work If some of your connections require Qedit s firewall protocol refer to Firewall Protocol on MPE Connections on page 213 or the appropriate host based Qedit manual for complete server installation instructions Qedit sends the login information Jobname User Account Group and passwords if any RPM validates this information and returns a confirmation message If there is an error
348. xt Everything after the colon is read as the file name You can use relative or absolute notation just the file name or a fully qualified file name but you must use the notation appropriate for the operating system on which the file resides Qedit tries to open the application window with the restore size from the last edit session If the restore size is not large enough Qedit will not start properly and display an error To avoid this problem you can use the m argument to force it to start with a maximized window Opening Embedded Files The fastest way to open a file which has its name embedded in your document e g an Include file is by highlighting it and entering CTRL D Or you can open it by right clicking on the highlighted selection to get the shortcut menu and choosing the Open command You can also open it by selecting of the File menu pointing to Open and clicking the Open command with the selected file name If the host file you are opening is not fully qualified Qedit will look for the file in the current working directory UNIX or the current group MPE on the same connection as the current document If you want to open a file on a different connection you can specify the connection name as defined in the connection list as a prefix to the file name separated by a colon For example Vancouver MPE myfile mygrp Vancouver UX users clerk profile are valid file names If you select one of these str

User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents